2022 4xe Rubicon Manual

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
2 02 2 WRANG LER
your Jeep® brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only). OW NE R’ S M ANUAL
202 2 W R A N G L E R
U. S. Canada
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une Second Edition
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 22_JL_OM_EN_USC
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios,
right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
used in substitution therefore. cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. reference source for common questions.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca
Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. (Canada) or your local Jeep® brand dealer.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, or use public transportation.
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area WARNING
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
22_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 9 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 16 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 116 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ............................................................................................... 139 4
5 MULTIMEDIA ..............................................................................................................................207 5
6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................ 275 6

7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................330 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 347 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................. 417
9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................428
10
11 INDEX ............................................................................................................................................. 432
11
INTRODUCTION DOORS ....................................................................25 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ........................ 50

Manual Door Locks ..........................................25 Introducing Voice Recognition ........................50
SYMBOLS KEY........................................................ 10
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ....................26 Basic Voice Commands ...................................50
ROLLOVER WARNING .......................................... 10 Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry Get Started .......................................................51
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.......... 11 (If Equipped) ....................................................26 Additional Information .....................................51
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.............................................. 11 Automatic Door Locks — MIRRORS ............................................................... 51
If Equipped........................................................28 Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................51
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Child-Protection Door Lock System — Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ..............................52
KEYS ....................................................................... 16 Rear Doors........................................................28 Outside Mirrors ................................................52
Key Fob .............................................................16 Front Door Removal .........................................29 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .........................53
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 18 Rear Door Removal Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...........................53
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 19 (Four-Door Models) .........................................32 UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .........................19 Door Off Mirror Kit — If Equipped S .............34 (HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED S ...................... 53
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) .... 21 Half-Door Installation — If Equipped S ........36 Before You Begin Programming
How To Use Remote Start................................21 STEERING WHEEL ..................................................42 HomeLink® ......................................................53
To Exit Remote Start Mode..............................22 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column...................42 Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels............54
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ............42 Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
If Equipped........................................................22 SEATS .....................................................................43 Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device...................54
Remote Start Comfort Systems — Manual Adjustment Front Seats .....................43 Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
If Equipped .......................................................22 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four Door Opener ..............................................................54
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Models ..............................................................45 Programming HomeLink® To A
Activation — If Equipped ..................................23 Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two Door Miscellaneous Device......................................55
Remote Start Cancel Message........................23 Models ..............................................................45 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) ......... 23 Heated Seats — If Equipped ............................47 Button ...............................................................55
How To Use Remote Start................................23 Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped....................47 Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........55
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .... 24 Head Restraints ...............................................48 Security .............................................................56
To Arm The System .........................................24 Troubleshooting Tips........................................56
To Disarm The System ....................................24
Rearming Of The System .................................25
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 57 INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ...............69 FOLDING WINDSHIELD ......................................109
Headlight Switch...............................................57 Storage..............................................................69 Lowering The Windshield.............................. 110
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — USB/AUX Control..............................................69 Raising The Windshield ................................ 112
If Equipped .......................................................58 Power Outlets ..................................................71 HOOD ....................................................................112
High/Low Beam Switch....................................58 Power Inverter — If Equipped .........................72 Opening The Hood ........................................ 112
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped ....................73 Closing The Hood .......................................... 113
If Equipped .......................................................58 POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED ....................75 REAR SWING GATE .............................................113
Flash-To-Pass....................................................58 Auto-Down Feature .........................................75 Cargo Area Features .................................... 114
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..............58 Window Lockout Switch...................................76 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ............114
Lights-On Reminder..........................................59 Wind Buffeting .................................................76
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ........................59 WRANGLER TOPS .................................................76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
Turn Signals......................................................59 Provided Tools ..................................................76 INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................59 Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider®
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ......................................116
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................. 59 Position S ......................................................76
Interior Courtesy Lights....................................59 Raising The Soft Top S .................................87 Instrument Cluster Descriptions .................. 120
Dimmer Controls ..............................................60 Removing The Soft Top S .............................90 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ......................120
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .............. 60 Installing The Soft Top .....................................91 Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Windshield Wiper Operation ...........................60 Hard Top Front Panel(s) Removal S ............93 Controls.......................................................... 121
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped ...61 Hard Top Front Panel(s) Installation ...............97 Oil Change Reset — If Equipped................... 121
CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................. 62 Removing The Hard Top ..................................97 Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And Installing The Hard Top....................................99 Items .............................................................. 122
Functions ..........................................................62 Sunrider® For Hard Top ..................................99 Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And Power Sliding Top — If Equipped .................. 102 Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Functions ..........................................................65 DOOR FRAME ..................................................... 106 Actions — If Equipped ................................... 125
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — Diesel Displays .............................................. 126
Door Frame Removal .................................... 107
If Equipped........................................................67 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Messages ... 127
Door Frame Installation Four Door
Climate Voice Commands ...............................67 Fuel System Messages................................. 128
Models — If Equipped.................................... 107
Operating Tips .................................................68 Door Frame Installation Two Door
Models — If Equipped.................................... 109
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .................128 STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ...................157
Red Warning Lights ....................................... 128 (IF EQUIPPED)...................................................... 142 Four-Position Transfer Case —
Yellow Warning Lights ................................... 131 Automatic Transmission ............................... 143 If Equipped ................................................... 157
Yellow Indicator Lights .................................. 134 Extreme Cold Weather .................................. 143 Five-Position Transfer Case — If Equipped .. 159
Green Indicator Lights................................... 135 Normal Starting ............................................. 143 Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped ................ 161
White Indicator Lights ................................... 136 Starting Fluids ............................................... 144 Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Front And Rear —
Blue Indicator Lights ..................................... 137 NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE......... 144 If Equipped ................................................... 161
Gray Indicator Lights ..................................... 137 Cold Weather Precautions............................ 145 Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) Rear Only —
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ......137 Engine Idling .................................................. 145 If Equipped ................................................... 162
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Stopping The Engine ..................................... 146 Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect —
Cybersecurity ................................................. 137 Cooling System Tips — Automatic If Equipped ................................................... 162
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Transmission ................................................. 146 Off Road+ — If Equipped............................... 163
PROGRAMS ..........................................................138 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING .......164
GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) ................... 147 STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
STARTING AND OPERATING ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) ........................165
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE ENGINE DIESEL ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) ......................... 147 Autostop Mode .............................................. 165
(IF EQUIPPED) ......................................................139 PARKING BRAKE................................................. 148 Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED ....... 149 Autostop......................................................... 166
Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........... 139
Shifting........................................................... 150 To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ....... 139
Downshifting.................................................. 151 Mode .............................................................. 166
Normal Starting ............................................ 139
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
AutoPark ........................................................ 140
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................ 151 System ........................................................... 167
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or
Ignition Park Interlock................................... 152 To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
−30°C) .......................................................... 141
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) System ........................................................... 167
Extended Park Starting ................................. 141
System .......................................................... 153 System Malfunction ...................................... 167
If Engine Fails To Start .................................. 142
After Starting.................................................. 142 8–Speed Automatic Transmission .............. 153
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE MULTIMEDIA

TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) .........................167 ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) ....................................... 186
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .........................................207
Autostop Mode .............................................. 168 Fuel Filler Cap................................................ 186
CYBERSECURITY .................................................207
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ................... 187
UCONNECT SETTINGS .........................................207
Autostop......................................................... 168 REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL
Customer Programmable Features ............. 208
To Start The Engine While In Autostop ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) ....................................... 187
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION................................222
Mode .............................................................. 168 Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel ................... 188
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System Overview .......................................... 222
Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel................... 188
System ........................................................... 169 Drag & Drop Menu Bar ................................ 225
Diesel Exhaust Fluid...................................... 188
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start Safety And General Information................... 225
VEHICLE LOADING .............................................. 191
System ........................................................... 169 UCONNECT MODES .............................................226
Certification Label ......................................... 191
System Malfunction ...................................... 169 Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................... 226
TRAILER TOWING ............................................... 192
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — Radio Mode .................................................. 227
Common Towing Definitions......................... 192
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................169 Media Mode ................................................. 236
Trailer Hitch Classification............................ 193
Phone Mode ................................................. 239
Cruise Control................................................ 169 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® —
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ...................... 171 Weight Ratings) ............................................ 194
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED.........................................................250
Trailer And Tongue Weight............................ 194
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................180 Android Auto™ S ........................................ 250
Towing Requirements ................................... 195
Apple CarPlay® S ...................................... 252
ParkSense Sensors ....................................... 180 Towing Tips .................................................... 197
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips
ParkSense Warning Display.......................... 180 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
And Tricks ...................................................... 254
ParkSense Display ........................................ 180 MOTORHOME) ..................................................... 198
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .............. 182 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist IF EQUIPPED ........................................................254
Vehicle ........................................................... 198
System ........................................................... 182 Is My Vehicle Connected? ............................ 254
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 183 Introduction To Connected Vehicle
Models ........................................................... 198
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 183 Services ........................................................ 254
DRIVING TIPS....................................................... 200
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...............184 Getting Started With Connected Vehicle
On-Road Driving Tips..................................... 200
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..................185 Services ........................................................ 256
Off-Road Driving Tips .................................... 200
Using SiriusXM Guardian™ .......................... 257
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™ Account .. 267
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS ...........................267 SAFETY IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Connected Services SOS FAQs — SAFETY FEATURES.............................................. 275 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .........................330
If Equipped .................................................... 267
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 275 ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ......330
Connected Services Remote Door Lock/
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...... 276 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................333
Unlock FAQs .................................................. 267
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................... 284 Preparations For Jacking ............................. 333
Connected Services Roadside Assistance
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — Jack Location ................................................ 334
FAQs .............................................................. 268
If Equipped .................................................... 284 Spare Tire Removal ...................................... 335
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs —
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Jacking Instructions ...................................... 335
If Equipped .................................................... 268
Mitigation — If Equipped ............................... 288 JUMP STARTING .................................................338
Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs ... 268
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .... 290 Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 338
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................... 295 Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 340
Assistance FAQs — If Equipped ................... 269
Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 295 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...........................341
FAQs .............................................................. 269 Important Safety Precautions ...................... 295 MANUAL PARK RELEASE ...................................341
Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 296 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............................343
FAQs ............................................................... 269 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 302 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE..........................344
Connected Services Account FAQs — Child Restraints............................................. 314 Four Wheel Drive Models ............................. 345
If Equipped..................................................... 270 SAFETY TIPS ........................................................ 327 Without The Key Fob..................................... 345
Data Collection & Privacy.............................. 271 Transporting Passengers.............................. 327 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ......... 345
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES......272 Transporting Pets .......................................... 327 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 272 Connected Vehicles ...................................... 327 (EARS) ..................................................................346
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ....................272 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................346
The Vehicle ................................................... 327
Off-Road Pages Status Bar .......................... 273
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Drivetrain ...................................................... 273
Outside The Vehicle ...................................... 329
Accessory Gauge .......................................... 274 SCHEDULED SERVICING —
Exhaust Gas................................................... 329
Pitch & Roll ................................................... 274 GASOLINE ENGINE .............................................347
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ......................... 329
TrailCam — If Equipped ................................. 274 Maintenance Plan......................................... 348
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE ....351 Windshield Wiper Blades.............................. 368 INTERIORS ...........................................................411
Maintenance Plan — Diesel Fuel Up To B5 Exhaust System ............................................ 370 Carpet Safety Information ............................ 411
Biodiesel ........................................................ 352 Cooling System.............................................. 371 Carpet Removal............................................. 411
Additional Maintenance — B6 To B20 Brake System ............................................... 374 Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 415
Biodiesel ........................................................ 354 Front/Rear Axle Fluid ................................... 375 Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 416
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................355 Transfer Case ............................................... 376 Leather Surfaces........................................... 416
2.0L Gasoline Engine ................................... 355 Manual Transmission — If Equipped............ 376 Glass Surfaces ............................................. 416
3.6L Gasoline Engine ................................... 356 Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ...... 376
3.0L Diesel Engine ........................................ 357 Fuses ............................................................. 377 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Checking Oil Level ......................................... 358 Bulb Replacement......................................... 387 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ........417
Adding Washer Fluid ..................................... 358 TIRES ................................................................... 391
BRAKE SYSTEM ...................................................417
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 358 Tire Safety Information ................................. 391
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ..417
Pressure Washing ......................................... 359 Tires — General Information ......................... 398
Torque Specifications ................................... 417
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ....................................359 Tire Types....................................................... 401
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE ...418
Engine Oil....................................................... 360 Spare Tires — If Equipped ............................ 402
2.0L Engine ................................................... 418
Engine Oil Filter ............................................. 360 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care......................... 404
3.6L Engine ................................................... 418
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............................... 360 Snow Traction Devices ................................. 405
Reformulated Gasoline................................. 418
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter — Tire Rotation Recommendations ................ 406
Materials Added To Fuel............................... 418
Diesel Engine................................................. 362 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ........................ 419
Fuel Filter Replacement — Diesel Engine .... 363 UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ................... 406
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of Treadwear...................................................... 406
Vehicles ......................................................... 419
Fuel — Diesel Engine .................................... 364 Traction Grades............................................. 406
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 419
Intervention Regeneration Strategy — Temperature Grades..................................... 407
MMT In Gasoline ........................................... 419
Message Process Flow ................................. 365 STORING THE VEHICLE....................................... 407
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 420
Diesel Exhaust Fluid...................................... 365 BODYWORK ......................................................... 408 FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE ........420
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ................... 366 Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 408 Diesel Fuel Specifications ............................ 421
Air Conditioner Maintenance........................ 366 Body And Underbody Maintenance.............. 408 Biodiesel Fuel Requirements ....................... 421
Body Lubrication............................................ 368 Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 409 FLUID CAPACITIES ..............................................423
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...................424
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................426
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................ 428 WARRANTY INFORMATION................................429

FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 428 MOPAR® PARTS .................................................430
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center............... 428 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................430
YOUR VEHICLE ....................................................428
Mexico............................................................ 428 In The 50 United States And
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 428
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands................ 429 Washington, D.C............................................ 430
Prepare A List ................................................ 428
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or In Canada ...................................................... 430
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 428
Speech Impaired PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................430
(TDD/TTY) ...................................................... 429 GENERAL INFORMATION....................................431
Service Contract ........................................... 429
INTRODUCTION
1
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers
differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version
of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read this Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering,
transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving
off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial
and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 200.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording "If Equipped" or, if applicable, refer
to the “Hybrid Supplement” for additional information. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way.
FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical
and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about
your satisfaction.
10
SYMBOLS KEY ROLLOVER WARNING

These statements are against operating Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
WARNING! procedures that could result in a collision, bodily vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of
injury and/or death. gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
These statements are against procedures that wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles
CAUTION! can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is
could result in damage to your vehicle.
out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
A suggestion which will improve installation,
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions
NOTE: operation, and reliability. If not followed, may result
that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
in damage.
result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier carefully.
TIP:
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on
a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
Rollover Warning Label

If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings. severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use
of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each
year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
11
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS Red Warning Lights

WARNING! Door Open Warning Light 1
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its Ú page 129
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death. Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 129
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to Ú page 129
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
each symbol Ú page 128. Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
NOTE: Ú page 130
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear. Hood Open Warning Light
Red Warning Lights Ú page 130
Air Bag Warning Light Oil Pressure Warning Light

Ú page 128 Ú page 130
Brake Warning Light Oil Temperature Warning Light

Battery Charge Warning Light Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

12
Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights
Swing Gate Open Warning Light Low Fuel Warning Light

Transmission Temperature Warning Light Low Washer Fluid Warning Light

Vehicle Security Warning Light Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
AdBlue® (UREA) Injection System Failure Warning Light

Yellow Warning Lights Ú page 132
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

Ú page 131 Service 4WD Warning Light
Ú page 133
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light

Ú page 131 Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 133
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light

Ú page 132 Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 133
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light

Ú page 132 Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
Ú page 133
13
Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Indicator Lights
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light 1
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light Neutral Indicator Light
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light

Yellow Indicator Lights Ú page 135
4WD Indicator Light

Ú page 134 Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning Light
Ú page 135
4WD Low Indicator Light

Ú page 134 Sway Bar Indicator Light
Ú page 135
4WD Part Time Indicator Light

Ú page 134 Wait To Start Light
Ú page 135
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light

Ú page 134 Low Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue® (UREA) Indicator Light
Ú page 135
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light

Ú page 135 Water In Fuel Indicator Light
Ú page 135
14
Green Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
Indicator Light
Ú page 136
Ú page 135
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light 2WD High Indicator Light
4WD Auto Indicator Light Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light

Front Fog Indicator Light Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light

Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light Cruise Control SET Indicator Light

Stop/Start Active Indicator Light

Ú page 136
Turn Signal Indicator Lights

Ú page 136
15
Blue Indicator Lights Gray Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light 1

16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS WARNING!
KEY F OB Push the Mechanical Key Release Button only
with the key fob facing away from your body,
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which especially your eyes and objects that may be
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry damaged, such as clothing.
(RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), and
Remote Start (if equipped). The key fob allows you
to lock or unlock the doors and swing gate from CAUTION!
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The
key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle The electrical components inside of the key fob
to activate the system. The key fob also contains a may be damaged if the key fob is subjected to
mechanical key. strong electrical shocks. In order to ensure
complete efficiency of the electronic devices
NOTE: inside of the key fob, avoid exposing the key fob
 The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if Key Fob
to direct sunlight.
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, 1 — Mechanical Key Release Button
laptop, or other electronic device. This may 2 — LED Indicator
result in poor performance.
3 — Unlock Button
 With the ignition on and the vehicle moving at
4 — Remote Start Button
2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are
5 — Panic Button
disabled.
6 — Lock Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
NOTE: Key Left Vehicle Feature  Perchlorate Material — special handling may
 In case the ignition switch does not change with apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low perchlorate for further information.
vehicle while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery ON/RUN or START position, the message “Key Fob  Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
condition may be indicated by a message in the Has Left The Vehicle” will be shown in the the back housing or the printed circuit board.
instrument cluster display, or by the LED light on instrument cluster display along with an interior  When a key fob battery is low, a warning will be
2
the key fob. If the LED key fob light no longer illu- chime. An exterior audible and visual alert will also indicated on the vehicle’s instrument cluster,
minates from key fob button pushes, then the be activated to warn the driver. and the fob LED will no longer illuminate with a
key fob battery requires replacement. button press.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times
 Improper disposal of key fob batteries may be along with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior 1. Remove the back cover of the fob by inserting
harmful to the environment. Please see an lights. a flat-blade screwdriver into the slot on the
authorized dealer for proper battery disposal bottom of the fob. Pry until the cover unsnaps
NOTE:
Ú page 431. being careful not to damage the seal. Proceed
 The doors have to be open and then closed in
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate order for the vehicle to check for the presence of counterclockwise to pry the remaining snaps
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will not until the battery cover can be removed.
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock activate until all of the doors are closed.
all the doors and swing gate. To lock all the doors,  These alerts will not be activated in situations
push the lock button once. where the vehicle’s engine is left running with
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will the key fob inside.
flash and the illuminated entry system will be
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
activated. When the doors are locked, the turn
signals will flash and the horn will chirp. The recommended replacement battery is
CR2450.
NOTE:
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first NOTE:
push of the unlock button through the Uconnect  Customers are recommended to use a battery
Settings Ú page 207. obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin 1-3 – Back Cover Pry Points
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove the depleted battery by inserting a

small flat-blade screwdriver into the battery WARNING! WARNING!
removal slot and sliding the battery forward  The integrated key fob contains a coin cell  Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and up being careful not to damage the battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
electronic board underneath. chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is unattended.
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
 Always remember to place the Keyless
in just two hours and can lead to death.
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the OFF position.
 If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body, Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
seek immediate medical attention. authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
 Keep new and used batteries away from chil- programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
dren. If the battery compartment does not electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never
close securely, stop using the product and been programmed.
keep it away from children. NOTE:
 When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
Battery Replacement
Programming And Requesting Additional serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
3. Install the new battery into the key fob, making Key Fobs authorized dealer.
sure the positive (+) side is facing up. Slide the Programming the key fob may be performed by an  Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
battery until it is seated securely below the authorized dealer. match the vehicle locks.
tabs.
NOTE:
4. Reassemble the back cover making sure it is
 Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
SENTRY KEY
properly aligned before snapping it back in
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
place.
another vehicle. unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
 Only key fobs that are programmed to the
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button

ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to CAUTION!
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle compatible with some aftermarket Remote Start
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The systems. Use of these systems may result in
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from vehicle starting problems and loss of security 2
another vehicle. protection.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on have been programmed to the vehicle electronics
after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a Ú page 431. START/STOP Ignition Button
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
1 — OFF
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
that someone attempted to start the engine with
IGNITION SWITCH 2 — ACC
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION 3 — RUN
is used to start the engine but there is an issue
with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
The push button ignition can be placed in the
and shut off after two seconds. additional information.
following modes:
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal This feature allows the driver to operate the
OFF
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the the key fob is in the passenger compartment.  The engine is stopped.
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle The START/STOP ignition button has several  Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks,
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized operating modes that are labeled and will alarm, etc.) are available.
dealer. illuminate when in position. These modes are OFF, ACC
ACC, RUN, and START.
 Engine is not started.
 Some electrical devices are available.
RUN
WARNING!
 Driving position.
 When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
 All electrical devices are available.
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
START
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
 The engine will start. access to an unlocked vehicle.
NOTE:  Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
In case the ignition switch does not change with is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
the push of the START/STOP ignition button, the or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In this Children should be warned not to touch the
situation, a backup method can be used to operate Backup Starting Method
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob selector.
(side with the mechanical flip key) against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to operate  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
the ignition switch. or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
CAUTION! the ON/RUN position. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
 Do not use the Mechanical Key against the
vehicle.
START/STOP ignition button.
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked
 Do not use sharp metal objects (e.g. screw-
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
driver etc.) to pry the button out of the ignition
may cause serious injury or death.
switch. This button comes as an assembly, Do Not Use Mechanical Key
and is not removable. This can damage the
silicone shield.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE:  The parking lights will turn on and remain on

WARNING! during Remote Start mode.
 For more information on normal starting, see
Ú page 139.  Do not start or run an engine in a closed  For security, power window operation is
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
 When opening the driver's door with the ignition
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and mode.
in the ON/RUN position (engine not running), a
chime will sound to remind you to place the igni-
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
 The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
2
can cause serious injury or death when
tion in the OFF position. In addition to the chime, tion before the Remote Start sequence can be
inhaled.
the message will display “Ignition Or Accessory repeated for a third cycle.
On” in the cluster.  Keep key fobs away from children. Operation All of the following conditions must be met before
of the Remote Start system, windows, door the engine will remote start:
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED locks or other controls could cause serious
 Gear selector in PARK
injury or death.
(GASOLINE)  Doors closed
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for HOW TO USE R EMOTE S TART  Hood closed
additional information.  Swing gate closed
This system uses the key fob to start the Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle  Hazard switch off
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security. doors and swing gate will lock, the turn signals will  Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
The system has a range of 328 ft (100 m). flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice. Pushing  Battery at an acceptable charge level
the Remote Start button again will shut the engine
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold off.  Panic button not pushed
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all  System not disabled from previous Remote
ambient conditions before the driver enters the NOTE:
Start event
vehicle.  With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.  Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
NOTE:
 Remote Start can only be used twice.  Ignition in OFF position
 The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote  If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,  Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Start. the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10  All removable doors must not be removed
seconds.  Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) not illuminated
 Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob
may reduce this range Ú page 431.
NOTE: menu screen within Uconnect Settings

WARNING! Ú page 207. In warm weather, the driver vented
 To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
 Do not start or run an engine in a closed will disable for two seconds after receiving a seat feature will automatically turn on when the
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains valid Remote Start request. Remote Start is activated, if programmed in the
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and comfort menu screen. The vehicle will adjust the
 For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and climate control settings depending on the outside
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the ambient temperature.
can cause serious injury or death when
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
inhaled. Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
 Keep key fobs away from children. Operation display until you push the START/STOP ignition If Equipped
of the Remote Start system, windows, door button. The climate controls automatically adjust to an
locks or other controls could cause serious optimal temperature and mode, dependent on the
injury or death. REMOTE START F RONT DEFROST outside ambient temperature. When the ignition is
ACTIVATION — IF E QUIPPED placed in the ON/RUN position, the climate
controls will resume their previous settings.
TO EXIT R EMOTE START MODE When Remote Start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start system will automatically activate front defrost for  In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or
system, either push and release the unlock button 15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on the below, the climate settings will default to
on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, the maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
vehicle using Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry system will automatically adjust the settings cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
via the door handles, and disarm the Vehicle depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote vehicle will enter Mix mode.
Security system (if equipped). Then, prior to the Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the  In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
section for detailed operation.
START/STOP ignition button. 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if REMOTE START C OMFORT SYSTEMS — on the last settings selected by the driver.
the Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed I F E QUIPPED  In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
again, or if the engine is allowed to run for the above, the climate settings will default to MAX
entire 15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation on.
in the ON/RUN position, the climate controls will defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
resume previously set operations (temperature, The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat
control settings, see Ú page 62.
blower control, etc.). feature will turn on if programmed in the comfort
NOTE:  Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired

These features will stay on through the duration of
WARNING!
 Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the  Do not start or run an engine in a closed
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will The message will stay active until the ignition is
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
change, and exit the automatic defaults, if placed in the ON/RUN position.
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
manually adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and 2
in Remote Start mode. This includes turning the REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) can cause serious injury or death when
climate controls off using the OFF button. This system uses the key fob to start the inhaled.
engine conveniently from outside the
REMOTE START W INDSHIELD W IPER vehicle while still maintaining security.
 Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
DE–ICER ACTIVATION — I F EQUIPPED The system has a range of approximately locks or other controls could cause serious
When Remote Start is active and the outside 300 ft (91 m). injury or death.
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If ambient conditions before the driver enters the HOW TO USE R EMOTE S TART
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer vehicle. Push and release the Remote Start button on the
and operation will continue. NOTE: key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors and swing gate will lock, the turn signals will
REMOTE START C ANCEL MESSAGE  The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice. Pushing
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote
The following messages will display in the Start. the Remote Start button again will shut the engine
instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote off.
start or exits Remote Start prematurely:  Obstructions between the vehicle and the key
fob may reduce this range. NOTE:
 Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open  With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
 The Remote Start system will wait for the Wait
 Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open 15 minutes.
To Start Indicator Light Ú page 128 to extin-
 Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low guish before cranking the engine. This allows  Remote Start can only be used twice.
 Remote Start Cancelled — Swing Gate Open time for the engine pre-heat cycle to heat the  If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
cylinder air, and is normal in cold weather. the vehicle will start and then shut down in
10 seconds.
 The parking lights will turn on and remain on

WARNING! TO ARM THE SYSTEM
during Remote Start mode.
 Do not start or run an engine in a closed Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
 For security, power window operation is
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains system:
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode. Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and 1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and the OFF position.
 The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
can cause serious injury or death when 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
tion before the Remote Start sequence can be
inhaled. the vehicle:
repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before  Keep key fobs away from children. Operation  Push lock on the interior power door lock
the engine will remote start: of the Remote Start system, windows, door switch with the driver and/or passenger
locks or other controls could cause serious door open.
 Gear selector in PARK injury or death.
 Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
 Doors closed
Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail-
 Hood closed For additional Remote Start information, see able in the same exterior zone Ú page 26.
 Swing gate closed Ú page 22.  Push the lock button on the key fob.
 Hazard switch off
 Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED 3. If any doors are open, close them.
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
 Battery at an acceptable charge level The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition the doors using the manual door lock.
 Panic button not pushed switch for unauthorized operation. When the alarm
 Fuel meets minimum requirement is activated, the interior switches for door locks are TO DISARM T HE S YSTEM
disabled. The Vehicle Security system provides
 System not disabled from previous Remote The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using
both audible and visible signals. If something
Start event any of the following methods:
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security system will
 Vehicle Security system not active provide the following audible and visible signals:  Push the unlock button on the key fob.
 Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illumi- the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn  Grab the Passive Entry door handle (if equipped)
nated signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in Ú page 26.
the instrument cluster will flash.
 Water In Fuel Indicator Light is not illuminated  Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
 Wait To Start Indicator Light is not illuminated position.
NOTE: DOORS NOTE:

The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or
 The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
disarm the Vehicle Security system. CAUTION! unlock the doors, swing gate (if equipped with a
lock), glove compartment, and console storage.
 When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the Careless handling and storage of the removable
interior power door lock switches will not unlock door panels may damage the seals, causing WARNING!
the doors. 2
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
 For personal security reasons and safety in a
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
collision, lock the vehicle doors when you
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
MANUAL D OOR L OCKS drive, as well as when you park and exit the
vehicle.
of the previously described arming sequences has All doors are equipped with an interior rocker-type
occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm door lock lever. To lock a door when leaving your  When exiting the vehicle, always switch off the
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. vehicle, push the rocker lever forward to the lock ignition and remove the key from the vehicle.
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the position and close the door. To unlock the door, Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle push the rocker lever rearward. cause severe personal injuries and death.
Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the access to an unlocked vehicle.
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Vehicle Security system. Children should be warned not to touch the
REARMING O F T HE SYSTEM selector.
If something triggers the alarm and no action is  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will or in a location accessible to children. A child
turn the horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five Manual Door Lock could operate power windows, other controls,
seconds between cycles and up to eight cycles if or move the vehicle.
the trigger remains active) and then rearm itself.
POWER D OOR L OCKS — IF EQUIPPED WARNING!

these devices may interfere with the key fob’s
wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry
The power door lock switch is located on each front  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with system from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
door panel. Push the switch forward to unlock the access to an unlocked vehicle.  Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated
doors, and rearward to lock the doors.
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended approach (low beams, license plate lamp, posi-
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child tion lamps) for whichever time duration is set
or others could be seriously or fatally injured. between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry
Children should be warned not to touch the Unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear signal lamps.
selector.  If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a
or in a location accessible to children. A child
slower response time.
could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.  If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
Power Door Lock Switch vehicle will relock and, if equipped, will arm the
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — Vehicle Security system.
WARNING! P ASSIVE E NTRY (IF EQUIPPED) To Unlock From The Driver or Passenger Side
 For personal security reasons and safety in a The Passive Entry system is a feature that allows With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
collision, lock the vehicle doors when you you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and (1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
drive, as well as when you park and exit the swing gate without having to push the key fob lock unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
vehicle. or unlock buttons. handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
NOTE: Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock all
 When exiting the vehicle, always switch off the
doors and the swing gate automatically.
ignition and remove the key from the vehicle.  Passive Entry may be programmed on/off within
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may the Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
cause severe personal injuries and death.  The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
(Continued) Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device;
 A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door door handles, pushing the Passive Entry lock button
handle while a door is open. will lock the vehicle doors and the swing gate.
 A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open
doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be 2
executed. If it detects a Passive Entry key fob
inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and alert
the customer. If Passive Entry is disabled using
Uconnect system, the key protection described in
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock this section remains active/functional.
NOTE: NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock The vehicle will only unlock the doors during a Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door FOBIK-Safe operation when a valid Passive Entry
handle, depending on the selected setting in the key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle NOTE:
Uconnect system Ú page 207. will not unlock the doors when any of the following DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key conditions are true: door handle lock button. This could unlock the
(FOBIK-Safe) door(s).
 A second valid passive entry key fob is detected
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally outside of the vehicle (within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, Passive Entry door handle).
the Passive Entry system is equipped with an  The doors are manually locked using the door
automatic door unlock feature which will function lock knobs.
only if the ignition switch is in the OFF position.  Three attempts are made to lock the doors
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with a using the door panel switch, and then the doors
START/STOP ignition. There are three situations are closed.
that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Swing Gate
Entry vehicle:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
 A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front
key fob while a door is open. DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the NOTE: CHILD-P ROTECTION DOOR LOCK
lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door  After pushing the door handle button, you must
panel. SYSTEM — R EAR DOORS
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
To Unlock/Enter The Swing Gate the doors, using any Passive Entry door handle. To provide a safer environment for small children
This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
The swing gate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
is locked by pulling the door handle without the equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
into the swing gate handle. With a valid Passive
vehicle unlocking. system.
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the swing gate
handle, grab the swing gate handle to unlock the  If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect To use the system, open each rear door, use a
swing gate automatically, and pull the swing gate Settings, the key protection described in flat-blade screwdriver (or mechanical key) and
to open. "Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
(FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional.
 The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is depleted Ú page 431.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I F E QUIPPED
The Automatic Door Lock feature default condition
is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The Automatic Door Lock
Swing Gate Passive Entry Lock Button feature can be enabled or disabled by an Child-Protection Door Lock Function
authorized dealer per written request of the
To Lock The Swing Gate customer. Please see an authorized dealer for
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft service.
(1.5 m) of the swing gate handle, pushing the
Passive Entry lock button will lock the vehicle doors
and the swing gate.
NOTE: Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, it is

impossible to open the doors from inside the WARNING!
 When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using vehicle. Before getting out of the car, be sure to  All occupants must wear seat belts during
the outside door handle even though the inside check that there is no one left inside. off-road operation with doors removed. For
door lock is in the unlocked position. off-road driving tips, see Ú page 200.
FRONT DOOR REMOVAL
 After disengaging the Child-Protection Door  Do not store detached doors inside of the 2
Lock system, always test the door from the WARNING! vehicle, as they may cause personal injury in
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked posi- the event of an accident.
tion. Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
the doors removed as you will lose the
 After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the
protection they can provide. This procedure is
system, always test the door from the inside to furnished for use during off-road operation only. doors. If you choose to remove the doors, see an
make certain it is in the locked position. authorized dealer for a replacement cowl-mounted
 For emergency exit with the system engaged, outside mirror. Federal law requires outside
move the lock lever rearward (located on the mirrors on vehicles for on-road use.
door trim panel), roll down the window and open NOTE:
the door with the outside door handle.  Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
them.
WARNING!
 Hinge pin can break if overtightened during door
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. reinstall (Max Torque: 7.5 ft· lb / 10 N·m). For
Remember that the rear doors can only be off-road driving tips, see Ú page 200.
opened from the outside when the
 When front doors are removed, the message
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
“Blind Spot Alert Temporarily Unavailable” will
Door Removal Warning Label display in the instrument cluster display. Power
NOTE: Mirrors and Power Door Locks will also be
Always use this device when carrying children. unavailable.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to open a
door with the internal handle. Once the
To remove the front doors, proceed as follows: 5. Push and hold down the black security tab
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any under the wiring harness, and lift the harness
damage. lever into the open position.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper
and lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx
head driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear load
floor. Wiring Access Door
NOTE:
Do not force open; this will break the plastic cover.
4. Pull up on the red locking tab to unlock the Open Wiring Harness
wiring harness.
1 – Wiring Harness Lever (Open Position)
2 – Black Security Tab
6. With the wiring harness open, pull straight

downward on the wiring connector to unplug.
Store the wiring connector in the lower door
Hinge Pin Screw basket.
3. Remove the plastic wiring access door under
the instrument panel by sliding the plastic
panel along the door frame toward the seats
until the tabs are detached.
Closed Wiring Harness
1 – Red Locking Tab
2 – Wiring Harness Lever
7. With the door in the open position, remove the NOTE:

check bolt from the door check attachment on The upper hinge pin is longer, which can be used to
the bodyside (using a #T40 Torx head driver). assist in guiding the door into place during instal- CAUTION!
lation.  Do not close the door before reattaching the
door check to the body. Damage may occur to
the door check. 2
 Do not overtighten Torx fasteners, damage to
the vehicle’s parts will occur.
 Hinge pins can break if overtightened during
door install (Max Torque: 6.0 ft· lb/8.1 N·m).
Replacing The Wiring Connector Into The Wiring

Door Check (Detached) Harness
Hinge Pin Locations To reinstall the wiring connector on the vehicle’s
8. With the door open, lift the door with the help door into the harness just inside the vehicle,
of another person, to clear the hinge pins from 2. With the door in the open position, align the proceed as follows:
their hinges and remove the door. door check bracket with the hole on the
bodyside. Insert the check screw and tighten NOTE:
To Install The Front Doors using a #40 Torx head driver to 19.9 ft· lb Make sure there is plenty of slack on the wiring
1. Locate the upper and lower hinge pins on the (27.0 N·m). connector during installation. Close the door
door, and lower them into the body hinges on slightly to provide more slack if needed.
3. Insert the upper and lower hinge pin screws
the vehicle. into the body hinges. Tighten the screws using
a #T50 Torx head driver to 3.8 ft· lb / 5.2 N·m.
1. With light finger pressure, seat the wiring 5. Replace wiring access doors.
connector straight into the wiring harness
until the wiring harness lever starts to lower REAR DOOR REMOVAL
with the latching pin.
(F OUR-DOOR MODELS)
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
the doors removed as you will lose the
protection they can provide. This procedure is
Fully Closed Position furnished for use during off-road operation only.
3. Push the red locking tab downward to lock into

place.
4. Attach the cloth strap of the door onto the
Connecting The Wiring Harness metal hook just inside the vehicle.
1 — Seat Connector Straight Into Harness
2 — Wiring Harness Lever Starts To Lower
CAUTION!
Failure to correctly reconnect the wiring
Door Removal Warning Label
connector into the harness will result in damage
that is not covered by the New Vehicle Warranty.
2. After the harness lever has started to move

Cloth Strap Attachment
with the pressure of seating the wiring
connector, continue by lowering the wiring 1 — Metal Hook
harness lever to the fully closed position. 2 — Cloth Strap
NOTE:
WARNING! Squeeze the tab on the base of the wiring harness.
 All occupants must wear seat belts during This will unlock the connector tab, allowing the
off-road operation with doors removed. For wiring connector to be unplugged.
off-road driving tips, see Ú page 200.
 Do not store detached doors inside of the 2
vehicle, as they may cause personal injury in
the event of an accident.
NOTE: Hinge Pin Screw

 Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
them. 3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
 Hinge pin can break if overtightened during door 4. Pry open and remove the plastic wiring access
reinstall (Max Torque: 7.5 ft· lb / 10 N·m). For door from the bottom of the B-pillar.
off-road driving tips, see Ú page 200. Wiring Connector
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any 6. Remove the check screw from the center door
damage. check (using a #T40 Torx head driver).
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper
and lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx
head driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear load
floor.
Wiring Access Door
5. Unplug the wiring connector.
Door Check (Attached)

7. With the door open, lift the door with the help Use this QR code to access your
of another person, to clear the hinge pins from digital experience.
their hinges and remove the door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps

in the reverse order.
NOTE:
The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be
used to assist in guiding the door into place when
reinstalling.
Cowl Bolt Location
DOOR OFF M IRROR KIT — I F E QUIPPED
3. Push the mirror bracket forward onto the
If equipped with the Door Off Mirror Kit, exterior
A-pillar, making sure to align the bottom of the
rearview mirrors can be installed on to the upper
bracket with the upper door hinge, and the
body door hinges after the front doors have been
hole from the removed cowl bolt.
removed.
WARNING! Door Off Mirror
 All occupants must wear seat belts during To install the Door Off Mirrors, proceed as follows:
off-road operation with doors removed. For 1. Remove both front doors Ú page 29.
off-road driving tips, see Ú page 200.
2. Remove the cowl bolt closest to the door
 Do not store detached doors inside of the opening using a #40 Torx head driver, and
vehicle, as they may cause personal injury in store in a safe location.
the event of an accident.
Push Bracket Onto A-pillar

4. Place the bracket bushing behind the mirror

bracket (over the cowl bolt hole), then insert
the bracket bolt into the mirror bracket,
through the bracket bushing.
Attaching Mirror Bracket To The Vehicle Lower Mirror Assembly Onto Bracket
1 — Bracket Knob 8. Insert the three mirror screws into the mirror
2 — Hinge Shoulder Bolt assembly, and tighten into the mirror bracket
using a #30 Torx head driver. Recommended
Attaching Mirror Bracket To The Vehicle torque specification for the mirror screws is
6. Tighten both the bracket bolt and the hinge 4 ft-lb (5.5 N·m).
1 — Bracket Bushing shoulder bolt with a #40 Torx head driver.
2 — Bracket Bolt Recommended torque specification for the
bracket bolt is 6 ft-lb (8 N·m), and 7.5 ft-lb
(10 N·m) for the hinge shoulder bolt.
5. Insert the hinge shoulder bolt through the
7. Lower the mirror assembly onto the mirror
bottom of the upper door hinge up into the
bracket.
mirror bracket, then rotate the bracket knob
toward the rear of the vehicle to secure the
mirror bracket to the A-pillar.
Mirror Screw Locations

9. Repeat the steps on the other side of the NOTE:

vehicle. CAUTION! The upper hinge pin is longer, which can be used to
 Store the zipper pulls of the upper half-door assist in guiding the door into place during instal-
NOTE: windows at the upper B-pillar area for both lation.
If this kit is being installed with the optional lamp front and rear doors to avoid damage to the
bracket, the bracket bushing from step 4 is not windows when not in use.
needed. Use the spacer from the lamp bracket.
 Do not attempt to operate the half-door zipper
HALF-D OOR I NSTALLATION — in temperatures of 41°F (5°C) or below.
I F EQUIPPED Damage to the window may occur.
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for

Use this QR code to access your
additional information.
digital experience.
CAUTION! This vehicle may be equipped with
half-doors. To install the
 Do not run half-doors through an automatic half-doors in the vehicle, follow Lower Half-Door Hinge Pins
car wash. This may result in scratches and the instruction sheet packaged in
wax buildup on the windows. 3. Insert the upper and lower hinge pin screws
the box the doors were received
into the body hinges. Tighten the screws using
 Careless handling and storage of the in. Replacement parts may be purchased through
a #T50 Torx head driver to 3.8 ft· lb / 5.2 N·m.
half-doors may damage the seals resulting in Mopar® Service.
water leaks into the interior of the vehicle. To install the front or rear half-doors, proceed as CAUTION!
 The upper half-doors must be positioned prop- follows:
 Do not close the door before reattaching the
erly to ensure sealing. Improper installation 1. Remove the full doors from the vehicle. For door check to the body. Damage may occur to
can cause water leaks into the interior of the front door removal, see Ú page 29. For rear the door check.
vehicle. door removal, see Ú page 32.
 Do not overtighten Torx fasteners, damage to
(Continued) 2. Locate the upper and lower hinge pins on the
the vehicle’s parts will occur.
lower half-door, and lower them into the body
hinges on the vehicle.  Hinge pins can break if overtightened during
door install (Max Torque: 6.0 ft· lb/8.1 N·m).
4. Attach the cloth strap of the lower half-door to

the metal hook just inside the vehicle.
Front Door Wiring Harness Place Tool Into Service Hole Of Plug To Remove
1 — Open Wiring Harness c. Using the tool, slowly pull upwards from the
Cloth Strap Attachment 2 — Closed Wiring Harness center of the plug to remove.
1 — Metal Hook 8. Making sure the window on the upper

2 — Cloth Strap 6. Replace wiring access doors. half-door is completely zipped closed, insert
7. When the half-doors are shipped with the the upper half-door into the lower half-door by
vehicle, the lower half-doors will have plugs in placing the posts into the post holes.
5. Connect the wiring harness on the lower
the post holes that must be removed prior to
half-door to the connection just inside the
upper half-door installation. To remove these
vehicle.
plugs, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
a. Locate the service hole in the center of each
For front doors, make sure the wiring harness is
plug of the lower half-door (two on each
closed completely.
front and rear door).
b. Place a tool (hook tool or trim stick is recom-
mended) in the service hole.
Lower The Upper Half-Door Into Post Holes

9. Push down firmly on the inside of the upper

half-door until it is fully seated in the lower half.
Check Door Latch And Striker Alignment Hinge Bolt Locations

NOTE: 2. With the bolts loose, hold the door in the
Push Down To Fully Seat Upper Half-Door Only adjust the door to fit correctly against the almost closed position, and check that the
striker. DO NOT adjust the striker, as this could latch and striker align.
1 — Push Down On Inside Of Upper Half-Door affect the positioning of the full door. 3. With the latch and striker aligned, proceed to
2 — Fully Seated Upper Half-Door If the door does not center align between the latch close the door softly and tighten the hinge
and the striker, proceed as follows: bolts to 20.3 ft· lb / 27.5 N·m (Max Torque:
Door Latch Alignment 1. Loosen (do not remove) the four bolts on the 27.3 ft· lb / 37 N·m).
door hinges using the provided #T50 Torx
CAUTION! Lower Door Adjustment
head driver.
Upon first installation of the half-doors, slowly CAUTION!
set the door almost to the closing position and
check how the door latch aligns with the body Upon first installation of the half-doors, slowly
striker. Touch condition between these close each door to check for body contact.
components can result in damage to both the Improper setting of the door hinges can cause
door and the striker. extreme non-uniform conditions, and result in
damage to the body around the door.
If the door does not latch properly after 3. Once the gaps between the door and vehicle
installation, if there is interference between the body are uniform around the entire door,
panels, or if a non-uniform gap around the door is tighten the door hinge bolts to 20.3 ft· lb /
observed when the door is closed (example: door 27.5 N·m (Max Torque: 27.3 ft· lb / 37 N·m).
position appears to be low and too far rearward),
the position of the door on its hinges may need to Upper Door Adjustment 2
be adjusted. To do this, proceed as follows: After installation of the half-doors, if water leaks or
1. Loosen (do not remove) the four bolts on the wind noise is observed, the seal of the upper
door hinges using the provided #T50 Torx half-door to the door opening may need to be
head driver. adjusted.
To determine if the upper half-door needs to be Performing A Paper Test
adjusted, proceed as follows:
There is another optional test that can be
1. Determine which door is affected.
performed using a flashlight and the help of
2. Open the affected door and hold a dollar-size another person.
piece of paper along the top of the door
One person should be inside the vehicle, and move
opening against the vehicle near where the
the flashlight around the periphery of the door
leak/noise was observed. Make sure half of
seal, shining outward. The other person should
the paper is above the area where the door
stand outside of the vehicle and check for light
seal contacts the door opening, while the other
passing by the seal. If light is seen through the seal
half is below.
area, the door will need to be adjusted.
Hinge Bolt Locations 3. Close the door on the paper, then pull the
paper upward. If the paper moves with little to
NOTE: no effort, the upper half-door will need to be
Do not adjust the body mounted hinges, or any part adjusted in that area to increase seal
of the door latch, as modifications to these parts compression.
will affect installation of the full door.
2. With the bolts loose, the door can be moved
forward by pushing the door handle toward the
front of the vehicle, and/or upward by grabbing
the door handle and lifting towards the roof.
To adjust the seal compression, proceed as 3. Using a 3 mm Allen wrench (not provided), 4. Tighten the nut inside the bottom of the post
follows: rotate the screw on the side of the post using the wrench and make sure the screw
1. Open the door and lift the upper half-door up counterclockwise (while holding the wrench on head is flush to the post. Reinstall the upper
and away from the lower half. Lay the upper the loosened bolt) to increase the seal half-door.
half-door on a clean, dry surface. compression. If needed, rotate clockwise to
reduce seal compression.
2. Using an 8 mm open-end wrench (not
provided), loosen the nut located inside the
bottom of the upper half-door post, closest to
where the “paper test” detected a gap.
Screw Head Flush To Post

5. Close the door and repeat the “paper test”.
Rotate Screw For Seal Compression
Repeat the adjustment procedure if needed.
1 — 3 mm Allen Wrench
2 — 8 mm Open-End Wrench
Nut Location Inside Bottom Of Post
6. If needed, add the provided shim to a lower Half-Door Removal

half-door pocket to seal the upper half-door to To remove the half-doors, repeat the installation
the roof: steps in reverse order.
a. Lift upper half-door up and away from lower NOTE:
half. When removing the upper half-doors, push upward
b. Clean the bottom of the door pocket. firmly on the middle of the upper half-door until the
2
posts detach from the lower half.
Press Shim Firmly Into Bottom Of Pocket

1 — Remove Paper Backing From Shim
2 — Slide Pencil through Hole In Shim
3 — Press Pencil With Shim Into Pocket
f. Replace upper half-door.

Remove Upper Half-Door & Clean Bottom Of Door Pocket
NOTE: Push Upward To Remove Upper Half-Door
c. Slide the shim onto a pencil or similar tool. If the compression is increased too much on the
d. Remove the paper backing from the adhe- front upper corner of the rear doors, deformation 1 — Fully Seated Upper Half-Door
sive side of the shim and place the shim of the seal will occur. 2 — Push Upward On Middle Of Upper Half-Door
with pencil into the pocket.
e. Press the shim firmly to the bottom of the
pocket, and remove the pencil once the
shim is firmly in place.
STEERING WHEEL WARNING!

NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN Do not adjust the steering column while driving. steering wheel to operate.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or For information on use with the Remote Start
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column driving with the steering column unlocked, could system, see Ú page 22.
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
or shorten the steering column. The tilt/ Failure to follow this warning may result in WARNING!
telescoping lever is located on the steering serious injury or death.
column.  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
HEATED S TEERING WHEEL — diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
I F E QUIPPED conditions must exercise care when using the
The steering wheel contains a heating steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
element that helps warm your hands in even at low temperatures, especially if used
cold weather. The heated steering wheel for long periods.
has only one temperature setting. Once
 Do not place anything on the steering wheel
the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
will stay on until the operator turns it off. The
or steering wheel covers of any type and mate-
heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is
rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Lever already warm.
to overheat.
The heated steering wheel control button is
To unlock the steering column, push the control located within the climate or controls screen of the
handle downward (toward the floor). To tilt the touchscreen.
steering column, move the steering wheel upward
or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten  Push the heated steering wheel button once to
the steering column, pull the steering wheel turn the heating element on.
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the  Push the heated steering wheel button a second
steering column in position, push the control time to turn the heating element off.
handle upward until fully engaged.
SEATS have reached the desired position. Then, using body

pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver's seat height can be raised or lowered by
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
using the ratcheting handle, located on the
of the vehicle.
outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the
WARNING! handle to raise the seat, push downward on the
handle to lower the seat. Several strokes may be 2
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside necessary to achieve the desired position.
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or Adjustment Bar Location
killed.
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat WARNING!
and using a seat belt properly.
 Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could Seat Height Adjustment
MANUAL A DJUSTMENT FRONT S EATS result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
 Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
Adjustment
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by Serious injury or death could result from a
using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, poorly adjusted seat belt.
near the floor. While sitting in the seat, lift up on the
bar located under the seat cushion and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment Lumbar Support

To recline the seat, pull on the recline strap and The lumbar control knob is located on the outboard
lean forward or backward, depending on the side of the front driver seat. Rotate the control
direction you would like the seatback to move. forward to increase and rearward to decrease the
Release the strap when the desired position is desired amount of lumbar support.
reached and the seatback will lock into place.
Easy Entry Lever

To return the seat to a sitting position, fold the
seatback upright until it locks and push the seat
rearward until the track locks.
NOTE:
Lumbar Control Knob  The front passenger seats have a track memory,
Recline Strap which returns the seat to its original position.
Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat —
 The recline strap and easy entry lever should not
WARNING! Two Door Models be used during the automatic returning of the
Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on the seat to its sitting position.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
outboard side of the seatback, and slide the entire
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
seat forward.
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
60/40 S PLIT F OLDING R EAR SEAT — To Fold Down The Rear Seat normal. By simply unfolding the seats to the open
position, the seat cushion will return to its normal
FOUR D OOR MODELS There are two release levers located on each upper
shape over time.
outboard side of the rear seat. The larger of the two
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat release levers folds down the seat and the head To Raise The Rear Seat
can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo restraint simultaneously. The smaller lever folds Raise the seatback and lock it into place. Then,
space. down the head restraint independently for raise the head restraint until it locks into place. If 2
NOTE: improved visibility. interference from the cargo area prevents the
 Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and To fold the seat, lift upward on the large release seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat lever and slowly fold down the seatback. The head returning the seat to its proper position.
to fold down easily. restraint will fold automatically with the seat when
this lever is pulled. WARNING!
 The center head restraints must be in the lowest
position to avoid contact with the center console Be certain that the seatback is securely locked
when folding the seat. into position. If the seatback is not securely
locked into position the seat will not provide the
WARNING! proper stability for child seats and/or
passengers. An improperly latched seat could
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
cause serious injury.
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. FOLD AND TUMBLE REAR S EAT —
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your TWO DOOR MODELS
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts. Seatback Release Lever NOTE:
 Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be neces-
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat NOTE: sary to reposition the front seats.
and using a seat belt properly. You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are  Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
left folded for an extended period of time. This is positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat
to fold down easily.
Folding The Rear Seat 2. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the 3. To reinstall the rear seat, just reverse these
seatback forward. steps.
NOTE:
Do not drive the vehicle without reattaching the
rear seat latches.
WARNING!
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
Rear Seat Tumble Position Retention Strap area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
2. To return the seat to its normal upright sion, people riding in these areas are more
position, reverse these steps. likely to be seriously injured or killed.
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
Rear Seatback Release Lever Removing The Rear Seat vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward. 1. Push down on the release bar on each side, seat belts.
and pull the seat out and away from the lower  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
Using The Retention Straps bracket. and using a seat belt properly.
1. There are two retention straps located on the
back of the rear seat and two corresponding  In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
wire loops located on the back of each could be injured if seats are not properly
B-pillar. Open the hook-and-loop fastener on latched to their floor attachments. Always be
the strap and thread through the wire loop. sure that the seats are fully latched.
Fold the hook-and-loop fastener over to keep
the seat in the folded position. This should be
done on both sides.
Release Bar Location

HEATED S EATS — IF E QUIPPED WARNING!

The heated seat control buttons are  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
located on the center instrument panel skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
below the touchscreen and also in the diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
Climate Control touchscreen menu. alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical 2
 Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI condition must exercise care when using the
setting on. seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
 Push the heated seat button a second time to temperatures, especially if used for long
turn the MED setting on. periods of time.
 Push the heated seat button a third time to turn  Do not place anything on the seat or seatback Rear Seat Armrest
the LO setting on. that insulates against heat, such as a blanket NOTE:
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to The cupholder liner can be removed for cleaning.
 Push the heated seat button a fourth time to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
turn the heating elements off.
heated could cause serious burns due to the WARNING!
NOTE: increased surface temperature of the seat.
 The engine must be running for the heated Be certain that the seatback is securely locked
seats to operate. into position. If the seatback is not securely
REAR SEAT A RMREST — IF E QUIPPED locked into position the seat will not provide the
 The level of heat selected will stay on until the proper stability for child seats and/or
operator changes it. The center part of the rear seat can also be used
passengers. An improperly latched seat could
as a rear armrest with cupholders. To unfold it,
For information on use with the Remote Start cause serious injury.
grab the pull strap under the head restraint and
system, see Ú page 22.
pull it forward.
HEAD R ESTRAINTS release button at the base of each post while

WARNING!
pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of restraint, put the head restraint posts into the  ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
injury by restricting head movement in the event of holes and push downward. Then adjust it to the the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted appropriate height. Follow the reinstallation instructions prior to
so that the top of the head restraint is located operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
above the top of your ear.
WARNING! NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
 All occupants, including the driver, should not to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain addi-
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until tional clearance to the back of the head.
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck Rear Head Restraints — Two Door Models
injury in the event of a crash. The rear seat is equipped with non-adjustable, but
foldable head restraints.
 Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the
Front Head Restraint release strap located on the upper outboard side
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or 1 — Release Button of each rear seat.
death in the event of a collision. 2 — Adjustment Button
Front Head Restraints

WARNING!
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push  A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
the adjustment button located on the base of the collision or hard stop could cause serious
head restraint, and push downward on the head injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
restraint. The release button does not need to be Always securely stow removed head restraints
pushed to adjust the head restraint. in a location outside the occupant compart-
ment.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the adjustment button and the (Continued) Rear Head Restraint Folding Strap Location
WARNING!
 ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions prior to
operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. 2
Rear Head Restraints — Four Door Models

The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable, but
foldable, outboard head restraints, as well as an
Rear Head Restraints Folded Rear Head Restraint Folded
adjustable, removable center head restraint.
To return the head restraint to its upward position, To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the To return the head restraint to its upward position,
lift up on the head restraint until it locks into place. inner release lever, located on the upper part of lift up on the head restraint until it locks into place.
For information on child seat tether routing, see the rear seat. To raise the center head restraint, lift up on the
Ú page 295. head restraint. To lower the center head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the base of
WARNING! the head restraint, and push down on the head
restraint.
 Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat
head restraints installed while passengers are To remove the center head restraint, push the
occupying the rear seat. In a collision, people release button, located on the base of the head
riding in this area without the head restraints restraint, and pull upward on the head restraint.
installed are more likely to be seriously injured To install the head restraint, hold the release
or killed. button while pushing downward on the head
 A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli- restraint. For information on child seat tether
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or routing, see Ú page 295.
Rear Head Restraint Lever
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always NOTE:
securely stow removed head restraints in a Lower the center head restraint to avoid contact
location outside the occupant compartment. with the center console when folding the seat
(Continued) down.
WARNING!
 Do not drive the vehicle without the rear seat
head restraints installed while passengers are
occupying the rear seat. In a collision, people
riding in this area without the head restraints
installed are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
 A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Always securely stow removed head restraints
in a location outside the occupant compart- Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
ment.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
 ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
The following basic Voice Commands can be given
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Follow the reinstallation instructions prior to
operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say:
 “Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION  “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
I NTRODUCING V OICE RECOGNITION Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Commands.
 “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control Recognition system’s status.
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
GET S TARTED 1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And

Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate Send Or Receive A Text
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the
your Voice Recognition system. 2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition: Radio, Media, And Climate Functions the day position (toward the windshield).
3 — Push To End Call 2
 Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition. ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION
 Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume © 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
while facing straight ahead. Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
 Each time you give a Voice Command, first push Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
the VR button, wait until after the beep, then say SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
your Voice Command. trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Ú page 431.
 You can interrupt the help message or system For Uconnect system support, call
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
Voice Command from the current category. or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or Adjusting Rearview Mirror
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
MIRRORS The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
I NSIDE REARVIEW M IRROR on the view through the rear window.
The mirror automatically adjusts to headlight glare
Manual Mirror — If Equipped from vehicles behind you.
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons

NOTE: I LLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center
view. one of the visors and lift the cover. of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the
optimal view.
Automatic Dimming Mirror

The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on
or off through Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
CAUTION! Vanity Mirror

Outside Rearview Mirror
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
WARNING!
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean. Vehicles and other objects seen in the
passenger side convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than they really are. Relying too
much on your passenger side mirror could cause
you to collide with another vehicle or other
object. Use your inside mirror when judging the
size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
passenger side mirror.
HEATED M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER  To operate HomeLink®, push and release any
of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED buttons will activate the devices they are
programmed to with each press of the corre-
whenever you turn on the rear window sponding HomeLink® button.
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 62.
 The HomeLink® indicator light is located above 2
POWER M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED the center button.
The power mirror controls are located on the door NOTE:

panel next to the door handle. HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security
system is active Ú page 431.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
HOMELINK®
HomeLink® Buttons On Sun Visor For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is
Use this QR code to access your recommended that a new battery be placed in the
digital experience. hand-held transmitter of the device that is being
 HomeLink® replaces up to programmed to the HomeLink® system. Make
three hand-held transmitters sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed to
that operate devices such as activate the device you are trying to program your
Power Mirror Switch garage door openers, motor- HomeLink® button to.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select ized gates, lighting, or home Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To security systems. The HomeLink® unit is garage before you begin programming.
adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels
button to select the mirror that you want to adjust.  The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the of your HomeLink® before you use it for the first
Using the mirror control switch, push any of the overhead console or sun visor designate the time.
four arrows for the direction that you want the three different HomeLink® channels.
mirror to move.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK® not be immediately visible when looking at the 3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
device. The name and color of the button may vary want to program while you push and hold the
C HANNELS slightly by manufacturer. garage door opener transmitter button you are
To erase the channels, follow this procedure: NOTE: trying to replicate.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
position. you normally use to operate the device. HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink®
Non-rolling Code Devices indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
Once this happens, release both buttons.
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes. have a rolling code. These devices will also not NOTE:
have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. Make sure the garage door opener motor is
NOTE:
PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
Erasing all channels should only be performed
non-rolling code final steps.
when programming HomeLink® for the first time. GARAGE DOOR OPENER Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
Do not erase channels when programming addi-
tional buttons. To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to NOTE:
activate your garage door opener motor, refer to You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
I DENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A the following steps: code final step 2, after completing rolling code
R OLLING C ODE OR N ON-R OLLING C ODE NOTE: final step 1.
DEVICE All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this 1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
Before programming a device to one of your when programming additional buttons. button. This can usually be found where the
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether 1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN hanging antenna wire is attached to the
the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code. position. garage door opener motor. Firmly push and
Rolling Code Devices 2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the 2. Return to the vehicle and push the
good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, HomeLink® button you wish to program, while programmed HomeLink® button three times
devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view. (holding the button for two seconds each
codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a time). If the garage door opener motor
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the operates, programming is complete.
antenna is attached to the device. The button may
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
confirm that the garage door opener motor without starting the engine.
operates. If the garage door opener motor MISCELLANEOUS D EVICE
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button
does not operate, repeat the final steps for the The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a until the HomeLink® Indicator light begins to
rolling code procedure. miscellaneous device follows the same procedure flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
as programming to a garage door opener button. 2
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps Ú page 54.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® Be sure to determine if the device has a rolling Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
button and observe the HomeLink® indicator code, or non-rolling code before beginning the Garage Door Opener” and follow all remaining
light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays programming process. steps.
on constantly, programming is complete.
NOTE:
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds P ROGRAMMING
of transmission, which may not be long enough for
does not operate, repeat the steps from the HomeLink® to pick up the signal during For programming transmitters in Canada/United
beginning. programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some States that require the transmitter signals to
US gate operators are designed to time-out in the “time-out” after several seconds of transmission.
WARNING! same manner. The procedure may need to be Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter
performed multiple times to successfully pair the signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds
 Your motorized door or gate will open and close
device to your HomeLink® buttons. of transmission – which may not be long enough
while you are programming the universal trans-
for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people REPROGRAMMING A S INGLE programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some
or pets are in the path of the door or gate.
HOMELINK® B UTTON U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the
 Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or same manner.
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has
confined area while programming the trans- It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
been previously trained, without erasing all the
ceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains cycling process to prevent possible overheating of
channels, refer to the following procedure. Be sure
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and the garage door or gate motor.
to determine if the new device you want to program
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous
the HomeLink® button to has a rolling code or a
when inhaled and can cause you and others to
non-rolling code.
be severely injured or killed.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. If you unplugged the garage door opener/device TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches for programming, plug it back in at this time.
If you are having trouble programming
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
HomeLink®, here are some of the most common
you wish to program while keeping the (Canadian/Gate Operator)
solutions:
HomeLink® indicator light in view. To reprogram a channel that has been previously
 Replace the battery in the garage door opener
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® trained, follow these steps:
hand-held transmitter.
button, while you press and release (cycle) 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
your hand-held transmitter every two seconds  Push the LEARN button on the garage door
until HomeLink® has successfully accepted 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button opener to complete the training for a rolling
the frequency signal. The indicator light will until the indicator light begins to flash after code.
flash slowly and then rapidly when fully 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
 Did you unplug the device for programming and
trained. 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with remember to plug it back in?
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change “Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
flash rates. When it changes, it is step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
longer in rare cases. The garage door may SECURITY assistance.
open and close while you are programming. It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® turn in your vehicle. WARNING!
button and observe the indicator light. To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons  Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
NOTE: for 20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the
 If the indicator light stays on constantly, that all channels will be erased. Individual garage while programming the transceiver.
programming is complete and the garage channels cannot be erased. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
door/device should activate when the The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled (Continued)
HomeLink® button is pressed. when the Vehicle Security system is active.
 To program the two remaining HomeLink® NOTE:
buttons, repeat each step for each The universal garage door opener only operates
remaining button. DO NOT erase the chan- when the engine is running for security reasons
nels. associated with removable tops and doors.
WARNING! 1 — Headlight Control

2 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
 Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal 3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if 4 — Fog Light Switch
people, pets or other objects are in the path of 2
the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with NOTE:
a garage door opener that has a “stop and Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head-
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety light switch with an AUTO and ON detent but
standards. This includes most garage door without an OFF detent. Headlights will be deacti-
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do Headlight Switch vated when the headlight switch is placed in the
not use a garage door opener without these parking lights position. However, the Daytime
safety features. 1 — Headlight Control Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along with
2 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS 4 — Fog Light Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first
HEADLIGHT SWITCH detent for parking light and instrument panel light
operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the
The headlight switch is located on the left side of second detent for headlight, parking light, and
the instrument panel. This switch controls the instrument panel light operation.
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
NOTE:
automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight
panel lights, interior lights, and fog lights (if
switch clockwise from the parking lights and
equipped).
instrument panel lights position to the first detent
to turn on headlights, parking lights, and
instrument panel lights. Rotate the headlight
switch to the second detent for the AUTO position.
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
DAYTIME RUNNING L IGHTS (DRLS) —  Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and

taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
I F EQUIPPED cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
The Daytime Running Lights are active when the the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
low beams are not on, and the engine is running. tions on the windshield or camera lens will
DRLs may be deactivated by applying the parking cause the system to function improperly.
brake.
FLASH-T O-P ASS
NOTE:
Multifunction Lever You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
 For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
Running Lights will automatically deactivate AUTOMATIC HIGH B EAM HEADLAMP This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
when the front fog lights are turned on.
CONTROL — I F EQUIPPED and remain on, until the lever is released.
 On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on system provides increased forward lighting at night This system automatically turns the headlights on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when by automatically controlling the high beams or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the
the hazard warning lights are activated). through the use of a camera mounted on the system on, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to
vehicle’s header. This camera detects vehicle
HIGH/LOW B EAM S WITCH specific light and automatically switches from high
the last detent for automatic headlight operation.
When the system is on, the headlight time delay
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle feature is also on. This means the headlights will
panel to switch the headlights to high beams. The is out of view. stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
lever will return to the centered position. To return NOTE: ignition into the OFF position. To turn the
the headlights to low beam, pull the lever toward  The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control automatic system off, move the headlight switch
the steering wheel, or push the lever toward the can be turned on or off by selecting “ON” under out of the AUTO position.
instrument panel. “Auto High Beam” within your Uconnect Settings NOTE:
Ú page 207, as well as turning the headlight The engine must be running before the headlights
switch to the AUTO position and placing the will come on in the automatic mode.
multifunction lever in the high beam position.
LIGHTS-O N R EMINDER INTERIOR LIGHTS

If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are
left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
I NTERIOR C OURTESY L IGHTS
position, a chime will sound when the driver’s door The courtesy lights will turn on when the front
is opened. doors are opened, by rotating the dimmer controls 2
on the headlight switch fully upward, or, if
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED equipped, when the unlock button is pushed on
To activate the Front Fog Lights, turn on the the key fob.
parking lights or low beam headlights and push the The interior courtesy lights are located in the
fog light switch. Pushing the fog light switch a Front Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada) center of the vehicle’s sport bar, and consist of one
second time will turn the front fog lights off. large center light and four smaller reading lights.
TURN SIGNALS Each reading light can be turned on by pushing the
lens. Pushing the lens a second time will turn the
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
light off.
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side
of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
Front Fog Light Switch LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED

Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash three times then automatically turn Dome Lights
off.
When a door is open and the interior lights are on,
rotating the dimmer control to the extreme bottom
position will cause all the interior lights to turn off.
This allows the doors to stay open for extended WINDSHIELD WIPER O PERATION
periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s
battery.
DIMMER C ONTROLS
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight
switch and are located on the left side of the
instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada)

1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
Windshield Wiper/Washer Operation
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
1 — Pull For Front Washer
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating 2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
the right dimmer control upward will increase the 3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
brightness of the instrument panel lights. Rotating 4 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
the left dimmer control will adjust the interior and 5 — Push Up For Mist
Dimmer Controls ambient light levels (e.g. courtesy lights in the
footwell, illuminated cupholders, and front door
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first
handles).
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever
upward to the second detent past the intermittent
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is settings for high-speed wiper operation.
located on the right side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located at the end of the lever.
CAUTION!
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the REAR WINDOW W IPER/WASHER — IF
wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles.
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch Then, the wipers will turn off. E QUIPPED
and allow the wipers to return to the park NOTE: A rotary switch on the center portion of the
position before turning off the engine. If the As a protective measure, the washer will stop if the windshield wiper/washer lever controls the
wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the operation of the rear wiper/washer function. 2
the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may switch is released the washer will resume normal Rotate the switch upward to the first
occur when the vehicle is restarted. operation. detent position for intermittent operation
and to the second detent for continuous
Intermittent Wipers WARNING! rear wiper operation.
Use the intermittent wiper when weather Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield Push the wiper lever toward the
conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a could lead to a collision. You might not see other instrument panel to activate the rear
variable pause between cycles, desirable. Rotate vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden washer. The washer pump and wiper will
the end of the lever to the first detent position for icing of the windshield during freezing weather, continue to operate as long as the lever is
one of four intermittent settings. The delay cycle warm the windshield with the defroster before held.
can be set anywhere between 1 to 18 seconds. and during windshield washer use.
NOTE:
NOTE: As a protective measure, the washer will stop if the
The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If Mist switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), Push upward on the wiper lever to activate a single switch is released the washer will resume normal
delay times will be doubled. wipe to clear off-road mist or spray from a passing operation.
Windshield Washers vehicle. As long as the lever is held up, the wipers If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and will continue to operate. placed in the OFF position, the wiper will
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled NOTE: automatically return to the “park” position. When
while in the delay range, the wiper will start and the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will resume
The mist feature does not activate the washer
continue to operate for two or three wipe cycles function at whichever position the switch is set at.
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
after the lever is released. Then, the intermittent the windshield. The wash function must be used in
interval previously selected will resume. order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 368.
CLIMATE CONTROLS A/C Button

Press and release this button on the
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
touchscreen, or push the button on the
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
faceplate to change the current setting.
circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is
located on the touchscreen (if equipped) and on
on.
the instrument panel below the radio.
The A/C button allows the operator to manually
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL activate or deactivate the A/C system. When the
DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS A/C system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will
flow through the outlets into the cabin.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic
Climate Controls Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
MAX A/C Button touchscreen, or push the button on the
Press and release the MAX A/C button on faceplate, to change the system between
the touchscreen to change the current recirculation mode and outside air mode.
setting to the coldest output of air. The The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator
MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX illuminate when the Recirculation button is
A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside
MAX A/C operation to exit. conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
NOTE: humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Automatic Climate all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touch-
Controls (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
screen.
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
performance. The button illuminates when MAX
deselected manually without disturbing the mode
A/C is on. In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode
control selection. Continuous use of the
position can be adjusted to desired user settings.
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C to
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
turn off.
this mode is not recommended. Recirculation side window demist outlets. When the defrost
mode may automatically adjust to optimize button is selected, the blower level may increase. CAUTION!
customer experience for warming, cooling, Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature  Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
dehumidification, etc. settings for best windshield and side window abrasive window cleaners on the interior
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front surface of the window.
lead to excessive window fogging. defrost mode button, the climate system returns to
 Keep all objects a safe distance from the
2
the previous setting.
AUTO Button window.
Rear Defrost Button
Set your desired temperature and press
and release the AUTO button on the Press and release the Rear Defrost Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And
touchscreen, or push the button on the button on the touchscreen, or push and
release the button on the faceplate, to
Down Buttons
faceplate. AUTO will achieve and
turn on the rear window defroster and the Provides the driver and passenger with
maintain your desired temperature by
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear independent temperature control.
automatically adjusting the blower speed and air
distribution. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be active Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window Push the red button on the faceplate or
during AUTO operation to improve performance. defroster is on. The rear window defroster touchscreen or press and slide the
AUTO mode is highly recommended for efficiency. automatically turns off after 10 minutes. temperature bar towards the red arrow
You can press and release this button on the button on the touchscreen for warmer
touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, CAUTION! temperature settings.
to turn AUTO on. The AUTO indicator illuminates Failure to follow these cautions can cause Push the blue button on the faceplate or
when AUTO is on. Toggling this function will cause damage to the heating elements: touchscreen or press and slide the
the system to switch between manual mode and temperature bar towards the blue arrow
 Use care when washing the inside of the rear
automatic mode Ú page 67. button on the touchscreen for cooler
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
Front Defrost Button temperature settings.
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
Press and release this button on the soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping NOTE:
touchscreen, or push and release the parallel to the heating elements. Labels can The numbers within the temperature display will
button on the faceplate, to change the be peeled off after soaking with warm water. only appear if your vehicle is equipped with an
current airflow setting to Defrost mode. (Continued) Automatic Climate Control system.
The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front
Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield and
SYNC Button  Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to NOTE:

reduce the blower setting and the large blower Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
Press the SYNC button on the
icon to increase the blower setting. The blower tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
can also be selected by pressing the blower bar and warmer air from the floor outlets.
on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates
area between the icons. Floor Mode
when SYNC is on. SYNC synchronizes the
passenger temperature setting with the driver Mode Control Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s Select one of the Mode buttons on the amount of air is directed through the
temperature setting while in SYNC will touchscreen or press the Mode button on defrost and side window demister
automatically exit this feature. the faceplate to adjust the airflow outlets.
NOTE: distribution. The airflow distribution can Mix Mode
The SYNC button is only available on the touch- be adjusted so air comes from the instrument
screen. panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets, and Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
demist outlets. and side window demister outlets. This
Blower Control setting works best in cold or snowy
Blower Control regulates the amount of Panel Mode conditions that require extra heat to the
air forced through the Climate Control Air comes from the outlets in the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
system. Adjusting the blower will cause instrument panel. Each of these outlets comfort while reducing moisture on the
automatic mode to switch to manual can be individually adjusted to direct the windshield.
operation. There are seven blower speeds flow of air. The air vanes of the center Climate Control OFF Button
available. The speeds can be selected using either outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
the blower control knob on the faceplate or the down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. Press and release the OFF button on the
buttons on the touchscreen. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air touchscreen, or push the OFF button on
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow the faceplate to turn the Climate Control
 Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you
from these outlets. ON/OFF.
turn the blower control knob clockwise from the
lowest blower setting. The blower speed Bi-Level Mode
decreases as you turn the blower control knob
Air comes from the instrument panel
counterclockwise.
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
MANUAL C LIMATE C ONTROL MAX A/C Setting — If Equipped Recirculation Button

DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS Set the temperature control knob to the Push the recirculation button on the
MAX A/C setting to change the current faceplate to change the system between
setting to the coldest output of air. recirculation mode and outside air mode.
Moving the temperature control knob The Recirculation indicator and the A/C
away from the MAX A/C setting causes the MAX indicator (if equipped) illuminate when the 2
A/C operation to exit. Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can
be used when outside conditions such as smoke,
A/C Button
odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Recirculation can be used in all modes except for
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if
illuminates when A/C is on. conditions exist that could create fogging on the
NOTE: inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
 For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in deselected manually without disturbing the mode
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Manual Climate Controls
Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be control selection. Continuous use of the
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
active to prevent fogging of the windows. and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
 If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower On systems with Manual Climate Controls (if
speed if needed. equipped), the Recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing
 If your air conditioning performance seems operation. Recirculation is disabled automatically
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in
an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a the control button to blink and then turns off.
gentle water spray from the front of the radiator
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Manual Climate Controls and through the condenser.
Front Defrost Setting Blower Control

CAUTION!
Turn the Mode Control knob to the Front Blower Control regulates the amount of
Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the  Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or air forced through the climate system.
windshield and side window demist abrasive window cleaners on the interior There are seven blower speeds available.
outlets. When the Defrost button is surface of the window. The blower speeds increase as you turn
selected, the blower level may increase. Use  Keep all objects a safe distance from the the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings window. blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you
for best windshield and side window defrosting turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
and defogging.
Temperature Control Mode Control
Rear Defrost Button Turn the mode control knob to adjust
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of
Push and release the Rear Defrost the air forced through the climate system. airflow distribution. The airflow
Control button to turn on the rear window distribution mode can be adjusted so air
The temperature increases as you turn
defroster and the heated outside mirrors comes from the instrument panel
the temperature control knob clockwise.
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. outlets.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off The temperature decreases as you turn
Panel Mode
after 10 minutes. the temperature control knob
counterclockwise. Air comes from the outlets in the
CAUTION! instrument panel. Each of these outlets
Heater Only
can be individually adjusted to direct the
Failure to follow these cautions can cause Turning the temperature control knob clockwise flow of air. The air vanes of the center
damage to the heating elements: increases the heating temperature and turning the outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
 Use care when washing the inside of the rear temperature control knob counterclockwise down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners decreases the heating temperature. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
on the interior surface of the window. Use a NOTE: vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping The numbers within the temperature display will from these outlets.
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can only appear if your vehicle is equipped with an
be peeled off after soaking with warm water. Automatic Climate Control system.
(Continued)
Bi-Level Mode AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower
Air comes from the instrument panel (ATC) — I F EQUIPPED fan will remain on low until the engine warms up.
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
Automatic Operation The blower will increase in speed and transition
of air is directed through the defrost and
into Auto mode.
side window demister outlets. 1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the
NOTE: AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Manual Operation Override 2
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi- Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel. This system offers a full complement of manual
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets 2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
and warmer air from the floor outlets. like the system to maintain by adjusting the ATC display will be turned off when the system is
Floor Mode driver and passenger temperature control being used in the manual mode.
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
displayed, the system will achieve and
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
amount of air is directed through the
automatically maintain that comfort level. Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
defrost and side window demister
3. When the system is set up for your comfort everyone comfortable while you keep moving
outlets.
level, it is not necessary to change the ahead.
Mix Mode settings. You will experience the greatest Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, efficiency by simply allowing the system to beep, say one of the following commands:
and side window demister outlets. This function automatically.  “Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the NOTE:  “Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining  It is not necessary to move the temperature Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may
comfort while reducing moisture on the settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system only be used to adjust the interior temperature of
windshield. automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
Climate Control OFF and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
as possible. equipped.
To turn the Climate Controls off, turn the
blower control knob to the OFF (O)  The temperature can be displayed in US or
position. Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer-programmable feature within
Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
OPERATING T IPS Window Fogging Operating Tips Chart

Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, The following chart is for Manual Override
suggested control settings for various weather rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the Operation:
conditions. windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Summer Operation Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, Set the mode control to
The engine cooling system must be protected with as fogging may occur. (Panel Mode),
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper Outside Air Intake (A/C) on, and blower
corrosion protection and to protect against engine Hot Weather And on high. Roll down the
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
Vehicle Interior Is Very windows for a minute
MS.90032) is recommended. the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
Hot to flush out the hot air.
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
Winter Operation Adjust the controls as
reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they
needed to achieve
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster could plug the water drains. In Winter months,
comfort.
performance, make sure the engine cooling make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and
system is functioning properly and the proper snow. Turn (A/C) on and
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is Warm Weather set the mode control to
Cabin Air Filter (Panel Mode).
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it The climate control system filters out dust and
Operate in (Bi-Level
may cause window fogging. pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to Cool Sunny
Mode).
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
Vacation/Storage when needed. Set the mode control to
For information on maintaining the Climate Control Cool & Humid (Floor Mode) and
Stop/Start System — If Equipped Conditions turn (A/C) on to
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see Ú page 407. While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system keep windows clear.
may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin
Set the mode control to
comfort. Customer settings will be maintained
(Floor Mode). If
upon return to an engine running condition.
windshield fogging
Cold Weather
starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix
Mode).
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT Console Storage Compartment Rear Storage Compartment — If Equipped
The center console has both an upper and lower The rear cargo area storage compartment is
STORAGE storage compartment. located underneath the load floor.
Glove Compartment To open the upper storage compartment, lift the To access the storage compartment, lift up on the
top latch. To access the lower storage cargo strap at the rear of the cargo area.
The glove compartment is located on the compartment, lift the bottom latch.
2
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Rear Storage Cover

Console Storage Latches
USB/AUX C ONTROL
1 — Upper Compartment Latch
2 — Lower Compartment Latch The Media Hub is located on the instrument panel,
Glove Compartment
below the climate controls. Behind the media hub
access door, the Media Hub contains one AUX port,
WARNING! a Type C USB port and one standard USB port. Both
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove USB ports allow you to play music from MP3
compartment in the open position. Driving with players, smartphones or USB devices through the
the glove compartment open may result in injury vehicle’s sound system.
in a collision.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may

activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information, refer
to Android Auto™ or Apple Carplay® Ú page 250
or in the Owner's Manual Supplement.
The Smart Charging USB ports provide power to
your device up to an hour after the vehicle is turned
off.
NOTE:
 Once a device is connected to the USB port, it
Media Hub USB On The Back Of The Center Console
will begin charging and is ready for use with the
system. Type C and Type A charge-only USB 1 — AUX Port 1 — Type C And Standard Charge Only USB Ports
ports can be used at the same time but cannot 2 — Type C USB Port 2 — Type C And Standard Charge Only USB Ports
be used simultaneously while playing media. 3 — Type A USB Port
When both Type C and Type A charge-only USB
ports are in use they will be charged at a When a new device or smartphone is plugged into
reduced rate. Located inside the center console, a second USB the USB ports, the following message may display
port allows you to play music from USB devices depending on the device being utilized:
 Both ports share a single data connection. The
through your vehicle’s sound system.  “A new device is now connected. Previous
user cannot switch between Type A or Type C.
Third and fourth USB ports (if equipped) are connection was lost”.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A
located behind the center console, above the  “(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
USB port and another device is plugged into the
power inverter. Both ports are charge only. connection was lost”.
Type C USB port, a message will appear and allow
you to select which device to use.  “Another device is in use through the same USB
port. Please disconnect the first device to use
the second device”.
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only
USB ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into
a Media USB port, a message will display on the
touchscreen that the device is not supported by
the system. 2
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the external device
while driving. Failure to follow this warning could
result in a collision. Front Power Outlet Power Outlets Fuse Locations
On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer, there 1 — F43 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet
POWER O UTLETS is a second power outlet located in the rear cargo (battery powered at all times)
area and is powered directly from the vehicle’s 2 — F45 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power battery.
outlets that can provide power for accessories (powered when the ignition switch is in the ON/
designed for use with the standard power outlet RUN or ACC position)
adapters.
The front power outlet is located in the center of WARNING!
the instrument panel below the climate controls,
and is powered from the ignition switch. Power is To avoid serious injury or death:
available when the ignition switch is in the ON/  Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
RUN or ACC position.
 Do not touch with wet hands.
 Close the lid when not in use.
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION! CAUTION!
 Do not exceed the maximum power of  After the use of high power draw accessories,
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the or long periods of the vehicle not being started
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded, (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
the fuse protecting the system will need to be must be driven a sufficient length of time to
replaced. allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle's
battery.
 Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in  Power outlets are designed for accessory
the power outlets as this will damage the plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper Power Inverter
power outlet can cause damage not covered use of the power outlet can cause damage. The power inverter is designed with built-in
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. overload protection. If the power rating of
 Many accessories that can be plugged in draw POWER I NVERTER — IF E QUIPPED 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
power from the vehicle's battery, even when automatically shuts down. Once the electrical
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu- There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet device has been removed from the outlet, the
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's located on the back of the center console to inverter should automatically reset. If the power
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade convert DC current to AC current. rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the
battery life and/or prevent the engine from This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics power inverter may have to be reset manually.
starting. and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain video game consoles exceed WARNING!
 Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
this power limit, as will most power tools. To avoid serious injury or death:
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
degrade the battery even more quickly. Only  Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
use these intermittently and with greater
caution.  Do not touch with wet hands.
(Continued)  Close the lid when not in use.

 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — I F EQUIPPED NOTE:

Holding last state conditions are met when switch
Four auxiliary switches located in the lower switch type is set to latching and power source is set to
bank of the instrument panel can be used to power ignition.
various electrical devices. You have the ability to
The auxiliary switches manage the relays that
configure the functionality of the auxiliary switches
power four blunt cut wires. These wires are located 2
via the Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
under the instrument panel in the passenger
All switches can be configured as follows: compartment and under the hood to the right, near
 Switch type operation: Latching or Momentary the battery.
 Power source: Battery or Ignition
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Instrument Panel
 Ability to hold last state across key cycles: On or
Off In addition to the four auxiliary switch wires, a
fused battery wire and ignition wire are also
located in the interior, in the passenger side under
the instrument panel.
A kit of splices and heat shrink tubing are provided
with the auxiliary switches to aid in the connection/
installation of your electrical devices.
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Hood
Auxiliary Switches
Wire Color Chart
Circuit Function Fuse Wire Color Locations

Interior (passenger side under
Aux Switch 1 F93 – 40 Amp Beige/Pink instrument panel) & Underhood
(right side near battery)
Aux Switch 2 F92 – 40 Amp Green/Pink instrument panel) & Underhood
Aux Switch 3 F103 – 15 Amp Orange/Pink instrument panel) & Underhood
Aux Switch 4 F108 – 15 Amp Dark Blue/Pink instrument panel) & Underhood
Battery F72 – 10 Amp Red/White
instrument panel)
Ignition F50 – 10 Amp Pink/Orange
instrument panel)
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED Four-Door Models

The lower left switch controls the left rear
The power window switches are located on the passenger window, and the lower right switch
instrument panel below the climate controls. Push controls the right rear passenger window.
the switch downward to open the window and
upward to close the window. NOTE:
There are window switches located on the rear of
2
The top left switch controls the left front window
the center console for the rear passenger windows
and the top right switch controls the right front
in the four-door model.
window.
AUTO-DOWN FEATURE
WARNING! Power Window Switches
The driver door power and the passenger door
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, To open the window part way (manually), push the power window switches have an Auto-Down
and do not let children play with power windows. window switch down briefly and release. feature. Push the window switch down to the
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or second detent and release, and the window will go
in a location accessible to children. Occupants, NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for down automatically.
particularly unattended children, can become
up to 10 minutes after ignition is placed in the OFF To stop the window from going all the way down
entrapped by the windows while operating the
position. Opening either front door will cancel this during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
power window switches. Such entrapment may
feature. switch briefly.
result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all
objects from the window before closing.
WINDOW L OCKOUT SWITCH WRANGLER TOPS If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top (four
door models only), the soft top system will be
PROVIDED TOOLS provided in a separate box located in the rear of
the vehicle for shipping purposes only.
For your convenience, a tool kit is provided with
your vehicle located in the center console. This kit LOWERING T HE S OFT TOP INTO
includes the necessary tools required for the SUNRIDER® POSITION
operations described in the following sections. All
pieces fit into the ratchet for easy use. Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
NOTE:
The soft top and the hard top are to be used inde-
pendently. Your vehicle warranty will not cover
Window Lockout Switch damage resulting from both tops being installed at
the same time.
The window lockout switch allows you to disable
the window controls on the rear passenger doors. WARNING!
To disable the window controls, rotate the switch  The fabric quarter windows and fabric top are
downward. To enable the window controls, rotate designed only for protection against the
the switch upward. elements. Do not rely on them to contain occu-
WIND B UFFETING pants within the vehicle or to protect against
injury during an accident. Remember, always
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception wear seat belts.
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
 Make sure hands and fingers are clear of all
in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down in certain open or partially pinch points when installing and removing the
open positions. This is a normal occurrence and soft tops. The lift assist mechanism and side
Provided Tools
can be minimized by adjusting the window bows may cause serious injury if fingers or
opening. 1 — Ratchet hands get caught in between.
2 — #T50 Torx Head Driver
3 — #T40 Torx Head Driver
4 — 15 mm Socket
CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION!

The soft top is not designed to carry any  Do not run a fabric top through an automatic Failure to follow these cautions may cause
additional loads such as roof racks, spare tires, car wash. Window scratches and wax buildup interior water damage, stains or mildew on the
building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or may result. top material:
luggage, etc. Also, it was not designed as a
 Do not lower the top when the temperature is  It is recommended that the top be free of
2
structural member of the vehicle and, thus,
below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may water prior to opening it. Operating the top,
cannot properly carry any additional loads other
result. opening a door or lowering a window while the
than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
top is wet may allow water to drip into the
 Do not move your vehicle until the top has
vehicle's interior.
been either fully attached to the windshield
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or
frame, or fully lowered.  Careless handling and storage of the soft top
the top has been folded down for a period of time,
the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise may damage the seals, causing water to leak
 Do not fully lower the top with the windows
it, making it difficult to put up. This is caused by a into the vehicle's interior.
installed. Window and top damage may occur.
natural contraction of the vinyl or acrylic materials  The soft top must be positioned properly to
 For important information on cleaning and
of the fabric top. ensure sealing. Improper installation can
caring for your vehicle's fabric top
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
Ú page 409.
the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its
original size and the top can then be installed. If  Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry
the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or below, do not or force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers
attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side securing the soft top. Do not force or pry the
curtains. soft top framework when opening or closing.
Damage to the top may result.
(Continued)
Four Door Side View Components

1 — #1 Bow 6 — #6 Bow
2 — #2 Bow 7 — Front Window Retainer
3 — #3 Bow 8 — Lower Window Retainer
4 — #4 Bow 9 — Rear Quarter Window
5 — #5 Bow
Two Door Side View Components

1 — #1 Bow 6 — #6 Bow
2 — #2 Bow 7 — Front Window Retainer
3 — #3 Bow 8 — Lower Window Retainer
4 — #4 Bow 9 — Rear Quarter Window
5 — #5 Bow
Two And Four Door Rear Components

1 — Rear Window Retainer Attachment Points
2 — Quarter Window Pillars
3 — Swing Gate Bar Retainers
NOTE:
 All lowering and raising the soft top instructions
are applicable to both two and four door model
vehicles.
 Images shown are of four door models, and
appearance of two door model components 2
may differ.
The following options are available to you when
lowering your vehicle’s soft top:
 Sunrider® position with rear and quarter Step Two Step Four
windows installed
3. From both the left and right sides, lift up on the NOTE:
 Sunrider® position with rear and quarter panels
#1 Bow of the soft top to start the operation. If leaving the soft top in the Sunrider® position,
removed
secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop
 Sunrider® position with rear window installed fasteners provided in the center console.
and quarter panels removed
 Fully lowered position with rear and quarter
windows removed
Both quarter windows should be removed and
installed together.
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider® Position
1. Fold both sun visors forward against the
windshield.
2. Release the header latches from the crossbar Step Three
by pulling the handle downward. Make sure 4. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the
the hook is disengaged from its receiver. Step Four
side link to fold the soft top rearward into the
Sunrider® position.
NOTE: 3. While holding the window in place, slide the

 The vehicle can be driven in the Sunrider® posi- swing gate bar to the left separating it from the
tion with the rear window and quarter panel rear window. Store in soft window bag (if
assemblies fully installed or completely equipped), or a safe location.
removed.
 The rear window and rear quarter windows must
be removed before fully lowering the soft top to
prevent damage to the top. Clean the side and
rear windows before removal to assist in
preventing scratching during removal of the soft
top. If the plastic retainers are difficult to Step One
operate due to road dust, etc., clean them with 2. Grab the swing gate bar, rotate it outward and
a mild soap solution and a small brush. Cleaning upward releasing it from both the right and left
products are available through an authorized retainers.
dealer.
Step Three
Removing The Soft Top Windows
4. Remove the plastic retainers from both
NOTE: quarter window pillars.
Before fully lowering the soft top, the rear window
and rear quarter windows must be removed.
Remove The Rear Window:
1. With the swing gate open, remove the rear
window’s plastic retainers from the lower
right and left corners.
Step Two (Left Side Shown)
Step Four
5. While keeping the rear window level, slide to 3. Starting at the rear of the vehicle, remove
the left until it is completely separate from its plastic retainer from along the bottom of the
retainer. Do not pull downward while removing window moving toward the front of the vehicle.
the rear window. Damage to the retainer could
result.
2
Step One
2. Undo the hook-and-loop fastener located at
the upper front corner of each quarter window.
Step Three
4. Remove plastic retainer from the bottom to the
Step Five
top of the front window.
Remove The Right And Left Quarter Windows:
1. Through the rear opening, push the bottom
corner outward and release tab from the
bottom of the window pillar.
Step Two
Step Four
5. While keeping the window level, slide rearward Soft Top Window Storage Bag —
until it is completely separate from its retainer. If Equipped
Do not pull downward while removing the
window. Damage to the retainer could result. To safely store the soft top rear window, and rear
quarter windows, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
The swing gate bar, once removed from the rear
window, does not store in the soft window storage
bag (if equipped).
1. With the bag opened completely, fold both
fabric dividers downward and lay the first Step One
quarter window all the way to the right side
with the inside of the window facing 1 — Quarter Window Facing Downward
downward and the window pillar to the 2 — Both Dividers Folded Down
outside.
Step Five NOTE: 2. Fold the first divider upward, covering the first
6. Store in soft window bag (if equipped) or a safe The quarter windows are marked “1” and “2” on quarter window.
location. the inside of the window pillar.
NOTE:
For information on the use of the storage bag, refer
to the next section.
Step Two
Step One
3. Lay the second quarter window on top of the 6. Close the storage bag and store in a safe
first divider all the way to the left side with the location.
inside of the window facing downward and the
window pillar to the outside.
Step Four
5. Lay the rear window on top of the second
divider. Step Six
Step Three Lowering The Soft Top All The Way

1 — Quarter Window Facing Downward 1. Remove the rear window and quarter panel
2 — Second Divider Folded Down windows Ú page 82.
2. From the Sunrider® position Ú page 76,
remove straps if previously secured and move
4. Fold the second divider upward, covering the
to the rear of the vehicle.
second quarter window.
Step Five
3. Locate the Sunrider® latch beneath the #6

Bow of the soft top on the left side. CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
5. While pushing downward slightly on the folded

soft top, slide the lock lever on the left and
right side lift assist mechanisms to the “lock”
position.
Step Six
NOTE:
Step Three Secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop
fasteners provided in the center console.
4. Pull the latch to release the top, and allow the
soft top to slide rearward freely in the guide
tracks to the stowed position.
Step Five (Locked Position)

6. Once the lock lever is in the “lock” position,
push downward on each side of the folded soft
top to ensure it is secure. An audible “click”
may be heard.
Step Six
Step Four
RAISING THE S OFT TOP 3. Push up and forward from the #5 Bow along
the guide track until it locks into the Sunrider®
Use this QR code to access your position with an audible “click”.
digital experience.
Raising The Soft Top From The
Fully Lowered Position 2
1. From the fully lowered
position, remove straps if
previously secured.
CAUTION! Step Five

damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
Step Three
2. While pushing down on the rear of the top,
1 — Unlocked Position
slide the lock lever on the left and right side lift
assist mechanisms to the “unlock” position. 2 — #5 Bow Location
4. Gently pull rearward on the #6 Bow to ensure

the top is locked in the Sunrider® position.
5. Using the side link, lift and push the soft top
toward the front of the vehicle manually Step Five
guiding the top into the closed position.
Step Two
6. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the Installing The Soft Top Windows
header latch downward to engage the hook
Install The Right And Left Quarter Windows
into its receiver. Repeat on the other side.
1. From the rear of the vehicle, guide the top of
the window into the retainer and slide forward
while keeping the window level. Repeat on
the other side.
Step Two
Step Six
7. Pull the handle back upward while squeezing
the hook, locking the latch into place.
Step One
2. Place the top of the quarter window pillar into
the top cover, and insert the bottom tab into
the clip.
Step Two
CAUTION!
Failure to follow all Quarter Window Install steps
could result in damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
Step Seven
3. Engage the retainers on the front of the

windows, ensuring they are fully engaged,
followed by the retainers along the bottom of
the windows.
Step Four Step Two
Install The Rear Window 3. Rotate the swing gate bar into the left and right
side retainers.
1. Guide the rear window into the retainer from
left to right while keeping the window level.
Step Three
1 — Retainer At Front Of Quarter Window
2 — Retainer At Bottom Of Quarter Window
NOTE:
It is critical that the retainers are fully engaged
before the vehicle resumes motion.
4. Secure the hook-and-loop fastener at the
upper front corner of each quarter window by
Step Three
pressing firmly.
Step One 4. Line up the rear window to the right side
quarter window first, and engage the plastic
2. Insert the swing gate bar into the retainers at retainers.
the bottom of the window from left to the right.
5. Repeat with the left side quarter window. REMOVING THE S OFT TOP 3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and
ratchet, unscrew the two Torx head screws on
Use this QR code to access your each lift assist mechanism, then lift the
digital experience. mechanism up and away from the vehicle.
1. Fully lower the soft top

Ú page 85.
CAUTION!
Step Five damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
6. Engage the rear window retainers in the lower

2. Make sure the lift assist mechanism on both
right and left corners. Step Three
the left and right sides are in the “lock”
position, and an audible “click” is heard when
1 — Lock Position
pushing down on the #1 bow from each of the
lift assist mechanisms before removing. 2 — Torx Head Screw
3 — Torx Head Screw
Step Six
NOTE:
For information on removing your soft top, refer to
the next section. Step Two
4. Pull the release lever on top of the rail vehicle’s sport bar, trim, and tire carrier. Store I NSTALLING T HE SOFT T OP
rearward to release the side link from the the soft top in a safe, clean, and dry location.
track. 1. If currently installed, remove the hard top
Ú page 97.
2. Install the door rails, starting with the front,
followed by the rear on each side. For 2
instructions and appropriate torque specifi-
cations for the door rail Torx screws
Ú page 107.
3. Install the rear retainers on each side of the
rear of the vehicle using the provided #50 Torx
head driver and ratchet. Refer to the following
table for recommended torque specifications.
Step Six
Step Four
7. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver and
ratchet, unscrew the Torx screw on both rear
corners of the vehicle, removing the retainers.
Step Three
Step Four CAUTION!

5. Repeat on the opposite side. Do not overtighten Torx screws. Damage to the
6. Utilizing two people, lift the soft top up and Step Seven retainers will occur.
away from the vehicle, careful to avoid the
Torque
Specification Maximum Minimum
For Torx Screw
119.5 in-lb 150.5 in-lb 106.2 in-lb
13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m
CAUTION!
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle. Step Four Step Five
5. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and 1 — Lock Position
4. Making sure the lift assist mechanism is in the ratchet, tighten the Torx screws by turning 2 — Torx Head Screw
“lock” position, lift the soft top into the rear of them clockwise. Secure them until they are 3 — Torx Head Screw
the vehicle with the side links pointing toward snug (refer to the following table for
the front. Lower the lift assist mechanisms recommended torque specifications), being
onto its retainers on both sides (on the inside careful not to cross-thread the screws or Torque
of the sport bar). overtighten. Repeat on the opposite side. Specification
Maximum Minimum
For Torx
Screws
119.5 in-lb 150.5 in-lb 106.2 in-lb
13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the
screws if they are overtightened.
Step Four
6. While pulling the release lever on the top of the HARD T OP FRONT PANEL( S) R EMOVAL CAUTION!
rail rearward, place the side link into the guide
track on the top of the rail then release the Use this QR code to access your Failure to follow these cautions may cause
lever. digital experience. interior water damage, stains or mildew:
 It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to panel removal. Removing the 2
top, opening a door or lowering a window while
the top is wet may allow water to drip into the
vehicle’s interior.
CAUTION!
 The hard top assembly must be positioned
 The hard top is not designed to carry any addi-
properly to ensure sealing. Improper installa-
tional loads, such as after-market roof racks,
tion can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s
spare tires, building materials, hunting or
interior.
camping supplies, etc. For optional Mopar®
accessory roof racks Ú page 114.  Careless handling and storage of the remov-
Step Six
able roof panels may damage the seals,
 Do not move your vehicle until the top has
7. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This causing water to leak into the vehicle’s inte-
been either fully attached to the front header,
cover should be discarded. It was intended as rior.
sport bar, and body side or fully removed.
a protective cover for shipping only.  The front panel(s) must be positioned properly
(Continued)
8. Raise the soft top Ú page 87. to ensure sealing. Improper installation can
NOTE: cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is
not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the
top.
Four Door Hard Top Components

1 — Right Side Panel
2 — Left Side Panel
3 — Hard Top
Two Door Hard Top Components

1 — Right Side Panel
2 — Left Side Panel
3 — Hard Top
NOTE: 3. Unlatch the left side header panel latch NOTE:

 All hard top removal and installation instruc- located at the top of the windshield. Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to
tions are applicable to both two and four door inserting the panel into the panels bag.
model vehicles. 1. Insert the left side hard top panel into the bag
 Images shown are of four door models, and with the latches facing upward.
appearance of two door model components 2. Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the
may differ. divider is lying flat).
 The left side panel must be removed before 3. Insert the right side Freedom Top panel into
removing the right side panel. the bag with the latches facing downward.
To remove the hard top front panel(s), proceed as NOTE:
follows: Ensure the front panel latch is closed prior to
1. Fold down the sun visor against the inserting the panel into the bag.
windshield. Step Three 4. Unfold the outer flap and zip the hard top bag
2. Turn the three L-shaped locks on the left side 1 — Header Panel Latched closed.
panel (one at the front, the rear, and outside), 2 — Unlatched Position
unlocking them from the roof.
4. Remove the left side panel.
5. Repeat the previous steps to remove the right
side panel.
Hard Top Panel(s) Storage Bag — If

Equipped
The Freedom Top panels storage bag allows you to
store your hard top panels. The storage bag
Step Four
contains two compartments.
Lay the bag for the Freedom Top panels down so
Step Two
the loops and hooks are facing upward. Unzip the
bag and fold back the outer flap.
5. Lift the Freedom Top bag into the vehicle with REMOVING THE H ARD TOP
the hooks and straps facing the back of the
rear seat. Attach the clip at the bottom of the 1. Remove both front panels Ú page 93.
bag to the child restraint anchorage, located at 2. Open both front doors.
the base of the rear seat.
3. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver and
6. Wrap the upper strap around the rear head ratchet, remove the two Torx head screws that 2
restraints and loop the strap through the secure the hard top at the B-pillar (near the top
buckle. Pull on the strap to tighten the of the front doors).
Freedom Top bag securely against the rear
seat.
Step Four
HARD TOP FRONT PANEL( S) 5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure
I NSTALLATION clearance of the rear window glass. Lift the
1. Open the header latch inside the vehicle, and rear window glass.
the three L-shaped locks on each panel.
2. Set the right side panel on the windshield
frame with the locating pin in the front receiver
mounting hole followed by the left side panel,
making sure there is no overhang. Also, make Step Three
sure that the panels are sitting flush with the
4. Remove the six Torx head screws that secure
body.
the hard top to the vehicle (along the interior
3. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for bodyside — three screws on each side) using
removal in reverse order. the #50 Torx head driver.
NOTE: Step Five
To prevent water leaks, the seals and hard top
panels should be clear of any dust and debris prior
to reinstallation.
6. Locate the wire harness and washer hose on

the left rear inside corner of the vehicle.
Step Eight Step Nine

10. Secure the wire harness to the body side by
Step Six plugging it into the receptacle and reengaging
the locking tab.
7. Release the locking tab by pushing it
downward.
Step Eight
9. To remove the washer hose, push the release
button on hose connector, and pull downward.
Step Ten
Step Seven
8. To remove the wiring harness, push the tab
inward while pulling downward to disconnect.
11. Secure the washer hose by snapping it into the 12. Lower the rear window, and close the swing NOTE:
top of the body side receptacle. gate.  Inspect the hard top seals for damage and
13. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Place replace if necessary.
the hard top on a soft surface to prevent  The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to
damage. the body should be torqued as follows using the
provided #50 Torx head driver and ratchet: 2
CAUTION!  Hard top to B-pillar: 119 in-lb +/- 23 in-lb
The removal of the rear Hard Top requires four (13.5 N·m +/- 2.7 N·m)
adults, one located on each corner. Failure to  Hard top to J-rail: 154 in-lb +/- 30 in-lb
follow this caution could damage the Hard Top. (17.5 N·m +/- 3.5 N·m)
SUNRIDER® FOR HARD T OP
Step Eleven I NSTALLING T HE HARD TOP
If the door frames are installed from soft top
WARNING!
usage, they must be removed prior to installation Do not open or close the Sunrider® top while
of the hard top. For removal procedures, see driving. Operating the top while driving could
Ú page 106. cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
To install the hard top, place the hard top on the Failure to follow this warning may result in
vehicle while making sure that the top is sitting serious injury or death.
flush with the body at the sides and check to
ensure that there is a uniform gap between the lift The Sunrider® soft top can be used in place of the
glass and hard top. Then follow the removal steps Hard Top Freedom Panels for quick and easy
in reverse order. opening of the area above the driver and front
Step Eleven passenger seats.
4. Insert the rear door rail attachment bolt

(provided bolt with spacer) from underneath.
Tighten with #40 Torx head driver until snug.
Sunrider® For Hard Top Lower Sunrider® Onto The Vehicle

To install the Sunrider® soft top, proceed as 3. Swing the front frame bracket around the side
follows: of the rail, and insert the door rail attachment
1. Remove both front Hard Top Freedom panels bolt (provided bolt without spacer) from Attach Rear Door Rail Bolt
Ú page 93. underneath. Tighten with a #40 Torx head
driver until snug. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 on the other side of the
2. With the help of a second person, set the vehicle.
Sunrider® top onto the top of the vehicle
NOTE:
making sure to align the holes at the front and
The recommended torque specification for the
rear of the side rails.
front and rear door rail attachment bolts is 8.8 ft-lb
(12 N·m).
Attach Front Door Rail Bolt

6. Attach the rear clamp at the rear center of the To Open The Sunrider® Top
Sunrider® top using the two provided rear To open the Sunrider® top, proceed as follows:
clamp attachment bolts. Tighten with #40 Torx
head driver until snug. 1. Fold both sun visors forward against the
windshield.
2. Release the header latches from the crossbar 2
by pulling the handle downward. Make sure
the hook is disengaged from its receiver.
Push Sunrider® Top Forward

8. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on the
header latch downward to engage the hook
into its receiver. Pull the handle back upward
Rear Clamp Location while squeezing the hook, locking the latch
into place. Repeat on the other side.
NOTE:
The recommended torque specification for the rear
clamp attachment bolts is 3.7 ft-lb (5 N·m). Release Both Header Latches
7. From inside the vehicle, lift and pull the
Sunrider® top forward using the integrated
handle on the front header of the top.
Manually guide the top into the closed
position.
Engage Both Header Latches

3. From the front of the Sunrider® top, lift and

push the top rearward to the Sunrider®
position.
Hook-And-Loop Fastener Placement Power Sliding Top Control Switch

1 — Open Switch
POWER S LIDING TOP — I F E QUIPPED
2 — Close Switch
Sunrider® Position
CAUTION!
4. Secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop NOTE:
Lowering of the windshield is NOT
fasteners provided with the Sunrider® kit, and  The power top is non-removable. If desired, the
recommended in vehicles equipped with a
wrap one around the side rails on each side of rear quarter windows can be removed and
Power Sliding Top. Damage will occur to the top
the Sunrider® top to hold it in place. stored in the provided storage bag Ú page 104.
as well as the header seal.
 The power top will not open in temperatures
below -4°F (-20°C). However, if it is opened at a
If your vehicle is equipped with a Power Sliding
higher temperature, it can be closed at
Top, the control switch can be found on the front
temperatures above -40°F (-40°C).
trim panel, to the right of the driver’s side sun visor.
 The power top will not operate at vehicle speeds
above 60 mph (96 km/h).
NOTE: Opening And Closing The Power Top automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
A slight pause in audio may be heard when this occurs. Next, push the close switch and
Express Open/Close
opening and closing the Power Sliding Top as a release to Express Close.
result of the Uconnect system switching between Push the open switch and release it within one-half
power top Closed and power top Open audio second and the power top will open automatically WARNING!
from any position. The power top will open fully and
modes.
stop automatically. There is no anti-pinch protection when the power 2
top is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be
WARNING! Push the close switch and release it within one-half sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all
 Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, second and the power top will close automatically objects from the top’s path before closing.
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never from any position. The power top will close fully and
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a stop automatically.
NOTE:
location accessible to children. Do not leave During Express Open or Express Close operation,
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or any other movement of the power top switch will  The Power Sliding Top may reverse motion if
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly stop the power top. closing during a severe headwind. If this occurs,
unattended children, can become entrapped push and hold the Power Sliding Top switch
Manual Open/Close
by the power top while operating the power again to close the top completely.
top switch. Such entrapment may result in To open the power top manually, push and hold the
 If three consecutive power top close attempts
serious injury or death. open switch to the full open position, then release.
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
To close the power top manually, push and hold will disable and the power top must be closed in
 In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
the close switch to the fully closed position, then Manual Mode.
thrown from a vehicle with an open power top.
release.
You could also be seriously injured or killed. Power Top Maintenance
Always fasten your seat belt properly and Any release of the switch during open or close
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
make sure all passengers are also properly operation will stop the power top movement. The
clean the quarter window glass panel. For
secured. top will remain in a partially opened position until
important information on cleaning and caring for
the switch is operated and held again.
 Do not allow small children to operate the your vehicle Ú page 408.
power top. Never allow your fingers, other Pinch Protect Feature
body parts, or any object, to project through This feature will detect an obstruction in the
the power top opening. Injury may result. opening of the power top during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
power top is detected, the power top will
Ignition Off Operation 4. Continue holding down the close button while 4. Rotate the left hand side latch clockwise to
the top goes fully open and then back to fully release.
The power top switch can remain active in
close. 5. Rotate the right hand side latch counter-
Accessory Delay for up to approximately
10 minutes after the vehicle’s ignition is placed to 5. Once the power top has stopped in the fully clockwise to release.
the OFF position. Opening either front door will closed position, release the close button. The
cancel this feature. power top is now reset and ready to use.
NOTE: NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the If the close button is released anytime during the
Uconnect system Ú page 207. relearning process, the relearn may not be
Relearn Procedure complete, and the procedure must be repeated.
For vehicles equipped with a power top, there is a Rear Quarter Window Removal
relearn procedure that allows you to calibrate the
On vehicles equipped with a Power Sliding Top, the
power top when the “Express Mode” stops
rear quarter windows can be removed. To remove
working. To reset the power top, follow these steps:
these windows, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position, and Step Five
1. Open the swing gate, and lift the rear window.
start the vehicle. 1 — Rotate Left Handle Clockwise
2. Open both side doors nearest the quarter
NOTE: windows. 2 — Rotate Right Handle Counterclockwise
The engine must be running to perform the relearn
procedure. 3. Locate the rear quarter window latches (two on
each window) on the interior of the windows.
2. Ensure the power top is in the fully closed
position.
3. Push and hold the Close switch for
10 seconds. This will put the power top
into calibration mode.
6. From the outside of the vehicle, lift each 1. With the bag completely open and the fabric
window upward and away from the vehicle. divider raised, place the first quarter window
NOTE: with the latches facing outward into the foam
Do not pull down or apply any weight to the insert. Fold divider over the window once
windows after the latches are released. Damage placed inside.
could result to the pins holding the windows in 2
place.
Step Six
7. Store the rear quarter windows in the provided
storage bag and keep in a safe location, or
securely fasten the bag to the rear seat.
Quarter Window Storage Bag Step One

To use the storage bags for the rear quarter
windows, proceed as follows: 1 — Bag Open With Divider Raised
Step Six 2 — Lower Divider Over Window
(Latches Facing Outward)
2. Place the second window into the foam insert

with the latches facing outward. Fully close the
3. Store the bag in a safe location, or in the cargo
area of the vehicle by securing the bag in the
DOOR FRAME
bag. vehicle’s cargo area. This is done by attaching WARNING!
NOTE: the straps at the top of the bag to the rear
head restraints, as well as attaching the clip at  Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
Once both windows are placed inside the bag, the the door frame(s) removed as you will lose the
outside of the windows will be facing each other the bottom of the bag to the forward most
cargo hook on the load floor. protection that they can provide. This proce-
with all latches facing the outside of the bag. dure is furnished for use during off-road oper-
ation only.
 Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
the doors removed as you will lose the protec-
tion that they can provide. This procedure is
furnished for use during off-road operation
only.
CAUTION!
Step Three Failure to follow these cautions may cause

Step Two interior water damage, stains or mildew:
1 — Second Window Placed Over Divider  Opening a door or lowering a window while the
2 — Fully Closed Bag top is wet may allow water to drip into the
vehicle's interior.
 Careless handling and storage of the remov-
able door frame(s) may damage the seals,
causing water to leak into the vehicle's inte-
rior.
 The door frame(s) must be positioned properly
to ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
DOOR FRAME REMOVAL 4. Store screws in a secure location.

5. Repeat procedure on the front door frame
NOTE:
(four door models).
In four door models, the rear door frames must be
removed first, followed by the front door frames.
WARNING!
1. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver and 2
ratchet, loosen the Torx screws located on the  Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
underside of each door frame (two per door). the door frame(s) removed as you will lose the
protection that they can provide. This proce-
dure is furnished for use during off-road oper-
Remove Screws From Below Frame ation only.
3. Lift the frame upward, removing it from the  Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
vehicle. the doors removed as you will lose the protec-
tion that they can provide. This procedure is
furnished for use during off-road operation
only.
DOOR FRAME INSTALLATION FOUR

Door Frame Screw Locations
DOOR MODELS — IF EQUIPPED
2. Once all the way loosened, remove the screws
1. Install the front door rail first.
by pulling downward.
2. Carefully place the front door rail in the rubber
NOTE:
seal at the top of the windshield, and line up
Screws will not fall out once completely loose, as
the holes for the Torx head screws (two for
they are held in place by an internal mechanism. Step Three
each door).
3. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the 5. Carefully position the top of the door frame
rail, and insert the screws from underneath. CAUTION! onto the rear of the front door rail, making sure
Tighten with #40 Torx head driver until they Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the rubber seals lie flat. Ensure the seals are
are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the screws if they are overtightened. installed correctly to avoid water leaks.
screws or overtighten. Refer to the following
table for the appropriate torque specifications
4. Set the rear door frame pin into the hole on top
for the door rail screws.
of the body side, just behind the rear door
opening.
Position Of Frame Above Door

1 — Front Door Rail
Step Three 2 — Rear Door Frame
Target Torque Step Four

Specification
Maximum Minimum
For Torx
Fasteners
79.6 in-lb 87.6 in-lb 71.7 in-lb
(9 N·m) (9.9 N·m) (8.1 N·m)
6. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the

rail, and insert the screws from underneath.
screws or overtighten. Refer to the following
table for the appropriate torque specifications
FOLDING WINDSHIELD
Tighten with #40 Torx head driver until they for the door rail screws. CAUTION!
are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the
screws or overtighten. Refer to the previous Lowering of the windshield is NOT
recommended in vehicles equipped with a
table for the appropriate torque specifications 2
for the door rail screws. Power Sliding Top. Damage will occur to the top
as well as the header seal.
The fold-down windshield on your vehicle is a

structural element that can provide some
protection in some accidents. The windshield also
provides some protection against weather, road
debris and intrusion of small branches and other
Step Two objects.
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the
Target Torque
windshield down, as you lose the protection this
Specification
Maximum Minimum structural element can provide.
Step Six For Torx
Fasteners If required for certain off-road uses, the windshield
can be folded down. However, the protection
DOOR F RAME I NSTALLATION TWO D OOR 79.6 in-lb 87.6 in-lb 71.7 in-lb
afforded by the windshield is then lost. If you fold
MODELS — IF EQUIPPED (9 N·m) (9.9 N·m) (8.1 N·m)
down the windshield, drive slowly and cautiously. It
1. Carefully place the front door rail in the rubber is recommended that the speed of the vehicle be
seal at the top of the windshield, and line up limited to 10 mph (16 km/h), with low range
CAUTION! operation preferred if you are driving off-road with
the holes for the Torx head screws (two for
each door). Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the the windshield folded down.
screws if they are overtightened. Raise the windshield as soon as the task that
2. Swing the frame bracket around the side of the
rail, and insert the screws from underneath. required its removal is completed and before you
Tighten with #40 Torx head driver until they return to on-road driving. Both you and your
are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the
passengers should wear seat belts at all times, LOWERING THE W INDSHIELD 2. Manually remove the protective caps over the
on-road and off-road, regardless of whether the windshield wiper hex bolts.
windshield is raised or folded down. 1. Before completing the following steps:
 If your vehicle is equipped with a Soft Top,
WARNING! the top MUST be lowered, and the door rails
Carefully follow these warnings to help protect must be removed prior to lowering the wind-
against personal injury: shield.
 If your vehicle is equipped with a Hard Top,
 Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the
the Freedom Panels MUST be removed
windshield down.
prior to lowering the windshield.
 Do not drive your vehicle unless the wind-  Refer to the following instructions for more
shield is securely fastened, either up or down. information:
 Eye protection, such as goggles, should be • Soft Top Lowering Ú page 85 Step Two
worn at all times when the windshield is down.
• Door Frame Ú page 106 1 — Hex Bolt Cover Installed
 Be sure that you carefully follow the instruc- • Freedom Top Panels Ú page 93 2 — Hex Bolt Cover Removed
tions for raising the windshield. Make sure
that the folding windshield, windshield wipers, CAUTION!
side bars, and all associated hardware and 3. Using the provided 15 mm socket, remove the
fasteners are correctly and tightly assembled Failure to follow this step will cause damage to two hex bolts and remove the wiper arms.
before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow the vehicle’s header seal.
4. Move to the inside of the vehicle and lower
these instructions may prevent your vehicle both sun visors.
from providing you and your passengers’
protection in some accidents.
 If you remove the doors, store them outside
the vehicle. In the event of an accident, a
loose door may cause personal injury.
5. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)/Forward
remove the four Torx screws located along the Collision Warning (FCW) Sensor Protective
interior of the windshield.
Cover — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a protective
cover that is to be used whenever the windshield is 2
folded down in order to protect the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)/Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
sensor. To install the cover, follow these
instructions:
Step Six 1. Secure the top part of the cover so that it
hinges to the header.
1 — Washer Nozzle
2. Swing the cover down and push on it so that it
2 — Bumper covers the opening.
Step Five 3 — Tie-Down
3. Check to make sure the cover is secured
1 — Outside Torx Screws properly.
2 — Inside Torx Screws 7. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap
through the tie-down on either side of the hood NOTE:
and on the windshield frame. Tighten the strap Be sure to remove the cover before returning the
NOTE: to secure the windshield in place. windshield to the normal position. Store the cover
Store all of the mounting bolts in their original in the cargo area.
threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping.
CAUTION! Cleaning Instructions
6. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts
the tie-down bumpers (if equipped). During windshield down applications, dust/dirt can
Do Not Overtighten! Damage to the windshield
accumulate in the cover and block the camera
could result.
lens. Use a microfiber cloth to clean the camera
lens, module, and inside cover, being careful not to
damage or scratch the module.
RAISING THE W INDSHIELD while holding the arm in that position, reinstall
the hex nut and tighten until snug. Be careful
HOOD
1. Release the strap that secured the windshield not to overtighten. Repeat for the other arm.
in the lowered position.
OPENING T HE HOOD
5. Reinstall the protective caps over the wiper
2. Raise the windshield. arm hex bolts and push gently until they snap If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for
into place. additional information.
3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver,
reinstall the four Torx screws located along the Release both of the outside hood latches.
interior of the windshield. Secure them until Raise the hood slightly, and place a hand
they are snug, being careful not to palm-side down in the center of the hood opening.
cross-thread the screws or overtighten. Locate the safety latch in the middle, and push the
latch to the right to open.
Step Five
1 — Hex Bolt Cover Installed
2 — Hex Bolt Cover Removed
Interior Torx Screw Locations
6. After completing the steps above: Place Hand In Hood Opening
1 — Outside Torx Screws
2 — Inside Torx Screws  If your vehicle is equipped with a Soft Top,
reinstall the Door Rails and raise the top.
 If your vehicle is equipped with a Hard Top,
4. Reinstall the windshield wiper arms using the
reinstall the Freedom Panels.
provided 15 mm socket. First, align the tips of
the blade to the “T” mark in the glass. Then,
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning 2
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Hood Latch Locations To prevent possible damage, do not slam the Swing Gate Handle
Remove the support rod from the hood, and insert hood to close it. NOTE:
it into the radiator crossmember. Close the rear flip-up window before attempting to
NOTE: REAR SWING GATE close the swing gate (hard top models only).
You may have to push down slightly on the hood
The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using one WARNING!
before pushing the safety latch.
of the following methods: Driving with the flip-up window open can allow
CLOSING THE H OOD  Mechanical key (with mechanical lock — if poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for equipped) and your passengers could be injured by these
additional information.  Remote Keyless Entry key fob (if equipped) fumes. Keep the flip-up window closed when you
are operating the vehicle.
To close the hood, remove the support rod from the  Power door unlock switch on the front doors (if
slot and replace it on the hood panel retaining clip. equipped)
Lower the hood slowly. Secure both of the hood  Passive Entry swing gate handle (if equipped) CAUTION!
latches.
To open the swing gate, pull on the handle. Do not push on rear wiper blade when closing
the rear flip-up window, as damage to the blade
will result.
NOTE:
The swing gate hinges and check strap may require
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
cleaning if a squeak can be heard when opening NOTE:
the swing gate. Progressive accumulation of dirt or Roof rack applications are for Hard Top models
debris on the check strap arm may cause failure of ONLY.
the check strap, requiring replacement. For further The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
information on vehicle cleaning procedures, see luggage rack, must not exceed 100 lb (45 kg), this
Ú page 411. includes the weight of the crossbars, and it should
be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo
Trail Rail Cargo Organizer — If Equipped Adjustable Anchor Loop is placed on the roof rack. Check the straps
If your vehicle is equipped with the Trail Rail Lift the loop to use. frequently to be sure that the load remains
system, a rail will be found built into the floor on securely attached.
either side of the cargo area. Each rail contains an NOTE:
adjustable anchor loop that can be used to secure Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized
cargo. The position of the adjustable anchor loop dealer through Mopar® parts.
can be adjusted by sliding the loop along the rail.
External racks do not increase the total load
To adjust the anchor loop, push down on the center carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the
button while sliding the loop along the rail to the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle,
desired position. Release the button and move the plus the load on the luggage rack, do not exceed
loop slightly to the next fixed position in the the maximum vehicle load capacity.
notches of the rail.
WARNING!
Lift Adjustable Anchor Loop
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off
the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting
in personal injury or property damage. Follow
the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on
your roof rack.
CAUTION!
 To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and
secure the load appropriately.
 Long loads, which extend over the windshield, should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
2
 Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load.
 Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift. It is recommended to not carry large flat loads, such as wood panels or surfboards, which may result in damage to the
cargo or your vehicle.
 Load should always be secured to crossbars first, with tie down loops used as additional securing points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary
tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached.
116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
3
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

3
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ESCRIPTIONS CAUTION! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

1. Tachometer Driving with a hot engine cooling system could Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge cluster display, which offers useful information to
per minute (RPM x 1000). reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until opening/closing of a door will activate the display
CAUTION! the pointer drops back into the normal range. If for viewing, and display the total miles, or
the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer cluster display is designed to display important
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
pointer in the red area. Engine damage will information about your vehicle’s systems and
service.
occur. features. Using a driver interactive display located
on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster
3. Instrument Cluster Display display can show you how systems are working and
2. Temperature Gauge
 The instrument cluster display features a give you warnings when they aren’t. The steering
 The temperature gauge shows engine
driver interactive display Ú page 120. wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through
coolant temperature. Any reading within the
normal range indicates that the engine 4. Fuel Gauge and enter the main menus and submenus. You can
cooling system is operating satisfactorily. access the specific information you want and
 The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
make selections and adjustments.
 The pointer will likely indicate a higher fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
temperature when driving in hot weather, ON/RUN position.
up mountain grades, or when towing a  The fuel pump symbol points to the
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed side of the vehicle where the fuel
the upper limits of the normal operating filler door is located.
range.
5. Speedometer
WARNING!  Indicates vehicle speed.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or

others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ISPLAY  Down Arrow Button
L OCATION AND CONTROLS Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the Main Menu items.
The instrument cluster display is located in the  OK Button
center of the instrument cluster.
Push the OK button to access/select the infor-
mation screens or submenu screens of a Main
Menu item. Push and hold the OK arrow button
for two seconds to reset displayed/selected 3
features that can be reset.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons OIL C HANGE R ESET — IF E QUIPPED
1 — Left Arrow Button Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil
2 — Up Arrow Button change indicator system. The “Oil Change
3 — Right Arrow Button Required” message will display in the instrument
4 — Down Arrow Button cluster display for five seconds after a single chime
Instrument Cluster Display Location has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil
5 — OK Button
change interval. The engine oil change indicator
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen system is duty cycle based, which means the
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls  Left Arrow Button engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
Push and release the left arrow button to access dependent upon your personal driving style.
The system allows the driver to select information the information screens or submenu screens of Unless reset, this message will continue to display
by pushing the following buttons mounted on the a main menu item. each time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN
steering wheel:  Up Arrow Button position. To turn off the message temporarily, push
and release the OK button. To reset the oil change
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
indicator system (after performing the scheduled
upward through the Main Menu items.
maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
 Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
Oil Life Reset I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER D ISPLAY Vehicle Info

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the SELECTABLE ITEMS Push and release the up or down arrow
ignition in the ON/RUN mode (do not start the button until the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed
engine). The instrument cluster display can be used to view
in the instrument cluster display. Push and release
the following main menu items:
2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle Info" the left or right arrow button to scroll
in the instrument cluster display. NOTE: through the information submenus and push and
3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge Depending on the vehicles options, feature release the OK button to select or reset the
resets to 100%. settings may vary. resettable submenus.
Driver Assist —
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Speedometer Stop/Start Single Gauge Critical Level
If Equipped
Procedure Tire Pressure Submenu — If Logic — If
Vehicle Info Fuel Economy Audio Equipped Equipped
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start Off Road Trip Info Messages Diesel Exhaust
Coolant
the engine). Phone Call Oil Life Fluid Level — If
Screen Setup Settings Temperature
Status Equipped
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within ten seconds. Transmission
Temperature —
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the Speedometer Oil
Oil Pressure Automatic
ignition in the OFF position. Push and release the up or down arrow Temperature
Transmission
button until the speedometer menu icon is Only
NOTE: displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push
If the indicator message illuminates when you start and release the OK button to toggle between MPH Battery
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not and km/h. Voltage
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Off Road message indicating the necessary speed for the ACC SET
feature to become available will also display. When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Off Road menu icon is displayed in Driver Assist — If Equipped instrument cluster.
the instrument cluster display. Push and release The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the left or right arrow button to scroll ACC systems. the following ACC activity occurs:
through the information submenus.
Push and release the up or down arrow  System Cancel
 Drivetrain button until the Driver Assist menu is displayed in  Driver Override
 Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical the instrument cluster display. 3
 System Off
and numerical value of calculated average Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature —
front wheel angle from the steering wheel If Equipped  ACC Proximity Warning
orientation.  ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display displays the current
 Transfer Case Lock Status: displays “Lock” ACC system settings. The information displayed NOTE:
graphic only during 4WD High, 4WD High depends on ACC system status. The instrument cluster display will return to the last
Part Time, 4WD Low status. display selected after five seconds of no ACC
Push the ACC ON/OFF button (located on the
 Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If steering wheel) until one of the following displays display activity Ú page 171.
Equipped): displays front and rear or rear in the instrument cluster display: Fuel Economy
only axle locker graphic, and sway bar
Adaptive Cruise Control Off Push and release the up or down arrow
connection graphic with text message
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read button until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted in
(connected or disconnected).
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” the instrument cluster display. Push and hold the
 Pitch And Roll OK button to reset average fuel economy feature.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
 Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle in Toggle left or right to select a display with or
the graphic with the angle number on the When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed without Current Fuel Economy Information.
screen. setting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”  Range – The display shows the estimated
NOTE: distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with the
When vehicle speed becomes too high to display Push the SET + or the SET - button (located on the fuel remaining in the tank. When the Range
the pitch and roll, “- -” will display in place of the steering wheel), and the following will display in the value is less than 10 miles (16 kilometers), the
numbers, and the graphic will be greyed out. A instrument cluster display. Range display will change to a “LOW” message.
Adding a significant amount of fuel to the
vehicle will turn off the “LOW” message and a Stop/Start — If Equipped The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
new Range value will display. Range cannot be what information is displayed in the instrument
reset through the OK button. cluster as well as the location that information is
button until the Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted
NOTE: displayed.
in the instrument cluster display. The screen will
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle display the Stop/Start status. Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable
Audio Upper Left and Right
distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range
displayed value. Push and release the up or down arrow Current Econ Average Econ
button until the Audio Menu icon/title is None (or L/100km, (or L/100km,
 Average – The display shows the average fuel
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. This km/L) km/L)
economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since the
menu will display the audio source information,
last reset. Outside Temp Compass Trip A Distance
including the Song name, Artist name, and audio
 Current – This display shows the current fuel source with an accompanying graphic. Range To
economy (MPG, L/100 km, km/L) while driving. Time Trip B Distance
Messages Empty
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Messages Menu item is
button until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in the
Center
highlighted. This feature shows the number of
instrument cluster display, then push and release stored warning messages. Pushing the right None Compass Time
the left or right arrow button to select Trip A arrow button will allow you to see what the stored Average Econ
or Trip B. messages are. Outside Temp (or L/100km, Trip A Distance
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the When no messages are present, a “No Stored km/L)
following: Messages” will display. Range to
Audio Speedometer
 Distance Screen Setup Empty
 Average Fuel Economy Current Econ
 Elapsed Time button until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is (or L/100km, Trip B Distance Menu Title
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push km/L)
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
and release the OK button to enter the submenus
and follow the prompts on the screen as needed.
Favorite Menus Phone Call Status BATTERY SAVER O N/BATTERY S AVER

Speedometer Stop/Start Vehicle Info
A pop-up message for an incoming call will appear MODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL L OAD
on any screen within your instrument cluster. The
Off Road – If Driver Assist – pop-up message will appear on your screen until it
REDUCTION ACTIONS — I F EQUIPPED
Equipped Messages If Equipped is cleared out of the call is ignored, answered, or This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
(show/hide) (show/hide) the calling ends. Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of
Fuel Economy Trip Info NOTE: the electrical system and status of the vehicle
Settings
(show/hide) (Show/Hide) The Uconnect Settings can be programmed to turn battery. 3
Audio (show/ the pop-up off. This will not affect the audio menu In cases when the IBS detects charging system
Screen Setup or any phone status information Ú page 207. failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
hide)
Any incoming calls, active calls, and outgoing calls deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will
will take the place of your audio information. take place to extend the driving time and distance
Gear Display — If Equipped of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or
A caller’s name will only be displayed if:
 Full turning off non-essential electrical loads.
 A number is associated with the call. The phone
 Single Load reduction is only active when the engine is
number will be displayed in place of the caller’s
Current Gear — If Equipped running. It will display a message if there is a risk
name.
of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle
 On  The test/font of the name is not supported by may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not
 Off the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster restart after the current drive cycle.
Odometer — If Equipped will not display anything in place of the name.
When load reduction is activated, the message
 The caller’s name exceeds the maximum “Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
 Show
number of characters. The last two to three appear in the instrument cluster display.
 Hide digits that will fit will be replaced with “...”.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings) NOTE: low state of charge and continues to lose electrical
 Cancel Any audio information will return to the instrument charge at a rate that the charging system cannot
 Restore cluster once the call has ended. sustain.
The menu with (show/hide) means user can press
OK button to choose show or hide this menu on the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:  Installing options like additional lights, upfitter After a trip:

 The charging system is independent from load electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms  Check if any aftermarket equipment was
reduction. The charging system performs a diag- and similar devices. installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
nostic on the charging system continuously.  Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review
 If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may long parking periods). specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw
indicate a problem with the charging system  The vehicle was parked for an extended period currents).
Ú page 129. of time (weeks, months).  Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if  The battery was recently replaced and was not driving time and parking time).
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be charged completely.  The vehicle should have service performed if
effected by load reduction:  The battery was discharged by an electrical load the message is still present during consecutive
 Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel left on when the vehicle was parked. trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and
driving pattern did not help to identify the cause.
 Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors  The battery was used for an extended period
 HVAC System with the engine not running to supply radio, DIESEL D ISPLAYS
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances
 150W Power Inverter System When the appropriate conditions exist, the
like vacuum cleaner’s, game consoles and
 Audio and Telematics System similar devices. following messages display in the instrument
cluster display:
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or What to do when an electrical load reduction
more of the following conditions:  Exhaust Filter Nearing Full Safely Drive at
action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
“Battery Saver Mode”) Consistent Speeds to Clear
 The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because  Exhaust Filter Full – Power Reduced See Dealer
During a trip:
the electrical loads are larger than the capability  Exhaust System Service Required – See Dealer
 Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
of the charging system. The charging system is  Exhaust System – Filter XX% Full Service
still functioning properly.  Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
Required See Dealer
rior)
 Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads  Exhaust System Regeneration in Process
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior  Check what may be plugged in to power
Continue Driving
lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volt, outlets +12 Volt, 150W, USB ports
150W, USB ports) during certain driving condi-  Exhaust System – Regeneration Completed
 Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
tions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping).  Check the audio settings (volume)
DIESEL P ARTICULATE F ILTER (DPF) CAUTION!

remedy the condition in the particulate filter
system and allow your diesel engine and
MESSAGES The engine may be switched off even if the warn- exhaust after-treatment system to cleanse the
This engine meets all required diesel engine ing light is on: repeated interruptions of the filter to remove the trapped PM and restore the
emissions standards. To achieve these emissions regeneration process could cause an early dete- system to normal operating condition.
standards, your vehicle is equipped with a rioration of engine oil. For this reason it is always  Exhaust System Regeneration in Process
state-of-the-art engine and exhaust system. These advisable to wait for the symbol to go off before Continue Driving — This message indicates that
systems are seamlessly integrated into your turning off the engine, following the instructions the DPF is self-cleaning. Maintain your current
vehicle and managed by the Powertrain Control above. Do not complete the DPF regeneration driving condition until regeneration is
3
Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine process when the vehicle is stopped. completed.
combustion to allow the exhaust system’s catalyst
 Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed —
to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM) Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to This message indicates that the DPF
pollutants, with no input or interaction on your part. additional maintenance required on your vehicle or self-cleaning is completed. If this message is
engine. Refer to the following messages that may displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in
WARNING! be displayed on your instrument cluster display: alerting you of this condition.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park  Exhaust Filter Nearing Full Safely Drive at  Exhaust System Service Required —
over materials that can burn. Such materials Consistent Speeds to Clear — This message will See Dealer — This messages indicates regener-
might be grass or leaves coming into contact be displayed if the exhaust particulate filter ation has been disabled due to a system
with your exhaust system. Do not park or oper- reaches 80% of its maximum storage capacity. malfunction. At this point the engine Powertrain
ate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust sys- Under conditions of exclusive short duration Control Module (PCM) will register a fault code,
tem can contact anything that can burn. and low speed driving cycles, your diesel engine the instrument panel will display a Malfunction
and exhaust after-treatment system may never Indicator Light (MIL).
reach the conditions required to cleanse the
filter to remove the trapped PM. If this occurs, CAUTION!
the “Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
Highway Speeds to Remedy” message will be
exhaust system could occur soon with continued
displayed. If this message is displayed, you will
operation.
hear one chime to assist in alerting you of this
condition. By simply driving your vehicle at
highway speeds for up to 20 minutes, you can
 Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced conditions. Use the descriptions to interpret what stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system
See Dealer — This message indicates the PCM the message means and determine the best action inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
has derated the engine to limit the likelihood of to take. possible.
permanent damage to the after-treatment
Brake Warning Light
system. If this condition is not corrected and a WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES This warning light monitors various brake
dealer service is not performed, extensive
exhaust after-treatment damage can occur. To The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the functions, including brake fluid level and
correct this condition it will be necessary to have instrument panel together with a dedicated parking brake application. If the brake
your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer. message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. light turns on it may indicate that the
These indications are indicative and precautionary parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
NOTE: and as such must not be considered as exhaustive is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock
Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing and/or alternative to the information contained in Brake System reservoir.
your oil and resetting the oil change indicator by the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
0 miles (0 kilometers) remaining will prevent the If the light remains on when the parking brake has
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
diesel exhaust filter from performing its cleaning information in this chapter in the event of a failure
routine. This will shortly result in a Malfunction mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates
indication. All active telltales will display first if a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or
Indicator Light (MIL) and reduced engine power. applicable. The system check menu may appear
Only an authorized dealer will be able to correct that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
different based upon equipment options and detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
this condition. current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
and may not appear. case, the light will remain on until the condition has
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the RED WARNING LIGHTS been corrected. If the problem is related to the
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
exhaust system could occur soon with continued Air Bag Warning Light applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
operation. may be felt during each stop.
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and will The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
FUEL S YSTEM MESSAGES turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
check when the ignition is placed in the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
The following chart contains a list of different ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
messages that may appear in the instrument illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
cluster, depending on different system or fuel air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the in the master cylinder has dropped below a
fault is cleared. If the light is not on during startup, specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
NOTE: not illuminate, have the light inspected by an Warning Light
The light may flash momentarily during sharp authorized dealer.
This warning light will turn on when
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level The light also will turn on when the parking brake there's a fault with the EPS system
conditions. The vehicle should have service is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN Ú page 164.
performed, and the brake fluid level checked. position.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is NOTE: WARNING!
necessary. This light shows only that the parking brake is
Continued operation with reduced assist could
3
applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
WARNING! cation. pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is Battery Charge Warning Light
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have This warning light will illuminate when the
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked on while the engine is running, there may Light
immediately. be a malfunction with the charging This warning light will illuminate to
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as indicate a problem with the ETC system.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System possible. If a problem is detected while the vehicle
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake This indicates a possible problem with the is running, the light will either stay on or
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD electrical system or a related component. flash depending on the nature of the problem.
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS is Door Open Warning Light completely stopped and the transmission is placed
required. This indicator will illuminate when a door in the PARK (P) position. The light should turn off.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be is ajar/open and not fully closed. If the light remains on with the vehicle running,
checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see
position to the ON/RUN position. The light should an authorized dealer for service as soon as
NOTE: possible.
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
should then turn off unless the parking brake is chime. NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is Hood Open Warning Light Oil Temperature Warning Light
running, immediate service is required and you
This indicator will illuminate when the This warning light will illuminate to
may experience reduced performance, an
hood is ajar/open and not fully closed. indicate the engine oil temperature is
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
high. If the light turns on while driving,
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ NOTE:
as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
return to normal levels.
check. If the light does not come on during starting, chime.
have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Oil Pressure Warning Light Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning This warning light indicates when the
This warning light will illuminate, and a
driver or passenger seat belt is
Light chime will sound, to indicate low engine
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
This warning light warns of an oil pressure. If the light and chime turn on
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
overheated engine condition. If the while driving, safely stop the vehicle and
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
engine coolant temperature is too high, turn off the engine as soon as possible. After the
a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
this indicator will illuminate and a single vehicle is safely stopped, restart the engine and
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the monitor the Oil Pressure Warning Light. If the Oil
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four Pressure Warning Light is still illuminated, turn the
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
minutes or until the engine is able to cool, engine OFF and contact an authorized dealer for
will sound Ú page 295.
whichever comes first. further assistance. Do not operate the vehicle until
the cause is corrected. If the lamp is no longer Swing Gate Open Warning Light
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over illuminated, the engine can be operated but it is
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) This warning light will illuminate when the
recommended to take the vehicle to an authorized swing gate is open.
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission dealer as soon as possible.
into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
NOTE:
turn the engine off immediately and call for service corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
Ú page 341. is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
chime.
checked under the hood.
Transmission Temperature Warning If the ABS light remains on or turns on while

CAUTION! driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
Light — If Equipped
Continuous driving with the Transmission system is not functioning and service is required as
This warning light will illuminate to warn soon as possible. However, the conventional brake
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
of a high transmission fluid temperature. system will continue to operate normally,
eventually cause severe transmission damage
This may occur with strenuous usage assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
or transmission failure. If you continue to
such as trailer towing. If this light turns
operate the vehicle when the “CLUTCH HOT” If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or
message is displayed, or the Transmission is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or
Temperate Warning Light is illuminated, you have the brake system inspected by an authorized
3
NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light
could cause the clutch to overheat and cause dealer.
turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
severe clutch damage, transmission damage, or
failure. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
WARNING! Warning Light — If Equipped
If you continue operating the vehicle when the This warning light will indicate when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is Vehicle Security Warning Light —
Electronic Stability Control system is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, If Equipped Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust This light will flash at a fast rate for instrument cluster will come on when the
components and cause a fire. If you continue to approximately 15 seconds when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
operate the vehicle when the “CLUTCH HOT” Vehicle Security system is arming, and position, and when ESC is activated. It should go
message is displayed, or the Transmission then will flash slowly until the vehicle is out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator
Temperature Warning Light is illuminated, you disarmed. Light comes on continuously with the engine
could cause the clutch to overheat and cause a running, a malfunction has been detected in the
fire. YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS ESC system. If this warning light remains on after
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
Light
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
This warning light monitors the ABS. The as soon as possible to have the problem
light will turn on when the ignition is diagnosed and corrected.
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
 The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi- Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
cator Light come on momentarily each time the WARNING!
If Equipped
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as refer-
RUN position. This warning light will illuminate when the
enced above, can reach higher temperatures
windshield washer fluid is low
 The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking than in normal operating conditions. This can
Ú page 355.
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flam-
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive. Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator mable substances such as dry plants, wood,
Warning Light (MIL) cardboard, etc. This could result in death or seri-
 This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ous injury to the driver, occupants or others.
ESC event. The MIL is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II that
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
monitors engine and automatic
Warning Light — If Equipped transmission control systems. This
CAUTION!
This warning light indicates the ESC is off. warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/ the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system bulb does not come on when turning the ignition control system. It also could affect fuel economy
will be on, even if it was turned off previously. switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe cata-
checked promptly. lytic converter damage and power loss will soon
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — occur. Immediate service is required.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
If Equipped cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
This warning light will illuminate when the after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if AdBlue® (UREA) Injection System Failure
fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the the light stays on through several typical driving
filler cap to disengage the light. If the
Warning Light — If Equipped
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
light does not turn off, please see an normally and will not require towing. This warning light will illuminate along
authorized dealer. with a dedicated message on the display
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
(if equipped) if an unknown fluid not
Low Fuel Warning Light alert serious conditions that could lead to
conforming with acceptable
When the fuel level reaches immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
characteristics is inserted, or if an average
approximately 2.0 gal (7.5 L), this light converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced
consumption of AdBlue® (UREA) over 50% is
will turn on and a chime will sound. The by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this
detected. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
light will remain on until fuel is added. occurs.
possible.
If the problem is not solved, a specific message will Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
appear on the instrument cluster display whenever CAUTION!
This warning light will illuminate to
a certain threshold is reached until it will no longer Do not continue driving with one or more flat
indicate the Cruise Control system is not
be possible to start the engine. tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
functioning properly and service is
When about 125 miles (200 km) are remaining required. Contact an authorized dealer. vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
before the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is empty, a tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
continuous dedicated message will appear on the
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
instrument panel, accompanied by a chime. This light will illuminate when there is a authorized dealer as soon as possible.
fault in the sway bar disconnect system 3
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped Ú page 162. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
This warning light will illuminate to signal
a fault with the 4WD system. If the light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
Warning Light inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
stays on or comes on during driving, it
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
means that the 4WD system is not The warning light switches on and a inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of
functioning properly and that service is required. message is displayed to indicate that the a different size than the size indicated on the
We recommend you drive to the nearest service tire pressure is lower than the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
center and have the vehicle serviced immediately. recommended value and/or that slow should determine the proper tire inflation pressure
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal for those tires.
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
Light — If Equipped guaranteed. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
This warning light will illuminate to equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
Should one or more tires be in the condition pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
indicate a fault in the Forward Collision mentioned above, the display will show the
Warning System. Contact an authorized significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
indications corresponding to each tire. low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
dealer for service Ú page 288.
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
If Equipped significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to
This warning light will illuminate when the overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation
Stop/Start system is not functioning also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
properly and service is required. Contact may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
an authorized dealer for service. ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s CAUTION!
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, The TPMS has been optimized for the original is in the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode,
even if underinflation has not reached the level to equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and the front and rear driveshafts are
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure and warning have been established for the tire mechanically locked together forcing the
telltale. size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS system operation or sensor damage may result
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system when using replacement equipment that is not 4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure wheels can cause sensor damage. Using is in the 4WD Low mode. The front and
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to together forcing the front and rear
and then remain continuously illuminated. This become inoperable. After using an aftermarket wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle tire sealant it is recommended that you take provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your increased torque at the wheels Ú page 157.
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sensor function checked.
4WD Part Time Indicator Light —
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
If Equipped
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
occur for a variety of reasons, including the This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
installation of replacement or alternate tires or This light will illuminate when there is a is in the four-wheel drive part time mode,
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from fault in the sway bar disconnect system and the front and rear driveshafts are
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS Ú page 162. mechanically locked together forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates when the front and/or
the TPMS to continue to function properly. This indicator light will illuminate when rear axle locker fault has been detected.
the front sway bar is disconnected
Ú page 162.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped
Indicator Light — If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when The Water In Fuel Indicator Light will
This indicator light illuminates to indicate the front sway bar is disconnected illuminate when there is water detected
that Forward Collision Warning is off Ú page 162. in the fuel filter. If this light remains on,
Ú page 288. DO NOT start the vehicle before you drain
Wait To Start Light — If Equipped
the water from the fuel filter to prevent engine
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light This indicator light will illuminate for damage, and please see an authorized dealer.
This light indicates when the front, rear, approximately two seconds when the
ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position. 3
or both axles have been locked. The CAUTION!
telltale will display the lock icon on the Its duration may be longer based on
colder operating conditions. Vehicle will not initiate The presence of water in the fuel system circuit
front and rear axles to indicate the
start until telltale is no longer displayed may cause severe damage to the injection
current lock status.
Ú page 139. system and irregular engine operation. If the
Neutral Indicator Light — If Equipped indicator light is illuminated, contact an
NOTE: authorized dealer as soon as possible to bleed
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle The Wait To Start Light may not illuminate if the
is in the neutral mode. the system. If the above indications come on
intake manifold temperature is warm enough. immediately after refuelling, water, or AdBlue®
Low Diesel Emissions Additive AdBlue® UREA has probably been poured into the tank:
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light (UREA) Indicator Light — If Equipped switch the engine off immediately and contact
This light indicates when the rear axle an authorized dealer.
The Low Diesel Exhaust Emissions
lock has been activated Ú page 157. Additive AdBlue® (UREA) indicator light
illuminates when the AdBlue® (UREA) GREEN INDICATOR L IGHTS
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning level is low.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Light — If Equipped Fill the AdBlue® (UREA) tank as soon as possible
with at least 1.3 gallons (5 liters) of AdBlue® Target Detected Indicator Light —
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
(UREA). If Equipped
operating and needs service
Ú page 171. If filling the tank is done with a remaining range of This light will turn on when the Adaptive
AdBlue® (UREA) in the tank equal to zero, you may Cruise Control is set and there is no
need to wait two minutes before starting the vehicle in front detected Ú page 171.
vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — 2WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
Target Light — If Equipped If Equipped With a Premium Instrument Cluster
This will display when the ACC is set and This indicator light will illuminate when This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
a vehicle in front is detected the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” is in the two-wheel drive high mode.
Ú page 171. mode.
4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped Turn Signal Indicator Lights Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light —
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle When the left or right turn signal is If Equipped
is in the four-wheel drive auto mode. The activated, the turn signal indicator will This indicator shows when the HDC
system will provide power to all four flash independently and the feature is turned on. The lamp will be on
wheels and shift the power between the corresponding exterior turn signal lamps solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only
front and rear axles as needed. This will provide will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the be armed when the transfer case is in the
maximum traction in dry and slippery conditions. multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up 4WD Low position and the vehicle speed is less
(right).
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument NOTE: met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the
 A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
Cluster
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light —
This indicator light will illuminate when turn signal on.
the Cruise Control is set to the desired If Equipped
speed Ú page 169.  Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
This light will turn on when “Selec-Speed
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped Control” is activated.
This indicator light will illuminate when WHITE INDICATOR L IGHTS To activate “Selec-Speed Control”,
the front fog lights are on Ú page 57. ensure the vehicle is in 4WD Low and push the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — button on the Instrument Panel.
If Equipped
NOTE:
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light This light will turn on when the vehicle If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter
This indicator light will illuminate when equipped with ACC has been turned on, Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in the
the parking lights or headlights are but not set. instrument cluster display.
turned on.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — GRAY I NDICATOR L IGHTS CAUTION!

If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light —  Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
Cluster
If Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster further damage to the emission control
This light will turn on when the Cruise system. It could also affect fuel economy and
Control has been turned on, but not set. This light will turn on when the Cruise
Control has been turned on, but not set. driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be performed.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —  If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is 3
If Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II running, severe catalytic converter damage
This indicator light will illuminate when Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
the Cruise Control is set. Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This service is required.
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
BLUE INDICATOR L IGHTS systems. When these systems are operating
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC S YSTEM
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent (OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
High Beam Indicator Light performance and fuel economy, as well as engine Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
This indicator light will illuminate to emissions well within current government connection port to allow access to information
indicate that the high beam headlights regulations. related to the performance of your emissions
are on. With the low beams activated,
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II controls. Authorized service technicians may need
push the multifunction lever forward
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light to access this information to assist with the
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
information to assist your service technician in emissions system Ú page 207.
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized WARNING!
toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to
dealer for service as soon as possible.
pass" scenario.  ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
service your vehicle.
(Continued)
The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle  The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
WARNING! was recently serviced, recently had a depleted fully illuminated until you place the ignition
 If unauthorized equipment is connected to the battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II in the off position or start the engine. This
OBD II connection port, such as a system should be determined not ready for the I/M means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
driver-behavior tracking device, it may: test, your vehicle may fail the test. ready and you can proceed to the I/M
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, station.
 Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be which you can use prior to going to the test station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
occur that may result in an accident you must do the following:
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
involving serious injury or death. 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
but do not crank or start the engine. more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
 Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems, NOTE: in order for your OBD II system to update. A
including personal information. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to recheck with the above test routine may then
start this test over. indicate that the system is now ready.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND ON position, you will see the Malfunction is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
normal vehicle operation you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions MIL is on with the engine running.
things will happen:
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.  The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until
For states that require an Inspection and
you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine.
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
This means that your vehicle's OBD II
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is
system is not ready and you should not
functioning and is not on when the
proceed to the I/M station.
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
139
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE MANUAL T RANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED NORMAL STARTING
ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in
NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a 1. The transmission must be in PARK or
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start NEUTRAL.
your seat belts. unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
WARNING! Four-Wheel Drive Models Only the ENGINE START/STOP button once. 4
In 4L mode, if the vehicle is stalled, the engine will 3. The system takes over and attempts to start
start regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. is pressed to the floor. This feature enhances starter will disengage automatically after 10
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with off-road performance by allowing the vehicle to seconds.
access to an unlocked vehicle. start when in 4L without having to press the clutch
pedal. The 4L Indicator Light will illuminate when 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended prior to the engine starting, push the button
the transfer case has been shifted into this mode.
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child again.
or others could be seriously or fatally injured. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
Children should be warned not to touch the NOTE:
I F E QUIPPED Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
selector. Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the PARK obtained without pumping or pressing the accel-
position (vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL). erator pedal.
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
Apply the brake before shifting to any driving To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
or in a location accessible to children. A child
range. STOP Button
could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle. 1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up 2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
may cause serious injury or death.
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with vehicle ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
stopped) and the ENGINE START/STOP button Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or are outlined on the following pages.
is pushed once, the transmission will automat- NEUTRAL Position)
ically select PARK and the engine will turn off The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar WARNING!
while the ignition will remain in the ACC to an ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF,  Driver inattention could lead to failure to place
position (NOT the OFF position). Never leave a ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition positions the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll. without starting the vehicle and use the CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the accessories, follow these steps: that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h), 1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position. the instrument cluster display and on the gear
pushing the START/STOP button once will turn selector. If the "P" indicator is blinking, your
the engine off. The ignition will remain in the 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
vehicle is not in PARK. As an added precau-
ACC position. place the ignition to the ACC position
tion, always apply the parking brake when
(instrument cluster will display “ACC”).
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), exiting the vehicle.
the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held 3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the RUN  AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
for two seconds (or three short pushes in a designed to replace the need to shift your
row) to turn the engine off. The ignition will position (instrument cluster will display “ON/
RUN”). vehicle into PARK. It is a back-up system and
remain in the ACC position (NOT the OFF should not be relied upon as the primary
position) if the engine is turned off when the 4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
transmission is not in PARK. time to return the ignition to the OFF position into PARK.
(instrument cluster will display “OFF”).
NOTE:
The system will automatically time out and the AUTOPARK If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off
ignition will cycle to the OFF position after the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
30 minutes of inactivity if the ignition is left in the AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
ACC or RUN (engine not running) position and the placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations are met:
transmission is in PARK. on the following pages occur. It is a back-up system
and should not be relied upon as the primary  Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmis-
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into sion
PARK.  Driver’s door is ajar or if the driver’s door is
removed and the driver is not on the seat (seat
pad sensor detects driver missing)
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
 Vehicle is not in PARK the gear selector must be returned to “P” to select The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
 Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less desired gear. displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into
 Ignition is switched from RUN to OFF PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
vehicle may AutoPark.
NOTE: ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will cluster display and on the gear selector. As an
change to ACC position. The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to
added precaution, always apply the parking brake
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if
when exiting the vehicle.
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
AutoPark. EXTREME COLD WEATHER 4
WARNING!
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions (B ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
are met: If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
 Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed transmis- use of an externally powered electric engine block
vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A
sion vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
 Driver’s door is ajar or if the driver’s door is an added precaution, always apply the parking recommended.
removed and the driver is not on the seat (seat brake when exiting the vehicle. EXTENDED P ARK S TARTING
pad sensor detects driver missing)
 Vehicle is not in PARK NOTE:
4L
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
 Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less AutoPark will be disabled when operating the has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
 Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled vehicle in 4L. 1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to
 Brake pedal is not pressed The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be the battery to ensure a full battery charge
displayed in the instrument cluster. during the crank cycle.
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster. Additional customer warnings will be given when 2. Place the ignition in the START position and
both of these conditions are met: release it when the engine starts.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be  Vehicle is not in PARK
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these cases,  Driver’s door is ajar
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds,

WARNING! AFTER S TARTING
place the ignition in the OFF position, wait
10 to 15 seconds to allow the starter to cool,  Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into The idle speed is controlled automatically and will
then repeat the “Extended Park Starting” the throttle body air inlet opening in an decrease as the engine warms up.
procedure. attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, in flash fire causing serious personal injury. STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE
allow the starter to cool for at least
10 minutes, then repeat the procedure.
 Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to (IF EQUIPPED)
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto-
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, both
matic transmission cannot be started this
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat
CAUTION! way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
belts.
converter and once the engine has started,
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. The starter is allowed to crank for up to 25-second
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a intervals. Waiting two minutes between such
time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.  If the vehicle has a discharged battery, intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in WARNING!
I F ENGINE F AILS T O S TART another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 338.  Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
If the engine fails to start after you have followed complete stop, then shift the automatic trans-
the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” mission into PARK and apply the parking
procedure, and the vehicle has not experience an brake.
extended park condition, it may be flooded. Push CAUTION!
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and To prevent damage to the starter, do not  Always make sure the ignition is in the OFF
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than continuously crank the engine for more than position, key fob is removed from the vehicle
10 to 15 seconds. This should clear any excess 10 to 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 and vehicle is locked.
fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the seconds before trying again. (Continued)
ignition in the RUN position, release the
accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
NOTE:
WARNING! CAUTION! The engine block heater and heater cord are
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with  The engine is allowed to crank as long as 25 factory-installed options. If your vehicle is not
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving chil- seconds. If the engine fails to start during this equipped, heater and heater cords are available
dren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for period, please wait at least two minutes for from an authorized Mopar® dealer.
a number of reasons. A child or others could the starter to cool before repeating start  A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter housing
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should procedure. aids in preventing fuel gelling. It is controlled by
be warned not to touch the parking brake, a built-in thermostat.
 If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
DO NOT START engine before you drain the  A Diesel Pre-Heat system both improves engine
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, water from the fuel filters to avoid engine starting and reduces the amount of white
or in a location accessible to children, and do damage Ú page 362. smoke generated by a warming engine. 4
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/ NORMAL STARTING
RUN position. A child could operate power AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Observe the instrument cluster lights when
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Start the engine with the transmission gear starting the engine.
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked selector in the PARK (P) position. Apply the brake NOTE:
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up before shifting to any driving range. Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
may cause serious injury or death. EXTREME COLD WEATHER obtained without pumping or pressing the accel-
erator pedal.
The cartridge block heater clips into the engine 1. Always apply the parking brake.
NOTE:
block near the water jacket and transfers heat to
Engine start up in very low ambient temperature 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the coolant. It requires a 110–115 Volt AC
could result in evident white smoke. This condition the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire
will disappear as the engine warms up.
extension cord. Its use is recommended for NOTE:
environments that routinely fall below -10°F A delay of the start of up to five seconds is possible
(-23°C). It should be used when the vehicle has not under very cold conditions. The Wait to Start
been running overnight or longer periods and telltale will be illuminated during the preheat
should be plugged in for two hours prior to start. Its process. When the engine Wait To Start telltale
use is required for cold starts with temperatures goes off the engine will automatically crank.
under -20°F (-28°C).
CAUTION! WARNING! NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE

If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on,  Do not leave children or animals inside parked Observe the following when the diesel engine is
DO NOT START the engine before you drain the vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up operating:
water from the fuel filters to avoid engine may cause serious injury or death.  All message center lights are off.
damage Ú page 362.
 When leaving the vehicle, always make sure  Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF posi-  Engine Oil Pressure telltale is not illuminated.
3. The system will automatically engage the tion, remove the key fob from the vehicle and
starter to crank the engine. If the vehicle fails  Voltmeter operation.
lock the vehicle.
to start, the starter will disengage automat- The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
ically after 25 seconds. various engine temperatures. This is caused by the
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil- glow plug heating system. The number of cycles
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
prior to the engine starting, push the ENGINE and the length of the cycling operation is controlled
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or by the engine control module. Glow plug heater
START/STOP button again. others could be seriously or fatally injured. operation can run for several minutes. Once the
5. Check that the Oil Pressure Warning Light has Children should be warned not to touch the heater operation is complete, the voltmeter needle
turned off. parking brake, brake pedal or the gear will stabilize.
6. Release the parking brake. selector.
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
STARTING FLUIDS or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
The engine is equipped with a glow plug preheating with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/
system. If the instructions in this manual are RUN position. A child could operate power
followed, the engine should start in all conditions windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
and no type of starting fluid should be used.
COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS NOTE: total grille opening in varying ambient

 Use of Climatized ULSD Fuel or Number 1 ULSD temperatures. If a Winter front or cold weather
Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F cover is to be used, the flaps should be in the full
Fuel results in a noticeable decrease in fuel
(0°C) may require special considerations. The open position to allow air flow to the cooling
economy.
following charts suggest these options: module and automatic transmission oil cooler.
 Climatized ULSD Fuel is a blend of Number 2
Fuel Operating Range When ambient temperatures drop below 0°F
ULSD Fuel and Number 1 ULSD Fuel which (-17°C) the four flaps need to be closed. A suitable
NOTE: reduces the temperature at which wax crystals cold weather cover is available from a Mopar®
Use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) Fuels ONLY. form in fuel. dealer.
 The fuel grade should be clearly marked on the
pump at the fuel station.
Engine Warm-Up
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is 4
 The engine requires the use of Ultra Low Sulfur
cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the engine
Diesel Fuel. Use of incorrect fuel could result in
up to operating speed slowly to allow the oil
engine and exhaust system damage
pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up.
Ú page 420.
If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate the
 If climatized or Number 1 ULSD Fuel is not avail-
engine at moderate speeds for five minutes before
able, and you are operating below 20°F (-6°C),
full loads are applied.
in sustained arctic conditions, Mopar®
Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent) ENGINE IDLING
is recommended to avoid gelling (see Fuel Oper-
ating Range Chart). Avoid prolonged idling. Long periods of idling may
be harmful to your engine because combustion
Engine Oil Usage chamber temperatures can drop so low that the
Fuel Operating Range Chart See Engine Fluids and Lubricants for the correct fuel may not burn completely. Incomplete
engine oil viscosity Ú page 424. combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on
*Number 1 ULSD Fuel should only be used where piston rings, cylinder head valves, and injector
extended arctic conditions 0°F (-18°C) exist. Winter Front Cover
nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can enter the
A Winter front or cold weather cover can be used in crankcase, diluting the oil and causing rapid wear
ambient temperatures below 32°F (0°C), to the engine.
especially during extended idle conditions. This
cover is equipped with four flaps for managing
STOPPING THE ENGINE

After full load operation, idle the engine for a few minutes before shutting it down. This idle period will allow the lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat
away from the turbocharger.
NOTE:
Refer to the following chart for proper engine shutdown.
Idle Time (min.) Before Engine

Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature
Shutdown
Stop and Go Empty Cool None
Stop and Go Medium 0.5
Highway Speeds Medium Warm 1.0
City Traffic Maximum GCWR 1.5
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR 2.0
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot 2.5
NOTE:  City Driving — When stopped, shift the transmis- Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil
Under certain conditions the engine fan will run sion into NEUTRAL (N) and increase engine idle Pressure
after the engine is turned off. These conditions are speed.
under high load and high temperature conditions. If the Oil Pressure Warning Light turns on while
 Highway Driving — Reduce your speed. driving, stop the vehicle and shut down the engine
COOLING SYSTEM TIPS — AUTOMATIC  Up Steep Hills — Select a lower transmission as soon as possible. A chime will sound when the
gear. light turns on. After the vehicle is safely stopped,
TRANSMISSION restart the engine and monitor the Oil Pressure
 Air Conditioning — Turn it off temporarily.
To reduce the potential for engine and Warning Light. If the Oil Pressure Warning Light is
transmission overheating in high ambient NOTE: still illuminated, turn the engine OFF and contact
temperature conditions, take the following actions: If the coolant temperature is too high, the A/C will an authorized dealer for further assistance. If the
automatically turn off.
lamp is no longer illuminated, the engine can be  Sudden change, outside the normal operating
operated but it is recommended to take the vehicle range, in the engine operating temperature CAUTION!
to an authorized dealer as soon as possible.  Excessive smoke Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
NOTE: Oil in the engine or damage may result.
 Oil pressure drop
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not show how much oil is
in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first
under the hood. GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
A long break-in period is not required for the engine should be considered a normal part of the break-in
CAUTION! and not interpreted as a problem.
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings, 4
vehicle.
shut the engine off immediately. Failure to do so
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
could result in immediate and severe engine
damage.
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), DIESEL ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable. The diesel engine does not require a break-in
Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed period due to its construction. Normal operation is
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within allowed, providing the following recommendations
Parts the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good are followed:
All engine failures give some warning before the break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.  Warm up the engine before placing it under load.
parts fail. Be on the alert for changes in
performance, sounds, and visual evidence that the The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory  Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged
engine requires service. Some important clues are: is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. periods.
 Engine misfiring or vibrating severely Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated  Use the appropriate transmission gear to
climate conditions under which vehicle operations prevent engine lugging.
 Sudden loss of power
will occur.  Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature
 Unusual engine noises
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades indicators.
 Fuel, oil or coolant leaks Ú page 424.
 Check the coolant and oil levels frequently. When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
 Vary throttle position at highway speeds when front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
carrying or towing significant weight. and away from the curb on an uphill grade. For
vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
NOTE: apply the parking brake before placing the gear
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the
no load operation will extend the time before the transmission locking mechanism may make it
engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel economy difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
and power may be seen at this time.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory WARNING!
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Parking Brake Lever  Never use the PARK position on an automatic
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
transmission as a substitute for the parking
climate conditions under which vehicle operations When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
will occur. For recommended viscosity and quality switch ON, the Brake Warning Light in the
when parked to guard against vehicle move-
grades see Ú page 424. NON-DETERGENT OR instrument cluster will illuminate.
ment and possible injury or damage.
STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED. NOTE:
PARKING BRAKE  When the parking brake is applied and the auto-
matic transmission is placed in gear, the Brake
key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the Warning Light will flash. If vehicle speed is  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
leave an automatic transmission in PARK, or Fully release the parking brake before dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
manual transmission in REVERSE or FIRST gear. attempting to move the vehicle. dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
The parking brake lever is located in the center  This light only shows that the parking brake is
Children should be warned not to touch the
console. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever applied. It does not show the degree of brake
up as firmly as possible. To release the parking application.
selector.
brake, pull the lever up slightly, push the center
button, then lower the lever completely. (Continued)
WARNING! MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED CAUTION!

 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, WARNING!  Do not drive with your hand resting on the gear
or in a location accessible to children. A child selector as the force exerted, even if slight,
could operate power windows, other controls, You or others could be injured if you leave the could lead over time to premature wear of the
or move the vehicle. vehicle unattended without having the parking gearbox internal components.
brake fully applied. The parking brake should
 Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged always be applied when the driver is not in the
before driving; failure to do so can lead to vehicle, especially on an incline. NOTE:
brake failure and a collision. During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transmission
 Always fully apply the parking brake when
CAUTION! fluid warms up. This is normal. 4
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave an  Never drive with your foot resting on or
automatic transmission in PARK, a manual partially depressing the clutch pedal. Never
transmission in REVERSE or FIRST gear. attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll clutch pedal partially engaged. Operating
and cause damage or injury. vehicle in this manner may cause the clutch to
overheat and cause permanent damage to
the clutch. If you continue to operate the
CAUTION! vehicle in this manner, the “CLUTCH HOT”
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the message or Transmission Temperature
parking brake released, a brake system Warning Light will be displayed in the instru-
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system ment cluster. For more information Transmission Gear Selector
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. Ú page 128.
(Continued) To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal and
place the gear selector into the desired gear
position (the diagram for the engagement of the
gears is displayed on the handle of the selector).
The engaged gear will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL SHIFTING NOTE:

position, lift the REVERSE ring, located below the A certain amount of noise from the transmission is
knob and move the gear selector all the way left Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. normal. This noise can be most noticeable when
and then forward. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch
accelerator pedal. engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may also be
You should always use FIRST gear when starting heard when driving. The noise may also be more
from a standing position. noticeable when the transmission is warm. This
noise is normal and is not an indication of a
problem with your clutch or transmission.
Shift Pattern
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift
at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer, these recommended up-shift speeds may not apply.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
Accel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 50 (80) 65 (104) 70 (112)
3.6L
Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 40 (64) 55 (88) 65 (105)
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and 4H only. Vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.
DOWNSHIFTING CAUTION! Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in

Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is MPH (KM/H)
 When descending a hill, be very careful to
recommended to preserve brakes when driving downshift one gear at a time to prevent over- Gear
down steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
speeding the engine which can cause engine Selection
right time provides better acceleration when you damage, and/or clutch damage, even if the
desire to resume speed. Downshift progressively. Maximum 80 70 50 30 15
clutch pedal is pressed. If transfer case is in Speed (129) (113) (81) (48) (24)
Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine low range the vehicle speeds to cause engine
and clutch. and clutch damage are significantly lower. NOTE:
NOTE: Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for
 Failure to follow the maximum recommended
The manual transmission shift system is equipped
downshifting speeds may cause the engine
2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be 4
with gear blockers, which will prevent downshifts significantly less.
damage and/or damage the clutch, even if the
into FIRST or SECOND gear above certain vehicle
clutch pedal is pressed.
speeds. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
 Descending a hill in low range with clutch
WARNING! pedal pressed could result in clutch damage. IF EQUIPPED
Do not downshift for additional engine braking You must press and hold the brake pedal while
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could Maximum Recommended Downshift shifting out of PARK.
lose their grip, and the vehicle could skid. Speeds
WARNING!
CAUTION!  Never use the PARK position as a substitute
CAUTION! for the parking brake. Always apply the
Failure to follow the maximum recommended
 Skipping gears and downshifting into lower downshifting speeds may cause the engine to parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
gears at higher vehicle speeds can damage overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc, even guard against vehicle movement and possible
the engine and clutch systems. Any attempt to if the clutch pedal is pressed. injury or damage.
shift into lower gear with clutch pedal pressed (Continued)
may result damage to the clutch system.
Shifting into lower gear and releasing the
clutch may result in engine damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! WARNING! CAUTION!

 Your vehicle could move and injure you and  Unintended movement of a vehicle could Damage to the transmission may occur if the
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all following precautions are not observed:
move the transmission gear selector out of vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
 Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
sure the transmission is in PARK before always come to a complete stop, then apply
exiting the vehicle. the parking brake, shift the transmission into  Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
 The transmission may not engage PARK if the
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis- idle speed.
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle  Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
against unwanted movement. foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
stopped, and the PARK position is properly key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
I GNITION PARK INTERLOCK
indicated, before exiting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
 It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil- Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than dren to be in a vehicle unattended is PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or position. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate others could be seriously or fatally injured. leaving the vehicle without placing the
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose Children should be warned not to touch the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
control of the vehicle and hit someone or parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis- transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in
something. Only shift into gear when the sion gear selector. the OFF position.
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly NOTE:
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
pressing the brake pedal. The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
(Continued) ignition is in the ACC position (even though the
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is
position. A child could operate power
in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
position) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT the position indicator will blink continuously until

the selector is returned to the proper position, or
I NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM the requested shift can be completed.
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that The electronically controlled transmission adapts
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the with environmental and road conditions. The
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle and precision shifts will develop within a few
is stopped or moving at low speeds. hundred miles (kilometers). Transmission Gear Selector 4
8–S PEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
NOTE:
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
both beside the gear selector and in the REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed
pedal when shifting between these gears.
instrument cluster. To select a gear range, push forward), it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-)
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick
the lock button on the gear selector and move the
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is
selector rearward or forward. To shift the
(AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
made using the AutoStick shift control. Toggling selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. You
the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
must also press the brake pedal to shift from
in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle Gear Ranges
DRIVE position) will manually select the
is stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
transmission gear, and will display the current gear
DRIVE range for normal driving. out of PARK or NEUTRAL.
in the instrument cluster Ú page 156.
NOTE: NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
selector position and the actual transmission gear allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
(for example, driver selects PARK while driving), ating. This is especially important when the engine
is cold.
PARK (P)
WARNING! WARNING!
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be  Your vehicle could move and injure you and  Unintended movement of a vehicle could
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking move the transmission gear selector out of vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range. PARK with the brake pedal released. Make the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
sure the transmission is in PARK before always come to a complete stop, then apply
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
exiting the vehicle. the parking brake, shift the transmission into
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the  The transmission may not engage PARK if the
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
on an uphill grade. complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always: verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
 Apply the parking brake. blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
 Shift the transmission into PARK. stopped, and the PARK position is properly key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
 Turn the ignition OFF. indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
 Remove the key fob from the vehicle.  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
NOTE:
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
On four-wheel drive vehicles, be sure that the
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate others could be seriously or fatally injured.
transfer case is in a drive position.
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose Children should be warned not to touch the
WARNING! control of the vehicle and hit someone or parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
something. Only shift into gear when the sion gear selector.
 Never use the PARK position as a substitute engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
for the parking brake. Always apply the  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
pressing the brake pedal.
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to (or in a location accessible to children), and do
(Continued) not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage. position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
NEUTRAL (N) forward gears. The DRIVE position should be used

CAUTION! for all normal operating conditions.
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
 Before moving the transmission gear selector prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
out of PARK, you must start the engine, and the parking brake and shift the transmission into as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, PARK if you must exit the vehicle. conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
damage to the gear selector could result. head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use
 DO NOT race the engine when shifting from WARNING! the AutoStick shift control to select a lower gear
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as Ú page 156. Under these conditions, using a lower
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
this can damage the drivetrain. gear will improve performance and extend
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
and heat build-up. 4
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have properly engaged the transmission of the vehicle and have a collision. During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F
into the PARK position: [-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission
 When shifting into PARK, push the lock button temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal
CAUTION!
on the gear selector and firmly move the gear operation will resume once the transmission
selector all the way forward until it stops and is  Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any temperature has risen to a suitable level.
fully seated. other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission MANUAL (M)
 Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), damage. The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE
and is not blinking. position) enables full manual control of
 For Recreational Towing Ú page 198.
transmission shifting also known as AutoStick
 With the brake pedal released, verify that the  For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 344. mode. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
gear selector will not move out of PARK. rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick)
REVERSE (R) DRIVE (D) position will manually select the transmission gear,
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. and will display the current gear in the instrument
This range should be used for most city and cluster Ú page 156.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
to a complete stop. and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all
Transmission Limp Home Mode  If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized mode, you can use the gear selector (in the
dealer service is required. MANUAL position) to manually shift the
Transmission function is monitored electronically
1. Stop the vehicle. transmission.
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
that could result in transmission damage, 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If AutoStick mode has the following operational
Transmission Limp Home mode is activated. In this not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. benefits:
mode, the transmission may operate only in  The transmission will automatically downshift
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging)
engine turns off.
performance may be severely degraded and the and will display the current gear.
engine may stall. In some situations, the 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
 The transmission will automatically downshift to
transmission may not re-engage if the engine is 5. Restart the engine. FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop,
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the the driver should manually upshift (+) the trans-
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the
problem is no longer detected, the mission as the vehicle is accelerated.
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
transmission will return to normal operation.  You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
more serious conditions, and indicate what actions
may be necessary. SECOND gear (or THIRD gear, in 4L range).
AutoStick Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in
In the event of a momentary problem, the
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND or THIRD
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
feature providing manual shift control, giving you gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
gears by performing the following steps:
more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to
 If a requested downshift would cause the
NOTE: maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable
engine to overspeed, that shift will not occur.
 In cases where the instrument cluster message upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall
vehicle performance. This feature can also provide  The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too
indicates the transmission may not re-engage
after engine shutdown, perform this procedure you with more control during passing, city driving, low of a vehicle speed.
only in a desired location (preferably, at an cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer  Holding the gear selector in the (-) position will
authorized dealer). towing, and many other situations. downshift the transmission to the lowest gear
Operation possible at the current speed.
 Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear  Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
earliest possible convenience. An authorized selector into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the when AutoStick is enabled.
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the DRIVE position). The current transmission gear will  The system may revert to automatic shift mode
condition of your transmission. be displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick if a fault or overheat condition is detected.
NOTE: FOUR-P OSITION T RANSFER CASE — 4H

When Hill Descent Control is enabled, AutoStick is
not active.
I F E QUIPPED Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or speed. This range provides additional traction for
out of the AutoStick position at any time without loose, slippery road surfaces only.
taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. N (Neutral)
WARNING! WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking You or others could be injured or killed if you
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could 4
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, case in the (N) Neutral position without first fully
causing a collision or personal injury. engaging the parking brake. The transfer case
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector (N) Neutral position disengages both the front
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION The transfer case provides four positions:
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain, and
will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic
 2H — Two-Wheel Drive High Range transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission
WARNING!
 4H — Four-Wheel Drive High Range is in gear). The parking brake should always be
Failure to engage a transfer case position applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
 N (Neutral)
completely can cause transfer case damage or
loss of power and vehicle control. You could have  4L — Four-Wheel Drive Low Range
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front
a collision. Do not drive the vehicle unless the For additional information on the appropriate use and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be
transfer case is fully engaged. of each transfer case position, see the following: used for flat towing behind another vehicle
2H Ú page 198.
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
4L at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed  Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides the engine. experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or
low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle
the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear depends on tires of equal size, type, and loading, or cold temperatures.
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range circumference on each wheel. Any difference will  Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is
provides additional traction and maximum pulling adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the normal.
power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not transfer case. During cold weather, you may experience
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). Because four-wheel drive provides improved increased effort in shifting until the transfer case
The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning fluid warms up. This is normal.
position for normal street and highway conditions, and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
such as hard-surfaced roads. conditions permit. 4H TO 4L OR 4L TO 4H
In the event that additional traction is required, the Shifting Procedures With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h),
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N),
lock the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing 2H TO 4H OR 4H TO 2H or press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same While the vehicle is coasting at 1 to 3 mph (2 to
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
speed. The 4H and 4L positions are intended for 5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever firmly to the
vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred shifting
loose, slippery road surfaces only and not intended desired position. Do not pause with the transfer
speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the
for normal driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is completed,
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or
disengage faster if you momentarily release the
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Do not
components. For further information on shifting accelerate while shifting the transfer case. Apply a NOTE:
into 4H or 4L Ú page 158. constant force when shifting the transfer case lever. Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur
NOTE:
vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front and due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned.
rear driveshafts are locked together. The light will  Do not attempt to make a shift while only the Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth
illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into front or rear wheels are spinning. The front and alignment and shift completion to occur. The
the 4H position. rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 1 to
shift to take place. Shifting while only the front 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage
speed will be approximately three times (four times or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster
to the transfer case. than 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).
for Rubicon models) that of the 2H or 4H positions
During cold weather, you may experience The transfer case provides five mode positions: N (Neutral)
increased effort in shifting until the transfer case  2H — Two-Wheel Drive High Range
fluid warms up. This is normal. WARNING!
 4H AUTO — Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range
You or others could be injured or killed if you
WARNING!  4H PART TIME — Four-Wheel Drive Part Time
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
High Range
Failure to engage a transfer case position case in the (N) Neutral position without first fully
completely can cause transfer case damage or  N (Neutral) engaging the parking brake. The transfer case
loss of power and vehicle control. You could have  4L — Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (N) Neutral position disengages both the front
a collision. Do not drive the vehicle unless the and rear driveshafts from the powertrain, and
For additional information on the appropriate use
transfer case is fully engaged. will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic
of each transfer case mode position, see the
following:
transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission 4
is in gear). The parking brake should always be
FIVE-P OSITION TRANSFER CASE — 2H applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
I F EQUIPPED Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard Neutral — This range disengages both the front and
surfaced roads. rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used
4H AUTO for flat towing behind another vehicle Ú page 198.
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range 4L
sends power to the front wheels. The four-wheel Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides
drive system will be automatically engaged when low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to
the vehicle senses a loss of traction. Additional the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
traction for varying road conditions. wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range
4H PART TIME provides additional traction and maximum pulling
Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High Range — This power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the This transfer case is designed to be driven in the
same speed. This range provides additional two-wheel drive position (2H) or four-wheel drive
traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only. position (4H AUTO) for normal street and highway
conditions on dry hard surfaced roads. Driving the When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine 2H/4H AUTO TO 4H PART TIME OR 4H PART
vehicle in 2H will have greater fuel economy speed will be approximately three times (four times TIME TO 2H/4H AUTO
benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2H. for Rubicon models) that of the 2H or 4H positions
Shifting between 2H/4H AUTO to 4H PART TIME
For variable driving conditions, the 4H AUTO mode at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed
can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion.
can be used. In this mode, the front axle is the engine.
The preferred shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph
engaged, but the vehicle's power is sent to the rear Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles (72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the transfer
wheels. Four-wheel drive will be automatically depends on tires of equal size, type, and case will engage/disengage faster if you
engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of circumference on each wheel. Any difference will momentarily release the accelerator pedal after
traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the completing the shift. Do not accelerate while
mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2H transfer case. shifting the transfer case. Apply a constant force
mode. Because four-wheel drive provides improved when shifting the transfer case lever.
In the event that additional traction is required, the traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning NOTE:
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
 Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
lock the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing conditions permit.
front or rear wheels are spinning. The front and
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
Shifting Procedures rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the
speed. The 4H and 4L positions are intended for
shift to take place. Shifting while only the front
loose, slippery road surfaces only and not intended 2H TO 4H AUTO OR 4H AUTO TO 2H or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage
for normal driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L
Shifting between 2H and 4H AUTO can be made to the transfer case.
positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline with the vehicle stopped or in motion. The  Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
components. For further information on shifting preferred shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or
into 4H or 4L Ú page 160. (72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the transfer uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle
case will engage/disengage faster if you loading, or cold temperatures.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the momentarily release the accelerator pedal after
vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front and  Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is
completing the shift. Do not accelerate while
rear driveshafts are locked together. The light will normal.
shifting the transfer case. Apply a constant force
illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into when shifting the transfer case lever. During cold weather, you may experience
the 4H position. increased effort in shifting until the transfer case
fluid warms up. This is normal.
4H PART TIME/4H AUTO TO 4L OR 4L TO 4H TRAC-L OK REAR AXLE — IF E QUIPPED AXLE LOCK (T RU-L OK) F RONT A ND
PART TIME/4H AUTO REAR — IF E QUIPPED
The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant driving
With the vehicle rolling at 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), force to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin
shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument
caused by the loss of traction at one driving wheel. panel (to the right of the steering column).
or press the clutch pedal on a manual If traction differs between the two rear wheels, the
transmission. While the vehicle is coasting at 1 to differential automatically proportions the usable
3 mph (2 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever torque by providing more torque to the wheel that
firmly to the desired position. Do not pause with has traction.
the transfer case in N (Neutral). Once the shift is
Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery
completed, place the automatic transmission into
DRIVE or release the clutch pedal on a manual driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a 4
slippery surface, a slight application of the
transmission.
accelerator will supply maximum traction.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle WARNING!
completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur
due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned. On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip
differential, never run the engine with one rear Axle Lock Switch Panel
Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth
alignment and shift completion to occur. The wheel off the ground. The vehicle may drive This feature will only activate when the following
preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 1 to through the rear wheel remaining on the ground conditions are met:
3 mph (2 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage and cause you to lose control of your vehicle.
 Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4L.
or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster
than 1 to 3 mph (2 to 5 km/h).  Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or
less.
WARNING!  Both right and left wheels on axle are at the
Failure to engage a transfer case position same speed.
completely can cause transfer case damage or To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch
loss of power and vehicle control. You could have down to lock the rear axle only (the “REAR ONLY”
a collision. Do not drive the vehicle unless the will illuminate), push the switch up to lock the front
transfer case is fully engaged. axle and rear axle (the “FRONT + REAR” will
illuminate). When the rear axle is locked, pushing The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument To unlock the rear axle, push the AXLE LOCK OFF
the bottom of switch again will lock or unlock the panel (to the right of the steering column). button.
front axle. Axle Lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out
NOTE: of 4H, Off Road+ is turned off by the driver, ESC
The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully “Full Off” is exited, or the ignition switch is turned
locked or unlocked. to the OFF position.
To unlock the axles, push the AXLE LOCK OFF NOTE:
button. The indicator lights will flash until the rear axle is
Axle Lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out fully locked or unlocked.
of 4L, or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF The rear Axle Lock system may temporarily
position. disengage the rear locker under some conditions.
The Axle Lock disengages at speeds above 30 mph If this occurs, the rear axle will automatically
(48 km/h), and will automatically re-lock once Axle Lock Switch Panel re-lock as soon as the system allows.
vehicle speed is less than 10 mph (16 km/h).
This feature will only activate when the following ELECTRONIC S WAY B AR DISCONNECT —
AXLE LOCK (T RU-L OK) R EAR O NLY — conditions are met:
I F E QUIPPED
I F EQUIPPED  Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4H.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic
 The vehicle must be in Off Road+ active
The rear axle may be locked in 4H if the proper disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system
Ú page 163.
conditions are met. allows greater front suspension travel in off-road
 Vehicle must be in ESC “Full Off” mode situations.
WARNING! Ú page 278.
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road  Vehicle must not be actively in a high wheel slip located on the instrument panel (to the right of the
use only and should not be used on any public or tight cornering condition. steering column).
roadways. To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK switch
down to lock the rear axle only (“REAR ONLY” will
illuminate).
may require that the vehicle be driven onto level

WARNING! ground or rocked from side to side.
Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is reconnected To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR
before driving on hard surfaced roads or at switch again.
speeds above 18 mph (29 km/h); a discon-
nected stabilizer/sway bar may contribute to the WARNING!
loss of vehicle control, which could result in seri-
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to
ous injury. Under certain circumstances, the
on-road mode, the Sway Bar Indicator Light will
front stabilizer/sway bar enhances vehicle sta-
flash in the instrument cluster and vehicle stabil-
bility and assists with vehicle control. The sys-
ity may be reduced. Do not attempt to drive the
SWAY BAR Switch tem monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to
vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster 4
reconnect the stabilizer/sway bar at speeds over
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system. than 18 mph (29 km/h) with a disconnected sta-
18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a flash-
Push the switch again to deactivate the system. bilizer/sway bar may contribute to the loss of
ing or solid Sway Bar Indicator Light. Once vehi-
The Sway Bar Indicator Light (located in the vehicle control, which could result in serious
cle speed is reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h),
instrument cluster) will illuminate when the bar is injury.
the system will once again attempt to return to
disconnected. The Sway Bar Indicator Light will off-road mode.
flash during activation transition, or when OFF R OAD+ — IF EQUIPPED
activation conditions are not met. The stabilizer/
sway bar should remain in on-road mode during To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to
normal driving conditions. either 4H or 4L and push the SWAY BAR switch to
obtain the off-road position Ú page 157. The Sway
Bar Indicator Light will flash until the stabilizer/
sway bar has been fully disconnected.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due
to left and right suspension height differences.
This condition is due to driving surface differences
or vehicle loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway
bar to disconnect/reconnect, the right and left
halves of the bar must be aligned. This alignment OFF ROAD+ Switch
When activated, Off Road+ is designed to improve 4L If the ESC OFF button is pushed while in Off Road+,
the user experience when using specific Off Road  Engine/Transmission Calibration: Rock Crawl the following will occur on the vehicle:
driving modes. To activate Off Road+, push the and controllability focus, change in shifting  Push of the ESC OFF Button: Traction Control
OFF ROAD+ switch in the switch bank. The schedule when rock crawling, pedal calibration will turn off, but Stability Control will remain
vehicle’s performance will improve depending on shifted to de-gain and low range, operates at active.
which Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) mode is activated. lower vehicle speeds  Hold the ESC OFF Button for five seconds: Trac-
NOTE:  Traction Control: Aggressive brake lock differen- tion Control and Stability Control will turn off.
Off Road+ will not function in 2H mode. If the tial tuning at slower speed or FIRST gear
button is pushed while in 2H mode, the cluster
display will show the message “Off Road+  Off Road+: Recall the last status between igni- ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING
Unavailable Shift to 4WD”. tion cycles Your vehicle is equipped with an Electro-Hydraulic
When Off Road+ is active, the following features 4H Power Steering system that provides increased
will activate:  Engine/Transmission Calibration: Improved vehicle response and ease of maneuverability. The
sand performance/wheel slip focus, change in system adapts to different driving conditions. If the
 The Off Road+ telltale will illuminate in the Electro-Hydraulic Power Steering system
instrument cluster display shift schedule for sport mode, pedal calibration
set to aggressive, operates at elevated vehicle experiences a fault that prevents it from providing
 A mode-specific message will display the instru- speeds power steering assist, then the system will provide
ment cluster display mechanical steering capability.
 Traction Control: High wheel speed, slip tuning
 Off-Road Pages will launch on the radio brake lock differential with no engine manage-
head-unit if selected in radio settings CAUTION!
ment
 The Off-Road Camera will launch if selected in Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the
 Electronic Stability Control: ESC Off with unlim-
radio settings electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power
ited speed
steering assistance in order to prevent damage
Once in Off Road+, the vehicle will begin to behave  Off Road+: Will default to OFF between ignition to the system. Normal operation will resume
in different ways depending on the 4WD mode in cycles once the system is allowed to cool.
use. The following enhancements will occur when
using Off Road+. Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
will not function while using Off Road+. A dedicated
cluster message will display indicating this if either
feature is activated while in Off Road+.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message and

a flashing icon are displayed on the instrument
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
cluster screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
to be taken to an authorized dealer for service. It is
likely the vehicle has lost power steering The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is developed
assistance Ú page 120. to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop
the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if
If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an the required conditions are met. Releasing the
icon are displayed on the instrument cluster brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal will
screen, it indicates that extreme steering automatically restart the engine.
maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a
over temperature condition in the power steering
heavy-duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
Battery Locations 4
system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional 1 — Primary Battery
no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, engine starts. Vehicles equipped with eTorque 2 — Secondary Battery
pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments contain a heavy-duty motor generator and an
until the light turns off Ú page 120. additional hybrid electric battery to store energy
from vehicle deceleration for use on engine startup AUTOSTOP MODE
NOTE: after a stop as well as providing launch torque
 Even if power steering assistance is no longer assist. WARNING!
operational, it is still possible to steer the NOTE:  Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a It is recommended that Stop/Start system be equipped with two batteries. Both the main
substantial increase in steering effort, espe- disabled during off-road use. and the supplemental batteries must be
cially at very low vehicle speeds and during
Secondary Battery disconnected to completely de-energize the
parking maneuvers.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary 12 Volt electrical system.
 If the condition persists, see an authorized
battery used to power the Stop/Start system and  Serious injury or death could result if you do
dealer for service.
the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system. The not disconnect both batteries. To learn how to
secondary battery is located behind the wheel well properly disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
for the front passenger wheel.
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every driver  The vehicle is on a steep grade. into a STOP/START READY state under more
ignition start. At that time, the system will go into  Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an extreme conditions of the items listed above.
STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are acceptable cabin temperature has not been
met, can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE TO START T HE E NGINE WHILE IN
achieved.
Autostop mode. AUTOSTOP MODE
 Gear selector is in MANUAL (M) mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following While in a forward gear, the engine will start when
Must Occur:  HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed. the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is
 The system must be in STOP/START READY pressed. The transmission will automatically
state. A STOP/START READY message will be  HVAC is set to MAX A/C. re-engage upon engine restart.
displayed in the instrument cluster display  Engine has not reached normal operating Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
within the Stop/Start section Ú page 120. temperature. Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
 The vehicle must be completely stopped.  Engine or exhaust temperature is too high.  The transmission selector is moved out of
 The shifter must be in a forward gear and the  The transmission is not in a forward gear. DRIVE.
brake pedal pressed.  Hood is open.  To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
POSSIBLE R EASONS T HE E NGINE DOES  Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral).  Actual cabin temperature is significantly
different than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
N OT AUTOSTOP  Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pres-
sure.  HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if they  Accelerator pedal input.  HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
are fulfilled. Detailed information about the  Vehicle speed threshold has not been achieved manually adjusted higher.
operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed from previous Autostop.  Battery voltage drops too low.
in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start  Steering angle is beyond threshold (ESS Models  Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
Screen. Situations when the engine will not stop Only).  A Stop/Start system error occurs.
include (but not limited to):
 ACC is on and speed is set.  Stop/Start Autostop Active time exceeds five
 Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
 Vehicle is at high altitude. minutes.
 Driver’s door is not closed.
 System fault is present.  Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral).
 Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven  Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold (ESS
 Battery charge is low. several times without the Stop/Start system going Models Only).
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF T HE S TOP/ SYSTEM M ALFUNCTION NOTE:

It is recommended that Stop/Start be disabled
S TART S YSTEM If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, during off-road use.
the system will not shut down the engine. A
Secondary Battery
“SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a
yellow Stop/Start telltale will appear in the Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary
Instrument Cluster Display Ú page 120. battery used to power the Stop/Start system and
the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system. The
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
secondary battery is located behind the wheel well
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the
for the front passenger wheel.
system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the 4
vehicle may not auto start and will need a key start.
Stop/Start OFF Switch STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL

Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is developed
The “Stop/Start OFF” message will appear in to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if
section, and the autostop function will be disabled the required conditions are met. Pressing the
Ú page 120. clutch pedal will automatically restart the vehicle. Battery Locations
NOTE: ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a 1 — Primary Battery
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an heavy-duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
ON condition every time the ignition is turned off 2 — Secondary Battery
upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional
and back on. engine starts. Vehicles equipped with eTorque
contain a heavy duty motor generator and an
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/ additional hybrid electric battery to store energy
S TART S YSTEM from vehicle deceleration for use on engine startup
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the after a stop as well as providing launch torque
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off. assist.
AUTOSTOP MODE POSSIBLE R EASONS T HE E NGINE D OES  System fault is present.
N OT AUTOSTOP  HVAC is set to MAX A/C.

WARNING! It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
 Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be several times without the Stop/Start system going
many safety and comfort conditions to see if they
equipped with two batteries. Both the main into a STOP/START READY state under more
are fulfilled. Situations when the engine will not
and the supplemental batteries must be extreme conditions of the items listed above.
stop include (but not limited to):
disconnected to completely de-energize the TO START T HE E NGINE WHILE IN
 Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
12 Volt electrical system.
 Outside temperature is less than 10°F (–12°C) AUTOSTOP MODE
 Serious injury or death could result if you do
or greater than 109°F (43°C).
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how to When the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, the engine
properly disconnect, see an authorized dealer.  Actual cabin temperature is significantly will start when the clutch pedal is pressed (does
different than temperature set on Auto HVAC. not require complete/full pedal press). The vehicle
 HVAC is set to full defrost mode. will go into STOP/START SYSTEM NOT READY
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every driver mode until the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph
ignition start. It will remain in STOP/START NOT  Engine has not reached normal operating
(8 km/h).
READY until you drive forward with a vehicle speed temperature.
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). At that time, the Conditions that will cause the engine to start
 Battery is discharged.
system will go into STOP/START READY and if all automatically while in STOP/START AUTOSTOP
 When driving in REVERSE. ACTIVE mode
other conditions are met, can go into an STOP/
START AUTO STOP ACTIVE mode.  Hood is open. The Engine Will Start Automatically When:
To Activate The STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE  Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral).  Actual cabin temperature is significantly
Mode, The Following Must Occur:  Driver's seat is not occupied or driver’s door is different than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
 The system must be in STOP/START READY state. open.  HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
A STOP/START READY message will be displayed  Vehicle is at high altitude.  HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
in the instrument cluster Ú page 120. manually adjusted higher.
 The vehicle is on a steep grade.
 Vehicle speed must be less than 2 mph
 Forward Gear is engaged.  Stop/Start Autostop Active time exceeds five
(3 km/h). minutes.
 Steering angle is beyond threshold (ESS Models
 The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL posi-
Only).  Battery voltage drops too low.
tion and the clutch pedal must be fully released.
 Vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h). 3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the
Stop/Start system), the engine will not be
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
 STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
stopped. Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
 Transfer case is in 4L or N (Neutral). Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
4. If the Stop/Start system is manually turned off,
 Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold (ESS the engine can only be started and stopped by (ACC) system:
Models Only). cycling the ignition switch.  Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF T HE S TOP/ 5. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to constant preset speed.
an ON condition every time the ignition is  Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the
S TART S YSTEM vehicle speed up to the preset speed to main-
turned off and back on.
1. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on tain a distance with the vehicle ahead.
the switch bank). The light on the switch will TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE S TOP/ NOTE:
4
illuminate.
S TART S YSTEM  In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not
enabled, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
aware of the feature selected.
SYSTEM M ALFUNCTION  Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system,
is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be
the system will not shut down the engine. A
unavailable, and vice versa.
“SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a
yellow Stop/Start telltale will appear in the CRUISE C ONTROL
Instrument Cluster Display Ú page 120.
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
Stop/Start OFF Switch accelerator operations at speeds greater than
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the
20 mph (32 km/h).
2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear in system checked by an authorized dealer.
the instrument cluster Ú page 120. The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right
If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the
side of the steering wheel.
vehicle may not auto start and will need a key start.
To Activate To Vary The Speed Setting

Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease
off, push the on/off button a second time. The speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
cruise indicator light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use. U.S. Speed (mph)
 Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
WARNING! result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not
Cruise Control Buttons adjustment of 1 mph.
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
1 — SET (+)/Accel the system or cause it to go faster than you  If the button is continually pushed, the set
2 — CANC/Cancel want. You could lose control and have an speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
accident. Always leave the system off when you ments until the button is released, then the new
3 — SET (-)/Decel
are not using it. set speed will be established.
4 — On/Off
Metric Speed (km/h)
5 — RES/Resume
To Set A Desired Speed  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
Turn the Cruise Control on. result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
WARNING! subsequent tap of the button results in an
NOTE: adjustment of 1 km/h.
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
 If the button is continually pushed, the set
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or
SET (-) button. speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h incre-
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
ments until the button is released, then the new
you could lose control and have an accident. Do When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, set speed will be established.
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
slippery. operate at the selected speed.
To Accelerate For Passing To Resume Speed ADAPTIVE CRUISE C ONTROL (ACC)

While the Cruise Control is set, press the To resume a previously set speed, push the RES Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
accelerator to pass as you would normally. When button and release. Resume can be used at any convenience provided by Cruise Control while
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). traveling on highways and major roadways.
set speed.
To Deactivate However, it is not a safety system and not designed
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control function
(cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while performs differently if your vehicle is not equipped
The transmission may downshift on hills to with ACC Ú page 169.
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Cruise
maintain the vehicle set speed.
Control without erasing the set speed from NOTE:
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
memory.  If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC 4
The following conditions will also deactivate the will apply limited braking or accelerate (not to
is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or
Cruise Control without erasing the set speed from exceed the original set speed) automatically to
gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive
memory: maintain a preset following distance, while
without Cruise Control.
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
 Vehicle parking brake is applied
WARNING!  Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
 Stability event occurs
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the  Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Colli-
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your sion Warning system.
 Engine overspeed occurs
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do  Clutch pedal is pressed (manual transmission  Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled)
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on only) will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or  Vehicle is operating at a low RPM (manual trans-
Always be aware of the feature selected
slippery. mission only) Ú page 431.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in

the OFF position erases the set speed from
memory.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation

WARNING! WARNING!
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-  On vehicles with an automatic transmis- operate the ACC system.
nience system. It is not a substitute for active sion, will bring the vehicle to a complete
driver involvement. It is always the driver’s stop while following a vehicle ahead and
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, hold the vehicle for two seconds in the
and weather conditions, vehicle speed, stop position. If the vehicle ahead does
distance to the vehicle ahead and, most not start moving within two seconds, the
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe ACC system will display a message that
operation of the vehicle under all road condi- the system will release the brakes and
tions. Your complete attention is always that the brakes must be applied manually.
required while driving to maintain safe control An audible chime will sound when the
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn- brakes are released.
ings can result in a collision and death or
 You should switch off the ACC system:
serious personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
 When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
 The ACC system:
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex 1 — Distance Setting Increase
 Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming driving situations (i.e., in highway 2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a construction zones). 3 — Distance Setting Decrease
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a
 When entering a turn lane or highway
disabled vehicle).
off-ramp; when driving on roads that are Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
 Cannot take street, traffic, and weather winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
conditions into account, and may be have steep uphill or downhill slopes. The instrument cluster display will show the
limited upon adverse sight distance condi- current ACC system settings. The information it
 When towing a trailer up or down steep displays depends on ACC system status.
tions.
slopes.
 Does not always fully recognize complex
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
 When circumstances do not allow safe button until one of the following appears in the
driving conditions, which can result in
driving at a constant speed. instrument cluster display:
wrong or missing distance warnings.
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control Off Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) To Activate/Deactivate
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read The minimum set speed for the ACC system is Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” 20 mph (32 km/h). (ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When the system is turned on and in the ready instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed state, the instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.” To turn the system off, push and release the
setting has not been selected, the display will read When the system is off, the instrument cluster Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again.
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.” displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” At this time, the system will turn off and the
instrument cluster display will read “Adaptive
Adaptive Cruise Control Set NOTE: Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, You cannot engage ACC under the following condi-
the display will read “ACC SET.” tions: WARNING! 4
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the  When in 4WD Low
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
instrument cluster display.  When the brakes are applied system on when not in use is dangerous. You
The ACC screen may display once again if any of  When the parking brake is applied could accidentally set the system or cause it to
the following ACC activity occurs: go faster than you want. You could lose control
 When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
 System Cancel
and have a collision. Always leave the system off
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
when you are not using it.
 Driver Override  When the manual transmission is in FIRST gear
 System Off  When the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
To Set A Desired Speed
 ACC Proximity Warning (32 km/h) (manual transmission)
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push
 ACC Unavailable Warning  When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and
speed range
The instrument cluster display will return to the last release. The instrument cluster display will show
display selected after five seconds of no ACC  When the brakes are overheated the set speed.
display activity.  When the driver’s door is open at low speeds NOTE:
 When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
speeds ACC enabled. To change between the different
modes, push the ACC on/off button which turns
 When ESC Full Off mode is active
the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off.
 When Off Road+ (if equipped) is active
Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off NOTE:  The vehicle speed is less than 15 mph
button will result in turning on (changing to) Fixed  Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can (24 km/h) (manual transmission only)
Speed Cruise Control mode. cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate  The clutch is pressed for more than 10 seconds
beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the (manual transmission only)
WARNING! message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the  The vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL for more than
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system instrument cluster display. 10 seconds (manual transmission only)
will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the  If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
proximity warning does not activate and no  The driver shifts to FIRST gear (manual trans-
speed while ACC is enabled, the system will not mission only)
alarm will sound even if you are too close to the be controlling the distance between your vehicle
vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance only be determined by the position of the accel- system:
is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance erator pedal.  Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected. To Cancel  Driver door is opened at low speeds
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed To Turn Off
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below Speed Cruise Control systems: The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to  The brake pedal is applied memory if:
20 mph (32 km/h).  The CANC button is pushed  The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
NOTE:  The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates is pushed
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below  The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
 The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
20 mph (32 km/h). pushed
position
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is  The ignition is placed in the OFF position
 The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle. System (ESC/TCS) activates  4WD Low is engaged
On vehicles equipped with a manual transmission,  The vehicle parking brake is applied To Resume
the ACC system cannot be set when the vehicle  The braking temperature exceeds normal range If there is a set speed in the memory, push the RES
speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h) or when the (overheated) button and then remove your foot from the
vehicle is in FIRST gear.  The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display
will show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph U.S. Speed (mph) When ACC Is Active
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will  When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if
being used. result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each the engine’s braking power does not slow the
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph subsequent tap of the button results in an vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the
(0 km/h) when ACC is active. adjustment of 1 mph. brake system will automatically slow the
NOTE:  If the button is continually pushed, the set vehicle.
 While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-  The ACC system applies the brake down to a full
a complete stop longer than two seconds, the ments until the button is released. The new set stop when following the vehicle in front. If your
system will cancel. The driver will have to apply speed is reflected in the instrument cluster vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill. display. your vehicle will release the brakes two seconds
after coming to a full stop. 4
 ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary Metric Speed (km/h)
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will  The ACC system maintains set speed when
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
WARNING! subsequent tap of the button results in an speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
adjustment of 1 km/h. addition, downshifting may occur while climbing
The Resume function should only be used if uphill or descending downhill. This is normal
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a  If the button is continually pushed, the set operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
set speed that is too high or too low for speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h incre- When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
prevailing traffic and road conditions could ments until the button is released. The new set system will cancel if the braking temperature
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too speed is reflected in the instrument cluster exceeds normal range (overheated).
sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these display.
warnings can result in a collision and death or Setting The Following Distance In ACC
NOTE:
serious personal injury. When you override and push the SET (+) button or The specified following distance for ACC can be set
SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the by varying the distance setting between four bars
current speed of the vehicle. (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and
To Vary The Speed Setting
one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the
After setting a speed, you can increase the set distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
automatically to maintain the distance setting, Collision Warning system is applying the brakes
regardless of the set speed. autonomously.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance Overtake Aid
until: When driving with ACC engaged and following a
 The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above vehicle, the system will provide an additional
the set speed acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
 The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is
view of the sensor triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on the
 The distance setting is changed left hand side.
Distance Settings  The system disengages Ú page 173
ACC Operation At A Stop
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars) The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; (Automatic Transmission Only)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars) however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary. In the event that the ACC system brings your
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars) vehicle to a standstill while following a target
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar) NOTE: vehicle, your vehicle will resume motion without
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC the need for any driver action if the target vehicle
system applies the brakes. starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting Increase button and release. A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC coming to a standstill.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance predicts that its maximum braking level is not If the target vehicle does not start moving within
setting increases by one bar (longer). sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the
To decrease the distance setting, push the instrument cluster display and a chime will sound
Distance Setting Decrease button and release. brakes will release. A cancel message will display
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking on the instrument cluster display and produce a
Each time the button is pushed, the distance capacity.
setting decreases by one bar (shorter). warning chime. Driver intervention will be required
NOTE: at this moment.
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
display is a warning for the driver to take action standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the
is detected in the same lane, the instrument and does not necessarily mean that the Forward
cluster displays the ACC Set With Target Light. The driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop system
system will then adjust vehicle speed will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel
message will display on the instrument cluster with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC When the condition that deactivated the system is
display and produce a warning chime. Driver system will recover after the vehicle has left these no longer present, the system will return to the
intervention will be required at this moment. areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this function by simply reactivating it.
WARNING! warning may temporarily occur. NOTE:
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
must ensure that there are no pedestrians, If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a Control is still available. mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor
collision and death or serious personal injury. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver realigned at an authorized dealer.
should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning 4
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
Display Warnings And Maintenance or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located
in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille. The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and a chime will
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is sound when conditions temporarily limit system
VEHICLE” WARNING important to note the following maintenance performance. This most often occurs at times of
items: poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will  Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily
sound when conditions temporarily limit system sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or
performance. damage the sensor lens. ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In
 Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
these cases, the instrument cluster display will
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc- display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may
Front Windshield” and the system will have
also become temporarily blinded due to tion or failure and require a sensor realignment.
degraded performance.
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these  If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
cases, the instrument cluster display will display The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
damaged due to a collision, see an authorized
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed
dealer for service.
and the system will deactivate. while driving in adverse weather conditions. The
 Do not attach or install any accessories near the ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle has
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar sensor, including transparent material or after- left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed market grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels system failure or malfunction. path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert TURNS AND BENDS
should examine the windshield and the camera and may need to intervene. The following are
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
located on the back side of the inside rear view examples of these types of situations:
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an
TOWING A TRAILER acceleration for stability reasons, with no vehicle in
obstruction.
front detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve
When the condition that created limited Towing a trailer is not recommended when using the system will resume your original set speed.
functionality is no longer present, the system will ACC. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
return to full functionality.
OFFSET DRIVING NOTE:
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that
Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle USING ACC ON HILLS
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, merging in from a side lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset ACC performance may be limited when driving on
mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and hills. ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane
forward facing camera inspected at an authorized vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel,
which can cause your vehicle to brake or depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
dealer. conditions, and the steepness of the hill.
accelerate unexpectedly.
“SERVICE ACC/FCW” WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required”
or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”,
there may be an internal system fault or a
temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem
persists, see an authorized dealer. ACC Hill Example
Offset Driving Condition Example
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
LANE CHANGING NARROW VEHICLES STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES

ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer ACC does not react to stationary objects or
in the lane in which you are traveling. In the edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in
following lane changing example, ACC has not yet detected until they have moved fully into the lane. situations where the vehicle you are following exits
detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your
detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC ahead. lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
system to take action. ACC may not detect a stationary object as it did not previously detect
vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may movement from it. Always be attentive and ready
not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing to apply the brakes if necessary.
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the
brakes if necessary. 4
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
Lane Changing Example

PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — PARKSENSE SENSORS PARKSENSE DISPLAY

IF EQUIPPED The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument
cluster display will show the park assist ready
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The system status.
visual and audible indications of the distance sensors can detect obstacles from approximately The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
between the rear fascia/bumper and a detected 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from showing a single arc in one or more regions based
obstacle when backing up (e.g. during a parking the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to
maneuver). For limitations of this system and depending on the location, type and orientation of the vehicle.
recommendations, see Ú page 183. the obstacle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region,
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY the display will show a single solid arc in the center
rear region and will produce a one-half second
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. The ParkSense Warning screen is located within tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
ParkSense can be active only when the gear the instrument cluster display Ú page 120. It the display will show a single arc moving closer to
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at provides visual warnings to indicate the distance the vehicle and emit a fast sound tone that will
this gear selector position, the system will remain between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected change from fast to continuous.
active until the vehicle speed is increased to obstacle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in
rear region, the display will show a single flashing
REVERSE and above the system's operating speed,
arc in the left and/or right rear region and will
a warning will appear within the instrument cluster
produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves
display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
system will become active again if the vehicle
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone
speed is decreased to speeds less than
will change from fast to continuous.
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
Rear ParkSense Arcs

1 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert
operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Greater than Less than
Rear Distance 79-59 inches 59-47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches
79 inches 12 inches
(inches/cm) (200-150 cm) (150-120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm)
(200 cm) (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Single 1/2
Audible Alert Slow (for rear Slow (for rear Fast (for rear
None Second Tone (for Fast Continuous
Chime center only) center only) center only)
rear center only)
Radio Volume
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reduced
NOTE: gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if is disabled, the instrument cluster display will
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long ASSIST SYSTEM
as the vehicle is in REVERSE (Not in 4WD Low). During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear
ENABLING A ND DISABLING P ARKSENSE Park Assist System has detected a faulted
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The condition, the instrument cluster display will
with the ParkSense switch located below ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and
the Uconnect display. is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
blink momentarily, and then the LED will remain UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message.
the system, the instrument cluster display
Ú page 120 will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” on.
message for approximately five seconds. When the
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and PARKSENSE SYSTEM U SAGE (30 cm) of the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do
the system has detected a faulted condition, the so can result in the system misinterpreting a
instrument cluster display will show the PRECAUTIONS close object as a sensor problem, causing the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" NOTE: “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
 Ensure that the rear fascia/bumper is free of
REQUIRED" message for as long as the vehicle is in instrument cluster display.
snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the Park-
REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not
Sense system operating properly.
operate. WARNING!
 Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR  Drivers must be careful when backing up even
tions could affect the performance of Park-
SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
Sense.
display, make sure the outer surface and the behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be 4
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and  When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
and then cycle the ignition. If the message Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it backing up. You are responsible for safety and
continues to appear, see an authorized dealer. remains off until you turn it on again, even if you must continue to pay attention to your
cycle the ignition. surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster  ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of serious injury or death.
display, see an authorized dealer. the radio when it is sounding a tone.
 Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
 Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM care not to scratch or damage them. The assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, when the vehicle is not used for towing.
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
hard cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors result in the system not working properly. The to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pressure ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle will be much closer to the obstacle than the
washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm) from the behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. false indication that an obstacle is behind the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
fascia/bumper. detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
 Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense depending on its size and shape, giving a false
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, indication that an obstacle is behind the
trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches vehicle.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera touchscreen button X, the transmission is
CAUTION! shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the
1. Press the Controls button located on the
 ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is bottom of the Uconnect display. OFF position.
unable to recognize every obstacle, including  The touchscreen button X to disable display of
2. Press the Back Up Camera button to turn the
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be the camera image is made available ONLY when
Rear View Camera system on.
temporarily detected or not detected at all. the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
Camera delay turned off, the rear Camera mode is When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
will not be detected when they are in close
exited and the previous screen appears again. the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and
proximity.
its projected backup path based on the steering
 The vehicle must be driven slowly when using When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with wheel position. A dashed center line overlay
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time Camera delay turned on, the rear Camera image indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom- will be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
mended that the driver looks over his/her vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into PARK, the ignition is When enabled, fixed guidelines are overlaid on the
shoulder when using ParkSense. image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
placed in the OFF position, or the touchscreen
button X to disable display of the Rear View Different colored zones indicate the distance to
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA Camera image is pressed. the rear of the vehicle.
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to Whenever the Rear View Camera image is The following table shows the approximate
see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of activated through the Back Up Camera button in distances for each zone:
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into the Controls menu, and the vehicle speed is
greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a Distance To The Rear Of
REVERSE. The image will be displayed in the Zone
display timer for the image is initiated. The image The Vehicle
touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the will continue to be displayed until the display timer 0 - 1 ft
Red
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. exceeds 10 seconds. (0 - 30 cm)
The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the NOTE: 1 ft - 6.5 ft
Yellow
vehicle in the center of the spare tire.  If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (30 cm - 2 m)
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be 6.5 ft or greater
displayed continuously until deactivated via the Green
(2 m or greater)
WARNING! TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED Manual Activation Of The TrailCam

TrailCam view can be activated via the below
Drivers must be careful when backing up even Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam that methods:
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. allows you to you see an on-screen image of the
front view of your vehicle. The image will be  Press the FWD Camera button on the controls
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a screen.
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across  Press the Forward Facing Camera button on the
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of the top of the screen. apps menu.
your surroundings and must continue to pay  Press the TrailCam button on the Off Road
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can Pages.
result in serious injury or death.
 Press the Off Road+ button when “Auto Launch 4
Off Road+” (if equipped) has been selected
under camera settings.
CAUTION!
The TrailCam view can also be activated by
 To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should pressing the icon on the Back Up Camera view.
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView The Back Up Camera view can also be activated by
camera is unable to view every obstacle or pressing the icon on the TrailCam view.
object in your drive path.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
 To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be Front View Camera Camera Delay turned off and TrailCam view is
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able active, the TrailCam mode is exited and the
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
NOTE:
previous screen appears again.
The system will stay active while in 4WD Low.
recommended that the driver look frequently When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView. The TrailCam system has programmable settings
that may be selected through the Uconnect system Camera Delay turned on and the TrailCam view is
Ú page 207. active, the TrailCam image will be displayed for up
NOTE: to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with PARK, the ignition is placed in the OFF position, or
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the the touchscreen button X to disable display of the
lens. TrailCam view is pressed.
Whenever the TrailCam image is activated through When enabled, active dynamic Tire Lines are
the Manual Activation Methods, and the vehicle projected on the ground plane of the TrailCam view
speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h), based on the steering wheel position.
a display timer for the image is initiated. The image
will continue to be displayed until the display timer REFUELING THE VEHICLE —
exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
GASOLINE ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
 If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph FUEL F ILLER CAP
(13 km/h) while in 2WD or 4WD High, the
TrailCam image will be displayed continuously The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's side of
until deactivated via the touchscreen button X, the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost or damaged, Fuel Filler Cap
the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for
this vehicle. 3. Fully insert the fuel nozzle into the filler pipe.
ignition is placed in the OFF position.
1. Open the fuel filler door. 4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.
 The touchscreen button X to disable the display
of the camera image is made available ONLY NOTE:
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.  When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,
 The TrailCam view will stay active regardless of
the fuel tank is full.
the vehicle speed and time while in 4WD Low.  Wait five seconds before removing the fuel
Cleaning The TrailCam nozzle to allow excess fuel to drain from the
nozzle.
Press and hold the Clean Camera soft button
located on the TrailCam view to wash the TrailCam. 5. Remove the fuel nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and
Washer fluid will stop when the button is released. close fuel filler door.
 The camera can be washed up to 20 seconds at

a time while holding the button. WARNING!
Fuel Filler Door
 The Clean Camera system is not available when  Never have any smoking materials lit in or
windshield washing is in process. 2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counter- near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
clockwise. the tank is being filled.
(Continued)
 If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the

WARNING! MIL will come on. Be sure the cap is tightened
 Never add fuel when the engine is running. every time the vehicle is refueled.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
LOOSE FUEL F ILLER CAP MESSAGE
tion Indicator Light to turn on. After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel filler cap is
 A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. If
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
the system detects a malfunction, the “gASCAP”
You could be burned. Always place fuel
message will display in the odometer display.
containers on the ground while filling.
Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking" sound is Fuel Filler Door 4
heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Push the odometer reset 2. Remove the fuel cap by rotating it counter-
CAUTION! clockwise.
button to turn the message off. If the problem
 Damage to the fuel system or emission control persists, the message will appear the next time the
system could result from using an improper vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
fuel filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the
impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem
fitting aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunc- will turn the MIL off.
tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate, due to
fuel vapors escaping from the system. REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE
 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
(IF EQUIPPED)
The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's side of
the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost or damaged,
NOTE: Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for
 When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the this vehicle. 1 — Diesel Fuel Filler
fuel tank is full.
1. Open the fuel filler door. 2 — DEF Filler
 Tighten the fuel filler cap about a quarter turn
until you hear one click. This is an indication that
the cap is properly tightened.
3. Fully insert the fuel nozzle into the filler pipe. AVOID USING CONTAMINATED FUEL DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel.
Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic
NOTE: cause severe damage to the engine fuel system. Reduction (SCR) system to meet the very stringent
 When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, Proper maintenance of the engine fuel filter and diesel emissions standards required by the
the fuel tank is full. fuel tank is essential see Ú page 362. Environmental Protection Agency.
 Wait five seconds before removing the fuel BULK FUEL S TORAGE — D IESEL FUEL The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels
nozzle to allow excess fuel to drain from the of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted from engines)
nozzle. If you store quantities of fuel, good maintenance of that are harmful to our health and the environment
the stored fuel is also essential. Fuel contaminated to a near-zero level. A small quantity of Diesel
5. Remove the fuel nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and
with water will promote the growth of “microbes.” Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is injected into the exhaust
close fuel filler door.
These microbes form “slime” that will clog the fuel upstream of a catalyst where, when vaporized, it
NOTE: filtration system and lines. Drain condensation converts smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into
Tighten the fuel filler cap about a quarter turn until from the supply tank and change the line filter on harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two
you hear one click. This is an indication that the a regular basis. natural components of the air we breathe. You can
cap is properly tightened. operate with the comfort that your vehicle is
NOTE:
When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of fuel, contributing to a cleaner, healthier world
CAUTION! air is pulled into the fuel system. environment for this and generations to come.
For diesel engines, only use diesel fuel for motor If the vehicle will not start see Ú page 364. System Overview
vehicles in accordance with ASTM D-975 Grade This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust Fluid
S15 specifications. The use of other products or WARNING! (DEF) injection system and a Selective Catalytic
mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair Do not open the high pressure fuel system with Reduction (SCR) catalyst to meet the emission
and consequently void the warranty, due to the the engine running. Engine operation causes requirements.
damage caused. If you accidentally introduce high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel spray can The DEF injection system consists of the following
other types of fuel into the tank, do not start the cause serious injury or death. components:
engine. Empty the tank. If the engine has been
run for even an extremely limited amount of  DEF tank
time, you must not only drain the fuel tank, but  DEF pump
the rest of the supply circuit as well.  DEF injector
 Electronically-heated DEF Lines DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest DEF FILL PROCEDURE
 NOx sensors temperatures. For example, DEF may freeze at
NOTE:
temperatures at or below 12°F (-11°C). The
 Temperature sensors For the correct DEF fluid type see Ú page 424.
system has been designed to operate in this
 SCR catalyst environment. 1. Remove cap from DEF fill inlet (located in fuel
door).
The DEF injection system and SCR catalyst enable NOTE:
the achievement of diesel emission requirements; When working with DEF, it is important to know
while maintaining outstanding fuel economy, that:
drivability, torque and power ratings.  Any containers or parts that come into contact
For system messages and warnings see with DEF must be DEF compatible (plastic or
Ú page 120. stainless steel). Copper, brass, aluminum, iron 4
NOTE: or non-stainless steel should be avoided as they
are subject to corrosion by DEF.
 Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection
system. You may occasionally hear an audible  If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up
clicking noise from under the vehicle at a stop. completely.
This is normal operation. Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location
 The DEF pump will run for a period of time after The DEF gauge (located on the instrument cluster
engine shutdown to purge the DEF system. This display) will display the level of DEF remaining in 1 — Diesel Fuel Filler
is normal operation and may be audible from the tank Ú page 120. 2 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid Filler
the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load, 2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF fill inlet.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very etc.) will affect the amount of DEF that is used in NOTE:
stable product with a long shelf life. If DEF is kept your vehicle.
 The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds
in temperatures between 10° and 90°F (-12° and to update after adding a gallon or more of
32°C), it will last a minimum of one year. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to the DEF tank.
If you have a fault related to the DEF
system, the gauge may not update to the Refilling With Containers
new level. See an authorized dealer for CAUTION!
Proceed as follows:
service.  When DEF is spilled, clean the area immedi-
 Check the expiration date.
 The DEF gauge may also not immediately ately with water and use an absorbent mate-
update after a refill if the temperature of the  Read the advice for use on the label before rial to soak up the spills on the ground.
DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF pouring the content of the bottle into the
DEF tank.  Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is
tank heater will possibly warm up the DEF accidentally added to the diesel fuel tank as it
fluid and allow the gauge to update after a  If systems which cannot be screwed in (e.g. can result in severe damage to your engine,
period of run time. Under very cold condi- tanks) are used for refilling, after the indica- including but not limited to failure of the fuel
tions, it is possible that the gauge may not tion appears on the instrument panel pump and injectors.
reflect the new fill level for several drives. display Ú page 116 fill the DEF tank with no
more than 2 gallons (8 liters).  Never add anything other than DEF to the tank
 Excessive overfilling of the DEF tank can
– especially any form of hydrocarbon such as
result in a MIL lamp/fault code and inaccu-  If containers which can be screwed to the
diesel fuel, fuel system additives, gasoline, or
rate level readings. filler are used, the reservoir is full when the
any other petroleum-based product. Even a very
Refilling With Nozzles DEF level in the container stops pouring out.
small amount of these, less than 100 parts per
Do not proceed further.
You can fill up at any DEF distributor. million or less than 1 oz. per 78 gallons
CAUTION! (295 liters) will contaminate the entire DEF
Proceed as follows:
system and will require replacement. If owners
 Insert the DEF nozzle in the filler, start  To avoid DEF spillage, and possible damage to use a container, funnel or nozzle when refilling
refilling and stop refilling at the first shut-off the DEF tank from overfilling, do not “top off” the tank, it should either be new or one that has
(the shut-off indicates that the DEF tank is the DEF tank after filling. only been used for adding DEF. Mopar®
full). Do not proceed with the refilling, to  DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below 12ºF
provides an attachable nozzle with its DEF for
prevent spillage of DEF. (-11ºC). The DEF system is designed to work in this purpose.
 Extract the nozzle. temperatures below the DEF freezing point,
however, if the tank is overfilled and freezes,
the system could be damaged.
(Continued)
3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediately when any Payload Curb Weight
of the following happen: DEF stops flowing
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
from the fill bottle into the DEF fill inlet, DEF
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
splashes out the fill inlet, or a DEF pump
of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo. vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no
nozzle automatically shuts off.
occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
4. Reinstall cap onto DEF fill inlet.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
front and rear curb weight values are determined
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
VEHICLE LOADING front and rear axles. The load must be distributed
in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is
before any occupants or cargo are added.
not exceeded. Loading

CERTIFICATION LABEL
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components The actual total weight and the weight of the front 4
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a (axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or determined by weighing it when it is loaded and
certification label affixed to the driver's side door or suspension components sometimes specified by ready for operation.
pillar. purchasers for increased durability does not The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
This label contains the month and year of necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR. commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Tire Size
the vehicle should then be determined separately
and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label to be sure that the load is properly distributed over
A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may
this label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour of Replacement tires must be equal to the load show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles
manufacture. The bar code that appears on the capacity of this tire size. has been exceeded but the total load is within the
bottom of the label is your VIN. Rim Size specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
specified weight limitations are met. Store the
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your size listed.
heavier items down low and be sure that the
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, Inflation Pressure weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items
options and cargo. The label also specifies securely before driving.
maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
(GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles WARNING!
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
and the way the brakes operate. It is important that you do not exceed the
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be limited maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
CAUTION! driving condition can result if either rating is
so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 191.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the exceeded.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
Tongue Weight (TW)
change the way your vehicle handles. This could of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch
cause you to lose control. Overloading can
trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
shorten the life of your vehicle.
condition. the load on your vehicle.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put Frontal Area
TRAILER TOWING your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
In this section you will find safety tips and entire weight of the trailer must be supported by by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
information on limits to the type of towing you can the scale.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) – If Equipped
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your The TSC is a telescoping link that can be installed
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue.
load as efficiently and safely as possible.
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. It typically provides adjustable friction associated
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty with the telescoping motion to dampen any
coverage, follow the requirements and Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
recommendations in this manual concerning The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
vehicles used for trailer towing. and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front Weight-Carrying Hitch
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
COMMON T OWING D EFINITIONS exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 191. weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
The following trailer towing related definitions will ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
assist you in understanding the following These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow
information: small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch and may be required depending on vehicle and TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
A Weight-Distributing Hitch works by applying The following chart provides the industry standard
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch
typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer class can tow and should be used to assist you in
WARNING!
tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended
the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with  An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing towing condition.
the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a Hitch system may reduce handling, stability,
more level ride, offering more consistent steering braking performance, and could result in a
and brake control thereby enhancing towing collision.
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
 Weight-Distributing Hitch Systems may not be
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
4
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
a Weight-Distributing (load equalizing) Hitch are
additional information.
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (M AXIMUM T RAILER W EIGHT RATINGS)

Maximum Trailer TW
Engine/Transmission Model GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW
(See Note)
Two–Door 8,016 lb (3,636 kg) 20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lb (907 kg) 200 lb (91 kg)
2.0L
Four–Door 8,117 lb (3,682 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lb (1,587 kg) 350 lb (158 kg)
Two–Door 8,016 lb (3,636 kg) 20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lb (907 kg) 200 lb (91 kg)
3.6L
Four–Door 8,117 lb (3,682 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lb (1,587 kg) 350 lb (158 kg)
3.0L Diesel Four–Door 8,427 lb (3,822 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lb (1,587 kg) 350 lb (158 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: TRAILER AND TONGUE W EIGHT Consider the following items when computing the
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
part of the combined weight of occupants and Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
 The tongue weight of the trailer.
cargo (i.e., the GVWR), and the GVWR should never stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
 The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and
Loading Information placard Ú page 391. ment put in or on your vehicle.
 The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And Loading Infor-
mation” placard for the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Weight Distribution
TOWING REQUIREMENTS WARNING! CAUTION!

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle  Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on  Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
drivetrain components, the following guidelines a grade. When parking, apply the parking a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
are recommended: brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
transmission in PARK. Always block or "chock" throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
WARNING! the trailer wheels. of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow  GCWR must not be exceeded.
these guidelines to make your trailer towing as Towing Requirements — Tires
safe as possible:  Total weight must be distributed between the
 Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
 Make certain that the load is secured in the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
4
following four ratings are not exceeded:
trailer and that it will not shift during travel. vehicle.
When trailering cargo that is not fully secured,  GVWR
 Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be  GTW pressures before trailer usage.
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.  GAWR  Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
 When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not  Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading utilized.  Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
can cause a loss of control, poor performance, capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis- and GAWR limits.
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure, CAUTION!  For further information Ú page 391.
or tires.  Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
 Safety chains must always be used between 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the The engine, axle or other parts could be
chains to the frame or hook retainers of the damaged.
vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the (Continued)
trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes NOTE:

CAUTION!
 Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system  Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg) vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking loaded, it should have its own brakes and they device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
and possible personal injury. should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do into water.
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
 An electronically actuated trailer brake  Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
controller is required when towing a trailer with area.
distances.
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
not required. Wiring
 Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg). required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
WARNING!
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
 Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's trailer harness and connector.
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your NOTE: Four-Pin Connector
brake system and cause it to fail. You might Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
not have brakes when you need them and 1 — Ground
harness.
could have an accident. 2 — Park
The electrical connections are all complete to the
 Towing any trailer will increase your stopping 3 — Left Stop/Turn
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
distance. When towing, you should allow for connector. Refer to the following illustrations. 4 — Right Stop/Turn
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
TOWING TIPS AutoStick — If Equipped

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,  When using the AutoStick shift control, select
stopping and backing the trailer in an area away the highest gear that allows for adequate perfor-
from heavy traffic. mance and avoids frequent downshifts. For
example, choose “5” if the desired speed can be
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer maintained. Choose “4” or “3” if needed to
towing, all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid maintain the desired speed.
excessive clutch slippage.
 To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped continuous driving at high RPM. Return to a
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and
Seven-Pin Connector
transmission controls include a drive strategy to road conditions allow. 4
1 — Backup Lamps avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if Cruise Control — If Equipped
2 — Running Lamps frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
can use the AutoStick shift control to manually  Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
3 — Left Stop/Turn
select a lower gear.  When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
4 — Ground speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
5 — Battery NOTE:
disengage until you can get back to cruising
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
6 — Right Stop/Turn speed.
under heavy loading conditions, will improve
7 — Electric Brakes performance and extend transmission life by  Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. This loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
action will also provide better engine braking.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND A NOTHER V EHICLE
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
 Automatic transmission in PARK.
 Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL
Flat Tow NONE
[N]).
 Transfer case in (N) Neutral.
 Tow in forward direction.
Front NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — CAUTION! CAUTION!

F OUR-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS  DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing  Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
NOTE: with only one set of wheels on the ground vehicle backwards can cause severe damage
The transfer case must be shifted into (N) Neutral, (front or rear) will cause severe transmission to the transfer case.
automatic transmission must be in PARK, and and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all
 Automatic transmissions must be placed in
manual transmission must be in gear (NOT in four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the
PARK for recreational towing.
NEUTRAL) for recreational towing. ground (using a vehicle trailer).
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION! WARNING! CAUTION!

 Manual transmissions must be placed in gear You or others could be injured or killed if you It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain
(not in NEUTRAL) for recreational towing. leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer that the transfer case is fully in (N) Neutral
case in the (N) Neutral position without first fully before recreational towing to prevent damage to
 Before recreational towing, perform the proce-
engaging the parking brake. The transfer case internal parts.
dure outlined under “Shifting Into (N) Neutral”
(N) Neutral position disengages both the front
to be certain that the transfer case is fully in
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain, and
(N) Neutral. Otherwise, internal damage will 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level
will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic
result. ground.
transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
 Towing this vehicle in violation of the above is in gear). The parking brake should always be 4
requirements can cause severe transmission applied when the driver is not in the vehicle. 3. Shift the automatic transmission into
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from NEUTRAL or press the clutch pedal on a
improper towing is not covered under the New manual transmission.
Vehicle Limited Warranty. WARNING! 4. Turn the engine off.
 Do not use a fascia/bumper-mounted You or others could be injured or killed if you 5. Shift the transfer case lever into (N) Neutral.
clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
6. Start the engine.
face bar will be damaged. case in the (N) Neutral position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The transfer case 7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
Shifting Into (N) Neutral (N) Neutral position disengages both the front 8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain, and manual transmissions) for five seconds and
Use the following procedure to prepare your will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
vehicle for recreational towing: transmission is in PARK. The parking brake 9. Repeat steps seven and eight with automatic
should always be applied when the driver is not transmission in DRIVE or manual transmission
in the vehicle. in FIRST gear.
10. Turn the engine off.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake. 7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired problems. They are not designed for cornering at
12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place position. the same speeds as conventional passenger cars
manual transmission in gear (NOT in NOTE: any more than low-slung sports cars are designed
NEUTRAL). When shifting the transfer case out of (N) Neutral, to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions.
the engine should remain off to avoid gear clash. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with
CAUTION! other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or
Damage to the transmission may occur if the place manual transmission in NEUTRAL. vehicle rollover.
transmission is shifted into PARK with the 9. Release the brake pedal.
transfer case in (N) Neutral and the engine
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
OFF-R OAD DRIVING TIPS
running. With the transfer case in (N) Neutral
ensure that the engine is OFF before shifting the 11. Start the engine. Side Step Removal — If Equipped
transmission into PARK. 12. Press and hold the brake pedal. NOTE:
13. Release the parking brake. Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a removed to prevent damage if so equipped.
14. Shift the transmission into gear, release the
suitable tow bar. 1. Remove both nuts and bolt from the
brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual
underside of the vehicle for each bracket.
14. Release the parking brake. transmissions), and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
Shifting Out of (N) Neutral
Use the following procedure to prepare your DRIVING TIPS
vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving ON-R OAD D RIVING T IPS
it connected to the tow vehicle. Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road
3. Start the engine.
applications. Specific design characteristics give
4. Press and hold the brake pedal. them a higher center of gravity than conventional
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. passenger cars. Underside Nuts
6. Turn the engine off. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a 2. Remove the side step assembly.
better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate
Bumper End Cap Removal or signal lights. Therefore, you will need to use your
own good judgment on what is safe and what is
The end caps on your vehicle’s front fascia/
not. When on a trail, you should always be looking
bumper can be removed by following the steps
ahead for surface obstacles and changes in
below:
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route
NOTE: while remembering what you are currently driving
Bumper end caps are removable on steel fascia/ over.
bumpers only.
NOTE:
1. Loosen the two bolts that retain the GAWR It is recommended that the Stop/Start system be
bracket (Bolts #1 and #2) to the end cap disabled during off-road use.
using a T45 torx bit screw driver. Do not Bolt #2 4
remove the bolts. WARNING!
2. Remove the remaining eight bolts.
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
3. Gently remove the end cap from the vehicle
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles
and store it where it will not get damaged.
in an off-road situation.
4. Repeat this procedure on the other side.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving CAUTION!

You will encounter many types of terrain driving Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
off-road. You should be familiar with the terrain combustible materials. The heat from your
and area before proceeding. There are many types vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire.
of surface conditions: hard-packed dirt, gravel,
Bolt #1 rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and ice. Every
surface has a different effect on your vehicle's When To Use 4L Range
steering, handling and traction. Controlling your When off-road driving, shift into 4L for additional
vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering ascending or descending steep hills, and to
wheel and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid increase low speed pulling power. This range
sudden accelerations, turns or braking. In most should be limited to extreme situations such as
cases, there are no road signs, posted speed limits deep snow, mud, steep inclines, or sand where
additional low speed pulling power is needed. than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth, while still avoiding abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the
Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get vehicle's momentum. If you are going to be driving
should be avoided when in 4L. fresh traction and help maintain your momentum. on large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce your
tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to
CAUTION! CAUTION! allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced tire
pressure will drastically improve your traction and
Do not use 4L when operating the vehicle on dry On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
handling while driving on the soft sand, but you
pavement. Driveline hardware damage can engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because engine
must return the tires to normal air pressure before
result. braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
driving on pavement or other hard surfaces. Be
sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle MUD reducing the pressure.
Operation Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around
the tires and is very difficult to get through. You CAUTION!
Many off-road driving conditions require the
simultaneous use of the brake and throttle should use DRIVE, with the transfer case in the 4L Reduced tire pressures may cause tire
(two-footed driving). When climbing rocks, logs, or position to maintain your momentum. If you start to unseating and total loss of air pressure. To
other stepped objects, using light brake pressure slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at a
with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth for reduced tire pressure, reduce your speed and
or lurching. This technique is also used when you additional traction. Mud holes pose an increased avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck. They
incline. are normally full of debris from previous vehicles
getting stuck. As a good practice before entering Crossing Obstacles
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand any mud hole, get out and determine how deep it (Rocks And Other High Points)
is, if there are any hidden obstacles and if the While driving off-road, you will encounter many
SNOW
vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck. types of terrain. These varying types of terrain bring
In heavy snow or for additional control and traction different types of obstacles. Before proceeding,
at slower speeds, shift the transmission into a low SAND review the path ahead to determine the correct
gear and the transfer case into 4L if necessary. Do Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full approach and your ability to safely recover the
not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain tire pressure. When crossing soft, sandy spots in a vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a firm
headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the trail, maintain your vehicle's momentum and do grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a
wheels and traction will be lost. If you start to slow not stop. The key to driving in soft sand is using the complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward
to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more appropriate tire pressure, accelerating slowly,
until it makes contact with the object. Apply the CROSSING LOGS
throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure CAUTION!
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle
and ease the vehicle up and over the object.  Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large (approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one
enough to strike your axles or undercarriage. front tire to be on top of the log while the other just
WARNING!
 Never attempt to drive over a rock which is starts to climb the log. While climbing the log,
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering large enough to contact the door sills. modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid
system loading which could cause you to lose spinning the log out from under your tires. Then
control of your vehicle. ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
CROSSING A RAVINE, GULLY, DITCH,
WASHOUT OR RUT CAUTION!
USING A SPOTTER
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater
4
There are many times where it is hard to see the large rut, the angled approach is the key to diameter than the running ground clearance or
obstacle or determine the correct path. maintaining your vehicle's mobility. Approach the vehicle will become high-centered.
Determining the correct path can be extremely these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let each
difficult when you are confronting many obstacles. tire go through the obstacle independently. You
In these cases have someone guide you over, need to use caution when crossing large obstacles GETTING HIGH-CENTERED
through, or around the obstacle. Have the person with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross any large If you get hung up or high-centered on an object,
stand a safe distance in front of you where they obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the
can see the obstacle, watch your tires and to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get vehicle is hung up on, where it is contacting the
undercarriage, and guide you through. caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left underbody and what is the best direction to
at a 45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are in
CROSSING LARGE ROCKS
the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a few
When approaching large rocks, choose a path you just created. You should now be able to drive rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high
which ensures you drive over the largest of them out following the trench you just created at a point when you let the vehicle down. You can also
with your tires. This will lift your undercarriage over 45-degree angle. try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off
the obstacle. The tread of the tire is tougher and the object.
thicker than the side wall and is designed to take WARNING!
the abuse. Always look ahead and make every CAUTION!
There is an increased risk of rollover when
effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.
crossing an obstacle, at any angle, with steep Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
sides. increases the risk of underbody damage.
Hill Climbing grade could cause you to lose control. If the front sure you are in 4L and proceed with caution. Allow
end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly engine braking to control the descent and apply
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good
to bring all four tires back on the ground. As you your brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires
understanding of your abilities and your vehicle's
approach the crest of the hill, ease off the throttle to lock.
limitations. Hills can cause serious problems.
and slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start
Some are just too steep to climb and should not be
to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off WARNING!
attempted. You should always feel confident with
the accelerator and maintain headway by turning
the vehicle and your abilities. You should always Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
the steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly
climb hills straight up and down. Never attempt to vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine
back and forth. This will provide a fresh "bite" into
climb a hill on an angle. braking. Descending a grade too fast could
the surface and will usually provide enough
cause you to lose control and be seriously
BEFORE CLIMBING A STEEP HILL traction to complete the climb. If you do not make
injured or killed.
it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or back straight down the grade using engine
steepness. Determine if it is too steep. Look to see resistance along with the vehicle brakes. DRIVING ACROSS AN INCLINE
what the traction is on the hill side trail. Is the trail
straight up and down? What is on top and the other If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If
WARNING! it is necessary, know your vehicle's abilities. Driving
side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches or other
obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover the Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn across an incline places more weight on the
vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything around on a steep grade. Driving across an downhill wheels, which increases the possibilities
looks good and you feel confident, shift the incline increases the risk of a rollover, which may of a downhill slide or rollover. Make sure the
transmission into a lower gear with 4L engaged, result in severe injury. surface has good traction with firm and stable
and proceed with caution, maintaining your soils. If possible, transverse the incline at an angle
momentum as you climb the hill. heading slightly up or down.
DRIVING DOWNHILL
DRIVING UP HILL Before driving down a steep hill, you need to WARNING!
determine if it is too steep for a safe descent. What
Once you have determined your ability to proceed Driving across an incline increases the risk of a
is the surface traction? Is the grade too steep to
and have shifted into the appropriate gear, line rollover, which may result in severe injury.
maintain a slow, controlled descent? Are there
your vehicle up for the straightest possible run.
obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty
Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply
of distance at the base of the hill to regain control
more power as you start up the hill. Do not race
if the vehicle descends too fast? If you feel
forward into a steep grade; the abrupt change of
confident in your ability to proceed, then make
IF YOU STALL OR BEGIN TO LOSE HEADWAY vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you BEFORE YOU CROSS ANY TYPE OF WATER
ingested water into the engine air intake. If the
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing As you approach any type of water, you need to
engine stalls, do not attempt to restart it.
a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop determine if you can cross it safely and
Determine if it has ingested water first. The key to
and immediately apply the brake. Restart the responsibly. If necessary, get out and walk through
any crossing is low and slow. Shift into FIRST gear
engine and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the water or probe it with a stick. You need to be
(manual transmission), or DRIVE (automatic
the hill allowing engine braking to control the sure of its depth, approach angle, current and
transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L
descent and apply your brakes, if necessary, but bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy
position and proceed very slowly with a constant
do not allow the tires to lock. waters; check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you
slow speed of {3 to 5 mph (5 to 8 km/h) maximum}
will not be intruding on any wildlife, and you can
WARNING! and light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not
recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe
try to accelerate through the crossing. After 4
crossing is the water depth, current and bottom
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or crossing any water higher than the bottom of the
conditions. On soft bottoms, the vehicle will sink in,
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, axle differentials, inspect all of the vehicle fluids
effectively increasing the water level on the
never attempt to turn around. To do so may for signs of water ingestion.
vehicle. Be sure to consider this when determining
result in tipping and rolling the vehicle, which
the depth and the ability to safely cross.
may result in severe injury. Always back carefully CAUTION!
straight down a hill in REVERSE. Never back CROSSING PUDDLES, POOLS, FLOODED
 Water ingestion into the axles, transmission,
down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle
transfer case, engine or vehicle interior can AREAS OR OTHER STANDING WATER
brakes. Never drive diagonally across a hill,
always drive straight up or down. occur if you drive too fast or through too deep Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water
of water. Water can cause permanent damage areas normally contain murky or muddy waters.
to engine, driveline or other vehicle compo- These water types normally contain hidden
Driving Through Water nents, and your brakes will be less effective obstacles and make it difficult to determine an
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of once wet and/or muddy. accurate water depth, approach angle, and bottom
water. Water crossings should be avoided, if  When driving through water, do not exceed condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where
possible, and only be attempted when necessary in 5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering.
a safe, responsible manner. Only drive through before entering as a precaution, and check all This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle
areas which are designated and approved. Tread fluids afterward. Driving through water may recovery. If you are able to determine you can
lightly and avoid damage to the environment. cause damage that may not be covered by the safely cross, than proceed using the low and slow
Know your vehicle's abilities and be able to recover New Vehicle Limited Warranty. method.
it if something goes wrong. Never stop or shut a
 After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or

CAUTION! WARNING! similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan,
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system Never drive through fast moving deep water. It brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle
effectiveness by depositing debris onto the can push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as
radiator. out of control. This could put you and your possible.
passengers at risk of injury or drowning. NOTE:
CROSSING DITCHES, STREAMS, SHALLOW Inspect the clutch vent holes in the manual trans-
RIVERS OR OTHER FLOWING WATER After Driving Off-Road mission bell housing for mud and debris and clean
as required.
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never Off-road operation puts more stress on your
attempt to cross a fast running stream or river vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going WARNING!
even in shallow water. Fast moving water can off-road, it is always a good idea to check for
easily push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it damage. That way you can get any problems taken Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
out of control. Even in very shallow water, a high care of right away and have your vehicle ready cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking.
current can still wash the dirt out from around your when you need it. You might not have full braking power when you
tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy. need it to prevent a collision. If you have been
 Completely inspect the underbody of your
There is still a high risk of personal injury and operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
vehicle damage with slower water currents in suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
depths greater than the vehicle's running ground
 Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clearance. You should never attempt to cross  If you experience unusual vibration after driving
clean as required.
flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle's in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the
running ground clearance. Even the slowest  Check threaded fasteners for looseness, partic- wheels for impacted material. Impacted mate-
current can push the heaviest vehicle downstream ularly on the chassis, drivetrain components, rial can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing
and out of control if the water is deep enough to steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if the wheels of it will correct the situation.
push on the large surface area of the vehicle's required, and torque to the values specified in
body. Before you proceed, determine the speed of the Service Manual.
the current, the water's depth, approach angle,  Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
bottom condition and if there are any obstacles. These things could be a fire hazard. They might
Then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle
using the low and slow technique. pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
207
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
NOTE:
 To help further improve vehicle security and
For detailed information about your Uconnect unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display system, refer communications. Vehicle software technology vehicle owners should:
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
 Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
NOTE: working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed. (US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
Uconnect screen images are for illustration (Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
purposes only and may not reflect exact software The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to able Uconnect software updates.
for your vehicle. your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
 Only connect and use trusted media
most recent version of vehicle software (such as 5
CYBERSECURITY Uconnect software) is installed. devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may WARNING!
be equipped with both wired and wireless
 ONLY insert trusted devices/components into
UCONNECT SETTINGS
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could The Uconnect system uses a combination of
allows systems and features in your vehicle to possibly contain malicious software, and if buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
function properly. installed in your vehicle, it may increase the faceplate located on the center of the instrument
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached. panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the Customer Programmable Features.
 As always, if you experience unusual vehicle Many features can vary by vehicle.
behavior, take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer immediately.
208 MULTIMEDIA
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES For the Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display and the
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
instrument panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ Press the Apps button, then press the Settings
ENTER control knob located on the right side. Turn button on the touchscreen to display the menu
the control knob to scroll through menus and setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
change settings. Push the center of the control allows you to access programmable features.
knob one or more times to select or change a
setting. NOTE:
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF
and MUTE buttons on the faceplate. settings may vary.
 All settings should be changed with the ignition
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button in the ON/RUN position.
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on. When making a selection, only press one button at
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu a time to enter the desired menu. Once in the
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Touchscreen And Faceplate Buttons desired menu, press and release the preferred
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
setting option until a check mark appears next to
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
the setting, showing that setting has been
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate selected. Once the setting is complete, press the X
button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
button on the right side of the screen will allow you
to toggle up or down through the available settings.
MULTIMEDIA 209
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will
display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument
Language
Cluster Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
5
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:

This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
Display Mode
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
210 MULTIMEDIA

Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after
Control Screen Timeout
five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
Instrument Cluster Display.
SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts This setting will turn the weather alerts on or off.
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display in
the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:

US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel
Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi,
Custom
kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Torque” (Nm or lb-ft) units of
measurement independently.
MULTIMEDIA 211
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:

This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system.
Voice Response Length The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from the system.
The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description from the system.
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show
Show Command List
the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does. 5
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:

This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system
Sync Time With GPS
will control the time via the GPS location.
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off
Set Time Hours for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
212 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off
Set Time Minutes for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The
“-” setting will decrease the minutes.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
Set Time And Format/Time Format
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour
format.
Show Time in Status Bar/Show Time Status This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:

This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
shifting out of REVERSE.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Forward Facing Camera Guidelines on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 213
Safety & Driving Assistance

When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These
options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a
subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:

This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The
Braking Submenu “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the
vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at
5
a far distance from the vehicle.
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system on or off.
The “Off” setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking
will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning
Submenu
+ Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake
pressure when a collision is detected.
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
ParkSense
detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available
Front ParkSense Volume
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available
Rear ParkSense Volume
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
214 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected
in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The
Blind Spot Alert “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors.
The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside
mirrors and an audible chime.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
shifting out of REVERSE.
This setting will turn the Active ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines on or
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines
off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines This setting will turn the Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines on or off.
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Forward Facing Camera Guidelines on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn the Tire Fill Assist on or off.
Mirrors & Wipers

When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:

Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
MULTIMEDIA 215
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
 When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country
of the vehicle purchased.
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
Headlight Off Delay to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights 5
Headlight Illumination On Approach/Illuminated Approach to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Auto Dim High Beams/Automatic High Beam Headlamps This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
Flash Lights With Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Interior Ambient Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Interior Ambient Lights on or off.
216 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks

When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:

This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the
Auto Door Locks
vehicle reaches 12 mph (19 km/h).
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the
Auto Unlock On Exit
inside.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
Flash Lights With Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key
fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed.
Sound Horn With Lock/Horn With Lock The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed
once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed twice.
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the
Sound Horn With Remote Start/Horn With Remote Start
key fob.
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob
are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting
will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n
Passive Entry
Go™) on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 217
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems

When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems
when remote start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:

This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote
Auto-On Heated Seat & Steering Wheel
Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle
is started.
5
AUX Switches
When the AUX Switches button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the four vehicle AUX switches.
NOTE:

This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX
switches. There are two types: “Latching” and “Momentary”. The power
source for the AUX switches can either be set to run off the “Battery” or from
the “Ignition”. In addition to setting the type and power source, you can set if
AUX 1-4
the vehicle will recall the previous state at which the AUX switches were set.
The Recalled Last State setting can be set to “On” or “Off”. Last state
conditions are met only if the type is set to Latching and the power source is
set to Ignition.
218 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options

After pressing the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
Doors On Key Off Power Delay/Doors On Power Delay turned on. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
Doors Off Key Off Power Delay/Doors Off Power Delay turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on
Headlight Off Delay after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of
time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:

This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back
Balance/Fade and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio
location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
MULTIMEDIA 219

This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting,
Speed Adjusted Volume the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings
are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the
AUX Volume Offset
AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
Loudness This setting will improve sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
Phone/Bluetooth® 5
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:

This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
Display.
This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb” settings menu. The settings are
Do Not Disturb “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and
“Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
220 MULTIMEDIA

Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
This setting will activate your smartphone to be projected on the vehicle’s
Projection Manager
touchscreen.
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used
to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
 A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a
Tune Start
music channel using one of the 12 presets.
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will
Channel Skip
display of the skipped channels.
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel
Subscription Info
Link is a separate subscription.
MULTIMEDIA 221
Reset/Restore Settings
When the Reset/Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its
default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:

Reset App Drawer To Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
This setting will restore all installed apps. This feature is used if there is an
Restore Apps
issue using or installing apps.
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
Restore Settings to Default
default. 5
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal
Clear Personal Data
data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
System Information
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:

Software Licenses This setting will display the software licensing information screen.
This setting will display different ways to update maps of the radio into your
Map Update system. “Download System Information To USB” and “Generate Request
Code” will appear as the two options to select from.
222 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM O VERVIEW
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display

1 — RADIO Button 6 — COMPASS Button
2 — MEDIA Button 7 — SETTINGS Button
3 — PHONE Button 8 — MORE Button
4 — VOLUME & On/Off Button 9 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL Knob
5 — MUTE Button 10 — SCREEN OFF Button
MULTIMEDIA 223

1 — Radio Button 5 — Controls Button
2 — Media Button 6 — Phone Button
3 — Climate Button 7 — Settings Button
4 — Apps Button
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
224 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Press/Push the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media
Radio/Media Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources
Ú page 226.
Press/Push the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the
Phone
hands-free phone system Ú page 239.
Settings Press/Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted
selection on the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll
through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system
off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off
button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the VOLUME & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to
reset the radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from
freezing or being stuck.
Press/Push the COMPASS button on the faceplate to access the vehicle’s
Compass
compass.
More Press/Push the MORE button on the faceplate to access additional options.
MULTIMEDIA 225
Feature Description
Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated seats
Controls — If Equipped
and steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Mobile apps.
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate
Climate
control functions Ú page 62.
DRAG & D ROP MENU B AR 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app to Please read this manual carefully before using the
replace an existing shortcut in the main menu system. It contains instructions on how to use the
The Uconnect features and services in the main bar. system in a safe and effective manner.
menu bar are easily customized for your
NOTE: Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
preference. Simply follow these steps:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in Doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen. 5
PARK. Please read and follow these safety precautions.
SAFETY AND G ENERAL I NFORMATION Failure to do so may result in injury or property
damage.
Safety Guidelines  Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. If
prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
WARNING! park in a safe location and set the parking
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the brake.
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and  Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
assume all risks related to the use of the Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to
Uconnect features and applications in this the product. See an authorized dealer for repair.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
 Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a
1. Press the Apps button to open the App so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
level that still allows you to hear outside traffic
screen. involving serious injury or death.
and emergency vehicles.
226 MULTIMEDIA
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent Pushing the center button will make the radio
manufacturer's precautions and directions switch between the various modes available (AM/
 The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
Ú page 431. FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
tronic device. Do not let young children use the
system. The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
 Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
UCONNECT MODES push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on which
your music or sound system at loud volumes. STEERING W HEEL AUDIO CONTROLS mode you are in.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on the
system. The remote sound system controls are located on The following describes the left-hand control
the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three operation in each mode:
 Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture
and nine o’clock positions.
away from the system. Besides damage to the Radio Operation
system, moisture can cause electric shocks as Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for the
with any electronic device. next available station and pushing the bottom of
NOTE: the switch will Seek Down for the next available
Many features of this system are speed station.
dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to The button located in the center of the left-hand
use some of the touchscreen features while the control will tune to the next preset station that you
vehicle is in motion. have programmed in the radio presets.
Care And Maintenance Media Mode
 Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next
sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
which could scratch the surface. Remote Sound System Controls
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go
 Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch
the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens a push button in the center and controls the goes to the beginning of the current track, or the
cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen. volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
 If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened the top of the rocker switch will increase the seconds after the current track begins to play.
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker Double pressing the bottom button switch will skip
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu- switch will decrease the volume. to the previous track if it is after eight seconds into
the current track.
MULTIMEDIA 227
RADIO MODE The radio is equipped with the following modes:

 AM
Radio Controls
 FM
 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter
the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM,
FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the
corresponding button in Radio Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display and off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns continuously 5
1 — Radio Bands (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping.
2 — Preset Radio Stations Turning the VOLUME & On/Off control knob
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display 3 — View Next Preset Radio Stations clockwise increases the volume, and
1 — Preset Radio Stations 4 — Status Bar counterclockwise decreases it.
2 — All Preset Radio Stations 5 — Browse Button When the audio system is turned on, the sound will
3 — Seek Down 6 — Seek Down be set at the same volume level as last played.
4 — Radio Band (AM/FM) 7 — Tune Button Mute Button
5 — Tune 8 — Seek Up Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the
6 — Station Info 9 — Audio Settings system.
7 — Audio Settings 10 — Bottom Menu Bar Tune/Scroll Control
8 — Seek Up Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a selection.
228 MULTIMEDIA
Seek Direct Tune Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
pressing the double arrow buttons on the radio screen to directly tune to a desired radio push the VR button and say “Help”. The system
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio station or channel. provides you with a list of commands.
station display or by pushing the left steering wheel Press the available number button on the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode —
audio control button up or down. touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station. If Equipped
Seek Up and Seek Down Once a number has been entered, any numbers
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be
Down button to tune the radio to the next reached) will become deactivated/grayed out.
available station or channel. During a Seek Up/ Undo
Down function, if the radio reaches the starting You can backspace an entry by pressing the
station after passing through the entire band two Back button on the touchscreen.
times, the radio will stop at the station where it
GO
began.
Once the last digit of a station has been entered,
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
press “Ok”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and
Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up the system will automatically tune to that station.
or Seek Down button to advance the radio Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
through the available stations or channels at a RADIO VOICE COMMANDS
faster rate. The radio stops at the next available Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
station or channel when the button on the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like
touchscreen is released. to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM®
NOTE: Satellite Radio trial required.)
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or Push the VR button on the steering wheel and
Seek Down button will scan the different wait for the beep to say a command. See an
frequency bands at a slower rate. example:
Info — If Equipped  “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
Press the Info button to display information related  “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
to the currently playing song and radio station.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
MULTIMEDIA 229
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct This functionality is only available for radios NOTE:
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content. receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service. outside with a clear view to the sky. The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might SXM button on the touchscreen.
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s have to change the vehicle’s position in order to When in Satellite Mode:
Manual kit for more information. receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio
 The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold does not receive a signal in underground parking
garages or tunnels. lighted.
separately after the trial included with the new
 The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your No Subscription
service at the end of your trial subscription, the of the screen.
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a
plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at  The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at radio does not have the necessary subscription, the center. 5
866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM® the radio is able to receive the Preview channel  The Program Information is displayed at the
Customer Agreement for complete terms at only. bottom of the Channel Number.
www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription  The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed
(Canada).
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio below the Program Information.
All fees and programming subject to change.
subscription, US residents visit http:// Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
www.siriusxm.com/getallaccess or call: Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
US and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also 1-800-643-2112 In addition to the tuning operation functions
available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with Canadian residents visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ common to all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio or call: 1-888-539-7474. Weather button, and Favorite button functions are
service is available throughout their satellite available in SiriusXM® Mode.
service area and in AK. © 2021 SiriusXM® Radio
Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
230 MULTIMEDIA
REPLAY
Replay provides a means to store and replay up to
22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk
radio. Once the channel is switched, content in
replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The
Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will
display at the top of the screen, along with the
replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the
touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
1 — Browse 1 — Browse
2 — Radio Bands 2 — Replay
3 — Direct Tune 3 — Seek Down Button
4 — Info Button 4 — Direct Tune Button
5 — Next Button 5 — Seek Up Button
6 — Audio Settings Button
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing of

Play/Pause live or rewound content at any time. Play can be resumed by pressing the
Pause/Play button again on the touchscreen.
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in
steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for
Rewind
more than two seconds rewinds the content. The radio begins playing the
content at the point at which the press is released.
MULTIMEDIA 231
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen forwards the

content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be
done when the content is previously rewound, and therefore, cannot be
Forward
done for live content. A continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio begins playing the
content at the point at which the press is released.
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the playing of live
Live
content.
FAVORITES Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a BROWSE IN SXM
favorite artist, press the Favorites button on the
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to 5
touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist button on
activate the favorites menu, which will time out
the touchscreen.
within 20 seconds in absence of user interaction.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X
favorite song, press the Favorites button on the
button.
touchscreen and then the Favorite Song button on
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite the touchscreen.
artist or song that is currently playing. The radio
then uses this information to alert you when either
the favorite artist or song is being played at any
time by any of the SiriusXM® Channels. Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Browse Button
The maximum number of favorites that can be
1 — All Button
stored in the Radio is 50.
2 — Presets Button
3 — Favorites Button
4 — Game Zone Button
232 MULTIMEDIA
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to Preset Selection Alert Settings
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump A preset can be selected by pressing any of the Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM® listed Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu allows
Channel List. button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the you to choose from a visual alert or audible and
This Screen contains many submenus. You can currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by Radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset. any of the SiriusXM® channels.
pressing the Back arrow. Deleting A Preset Game Zone
All A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of
Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the the Browse screen. This feature provides you with
pressing the All button, the following categories corresponding preset. the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and
become available: Favorites set alerts.
 Channel List: Press the Channel List to display Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen. On-Air
all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the
Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings, On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
Down arrows, located on the right side of the airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating along with providing a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Favorites list. pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio
the TUNE/SCROLL knob. to that channel.
 Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touch-
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the Select Team Or Add/Delete — If Equipped
screen to display a list of Genres. You can select
any desired Genre by pressing the Genre List. screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the Press the Select Team or Add/Delete button on the
The radio tunes to a channel with the content in TUNE/SCROLL knob as well. touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list.
the selected Genre. Remove Favorites Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all
teams within the league will appear, then you can
Presets — If Equipped Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the select a team by pressing the corresponding box. A
Press the Presets button (if equipped) located at screen. Press the Delete All button on the check mark appears for all teams that are chosen.
the left of the Browse screen. touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press
the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up deleted.
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the
TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
MULTIMEDIA 233
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon Setting Presets The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the are activated by pressing any of the Preset
screen. Press the Delete All button on the buttons, located at the top of the screen.
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or press When you are on a station that you wish to save as
the Trash Can icon next to the selection to be a preset, press and hold the numbered button on
deleted. the touchscreen for more than two seconds.
Alert Settings The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. Radio Modes.
The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from A total of six presets will appear on the screen. You
“Alert me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert can switch between the radio presets list by
upon score update” or both when one or more of pressing the Arrow button located in the upper
your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM® right of the radio touchscreen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
channels. For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display 5
Tune Start A set of four presets will appear on the screen.
Tune Start begins playing the current song from Press the All button to view all saved presets. To
the beginning when you tune to a music channel remove a saved preset, a new preset must be
using one of the 12 presets. This feature occurs saved over the old one.
the first time the preset is selected during that
current song.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Presets

234 MULTIMEDIA
PRESET FEATURES — IF EQUIPPED Deleting Presets

Browse In AM/FM A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen
corresponding preset.
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is
entered by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button. Return To Main Radio Screen
Scrolling Preset List You can return to the Main Radio Screen by
pressing the X button or the Back Arrow button
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can scroll
when in the Browse Presets screen.
the preset list by rotation of the TUNE/SCROLL
knob or by pressing the Up or Down Arrow key, Audio Settings
located on the right of the screen. Press the Audio button within the settings main Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Preset Selection From List menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the The audio settings can also be accessed on the
listed Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE Radio Mode screen by pressing the Audio button.
button or the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the
currently highlighted Preset. X button.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
stored in the Presets.

MULTIMEDIA 235
Audio Setting Description

Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between
the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
Balance/Fade
Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right button or press and drag the red Speaker
icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Press the + or – button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease
Equalizer each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or
minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and
“3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation
Speed Adjusted Volume
to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise. 5
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction
Surround Sound — If Equipped
as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This alters the
AUX Volume Offset AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus
three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is
Auto Play — If Equipped connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press
“Off” to turn the setting off.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
driver or passenger door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay selected time
has expired.
236 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA M ODE When available, you can select the Browse button
on the touchscreen to be given these options:
Operating Media Mode  Now Playing
 Artists
 Albums
 Genres
 Songs
 Playlists
 Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the Info
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode button on the touchscreen for artist information on
1 — Repeat the current song playing.
2 — Select Source For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode 3 — Track Time Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button
located on the faceplate.
1 — Seek Down 4 — Shuffle
5 — Info Types of Media Modes
2 — Browse
3 — Source 6 — Browse
USB MODE
4 — Pause/Play 7 — Tracks
Overview
5 — Info
USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into
6 — More Options Audio Source Selection
the USB port, by selecting the USB button on the
7 — Seek Up Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source left side of the touchscreen, or by selecting the
Select button on the touchscreen and the desired Source Select/Select Source button and then
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA mode button on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped) or by pushing the
button located on the faceplate. Bluetooth® are the Media sources available. MEDIA button on the faceplate and then selecting
the USB button.
MULTIMEDIA 237
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you insert Controlling The Auxiliary Device
a USB device with the ignition in ON/RUN, the unit The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting
will switch to USB Mode and begin to play. The playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be
display will show the track number and index time provided by the radio; use the device controls
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start instead. Adjust the volume with the Volume button,
of track 1. Volume/Mute rotary knob, or the On/Off rotary
knob, or with the volume of the attached device.
BLUETOOTH® MODE
NOTE:
Overview
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the
is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device, Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Select Source volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too
containing music, to the Uconnect system. low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the
AUX MODE
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be radio unit to play the music on the device. 5
paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate Overview
Seek Up /Seek Down
with the Uconnect system. Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once in the AUX port, or by pressing the AUX button on the
device. Press and release the Seek Down button
Media Mode, press the Source button on the left side of the touchscreen, or under the Source
on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of
touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button Select button (if equipped) or by pushing the
the current selection, or to return to the beginning
Ú page 239. MEDIA button on the faceplate, selecting the
of the previous selection if the USB device is within
Source button and then the AUX button.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth® the first three seconds of the current selection.
button on the left side of the touchscreen or under To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek
the Source Select/Select Source button (if Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you
Up button on the touchscreen for the next
equipped). insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the
selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode and
release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen
begin to play.
to return to the beginning of the current selection,
or return to the beginning of the previous selection
if the Bluetooth® device is within the first second
of the current selection.
238 MULTIMEDIA
Browse Repeat The song currently playing is indicated by an arrow

In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the and lines above and below the song title. When in
touchscreen to display the browse window. In USB touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. The the Tracks List screen you can rotate the TUNE/
Mode, the left side of the browse window displays Repeat button on the touchscreen is highlighted SCROLL knob to highlight a track (indicated by the
a list of ways you can browse through the contents when active. The Radio will continue to play the line above and below the track name) and then
of the USB device. If supported by the device, you current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat is push the ENTER/BROWSE knob to start playing
can browse by Folder, Artist, Playlist, Album, Song, active. Press the Repeat button again to enter that track.
etc. Press the desired button on the touchscreen Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
on the left side of the screen. The center of the current tracks, repeatedly, as long as the repeat supports this feature, press the Tracks button on
browse window shows items and their function is active. To cancel Repeat, press the the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song
sub-functions, which can be scrolled through by Repeat button a third time. List. The currently playing song is indicated by a red
pressing the Up and Down buttons to the right. The Shuffle arrow and lines above and below the song title.
TUNE/SCROLL knob can also be used to scroll. Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate the touchscreen to play the selections on the USB while the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
BROWSE button on the faceplate or press the device in random order to provide an interesting
Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
through and select a desired track on the device. touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off. Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®,
Press the Exit button on the touchscreen if you and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only
wish to cancel the Browse function. Audio
available for connected USB and AUX devices.
Media Mode Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
Push the VR button located on the steering
Audio button Ú page 227.
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
touchscreen to select the desired audio source: Info commands and follow the prompts to switch your
USB. In USB Mode, press the Info button on the media source or choose an artist:
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on touchscreen to display the current track  “Change source to Bluetooth®”
the touchscreen to select the desired audio information. Press the Info or X button on the
 “Change source to AUX”
source: Bluetooth®. touchscreen a second time to cancel this feature.
 “Change source to USB”
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the Tracks
 “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest
touchscreen to select the desired audio source: In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the
Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre
AUX. touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List.
Classical”
MULTIMEDIA 239
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the Screen Activated Features Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB  Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen. between the system and your mobile phone as you
device. Your Voice Command must match exactly enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute
how the artist, album, song, and genre information  Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks the system's microphone for private conversation.
is displayed. displayed on the touchscreen.
 Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they WARNING!
PHONE MODE are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
Overview  Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, logs. assume all risks related to the use of the
in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to  Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS Uconnect features and applications in this
dial a phone number with your mobile phone. Messages. vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
The feature supports the following:  Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy
involving serious injury or death.
Voice Activated Features access to connect to them quickly. 5
 Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith NOTE:
The Phone feature is driven through your
Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”). Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
 Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
properly.
incoming SMS messages. global standard that enables different electronic
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through devices to connect to each other without wires or a
 Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward your vehicle’s audio system; the system will
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to docking station. Ensure you phone is turned on
automatically mute your radio when using the with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to the
incoming calls/text messages. Uconnect Phone. Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or audio
 Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”). For Uconnect customer support: devices are allowed to be linked to the system.
 Calling Back the last incoming call number  US visit UconnectPhone.com or call Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and one
(“Call Back”). 877-855-8400 audio device can be used with the system at a
 Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming time.
 Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed 800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”). 800-387-9983
 Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for
John Smith Mobile”).
240 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Button You will be prompted for a specific command and Natural speech allows the user to speak
The Phone button on your steering wheel then guided through the available options. commands in phrases or complete sentences. The
is used to get into the Phone Mode and  Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait system filters out certain non-word utterances and
make calls, show recent, incoming or for the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The system handles
outgoing calls, view phonebook, etc. or another prompt. fill-in words such as “I would like to”.
When you push the button you will hear a BEEP.  For certain operations, compound commands The system handles multiple inputs in the same
The BEEP is your signal to give a command. can be used. For example, instead of saying phrase or sentence such as “make a phone call”
Voice Command Button “Call” and then “John Smith” and then “mobile”, and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in the
the following compound command can be said: same phrase or sentence, the system identifies
The Voice Command button on your the topic or context and provides the associated
steering wheel is only used for “barge in” “Call John Smith mobile.”
follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to
and when you are already in a call or  For each feature explanation in this section, call?” in the case where a phone call was
want to make another call. only the compound command form of the voice requested but the specific name was not
The button on your steering wheel is also used to command is given. You can also break the recognized.
access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect commands into parts and say each part of the
command when you are asked for it. For The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
Voice Command features if your vehicle is system requires more information from the user, it
equipped. example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” will ask a question to which the user can respond
Phone Operation or you can break the compound command form without pushing the Voice Command button on the
into two voice commands: “Search Contacts” steering wheel.
OPERATION and when asked, “John Smith.” Please
HELP COMMAND
Voice commands can be used to operate the remember, the Uconnect Phone works best
Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu when you talk in a normal conversational tone, If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want
structure. Voice commands are required after as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/ to know your options at any prompt, say “Help”
most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two meters away from you. following the beep.
general methods for how Voice Command works: To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply
NATURAL SPEECH push the Phone button (if active) on your steering
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”. Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural wheel and say a command or say “Help”. All Phone
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine. sessions begin with a push of the VR button or the
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
Phone button.
system to guide you to complete the task.
MULTIMEDIA 241
CANCEL COMMAND 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN

position.
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel”
and you will be returned to the main menu. 2. Press the Phone button.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button NOTE:
on your steering wheel when the system is listening  If there are no phones currently connected
for a command and be returned to the main or with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
previous menu. if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE  This pop-up only appears when the user
PHONE enters Phone Mode and no other device(s)
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display have previously been paired. If the system
Use this QR code to access your has a phone previously paired, even if no
digital experience. phone is currently connected with the
To begin using your Uconnect system, this pop-up will not appear. 5
Phone, you must pair your 3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
4. Search for available devices on your
mobile phone. Mobile phone
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection between a  Press the Settings button on your mobile
cellular phone and the Uconnect system. phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to  Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone
visit UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display will begin to search for Bluetooth® connec-
phone compatibility information. tions.
NOTE:
NOTE:
 You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
phone to complete this procedure.
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
 The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill. sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the PIN
Follow these steps to pair your phone: from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
242 MULTIMEDIA
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and PAIR A BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
pair a mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing the Uconnect system will reconnect to the DEVICE
or Settings button from the Uconnect Phone Bluetooth® device.
For information on how to pair a Bluetooth®
main screen. NOTE: streaming audio device with the Uconnect 3 With
 Press the Paired Phones button or the Add For phones which are not made a favorite, the 5-inch Display radio Ú page 241.
Device button. phone priority is determined by the order in which
1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
 Search for available devices on your it was paired. The most recent phone paired will
begin.
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. When have the higher priority.
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
prompted on the phone, select “Uconnect”
and accept the connection request. NOTE: 3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a touchscreen to display the Paired Audio
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect Devices screen.
screen while the system is connecting. system to access your “messages” and “contacts”.
4. Press the Add Device button on the
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
touchscreen.
system, select “Uconnect.” with the Uconnect system.
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept You can also use the following VR command to NOTE:
the connection request from Uconnect. bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen If there is no device currently connected with the
on the radio: system, a pop-up will appear.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
5. Search for available devices on your
completed, the system will prompt you to  “Show Paired Phones”
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
choose whether or not this is your favorite NOTE: prompted on the device, confirm the PIN
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect shown on the Uconnect screen.
the highest priority. This phone will take system may interfere with the Bluetooth®
precedence over other paired phones within 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process
connection. If this happens, simply repeat the
range and will connect to the Uconnect system screen while the system is connecting.
pairing process. However, first make sure to delete
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only the device from the list of phones on your 7. When the pairing process has successfully
one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth® Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove completed, the system will prompt you to
audio device can be connected to the Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s choose whether or not this is your favorite
Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected, Bluetooth® settings. device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device the
simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile highest priority. This device will take precedence
over other paired devices within range.
MULTIMEDIA 243
NOTE: DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR 1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
For devices which are not made a favorite, the AUDIO DEVICE button.
device priority is determined by the order in which 2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources
it was paired. The most recent device paired will button.
have the higher priority.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right
You can also use a following VR command to bring of the device name for a different phone or
up a list of paired audio devices: audio device than the currently connected
 “Show Paired Phones” device or press the preferred Connected
Phone from the list.
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the Device button on the touchscreen.
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device
5
within range. If you need to choose a particular 6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
phone or audio device follow these steps:
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
1. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen. FAVORITE
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen,
button.
press the Settings button located to the right
3. Press to select the particular phone or the of the device name for a different phone or
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will audio device than the currently connected
appear; press “Connect Phone”. device or press the preferred “Connected
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen. Phone” from the list.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display 2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
244 MULTIMEDIA
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC then, if available, the previously downloaded TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE phonebook is available for use.
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED  Only the phonebook of the currently connected the Phone main screen.
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has mobile phone is accessible. 2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the
the ability to download contact names and number  This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited Settings Gear icon next to the contact you want
entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook. or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can to remove from your favorites. This will bring
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook only be edited on the mobile phone. The up the options for that Favorite contact.
Access Profile may support this feature. Your changes are transferred and updated to 3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking for Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection.
permission for the Uconnect system to access your Phone Call Features
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
will sync your contacts with the Uconnect system. The following features can be accessed through
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, favorites:
and supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile
for supported phones. 1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press service plan. For example, if your mobile service
 To call a name from a downloaded mobile the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
phonebook, Ú page 248. then press one of the +Add Favorite Contact accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with
buttons that appears on the list. your mobile service provider for the features that
 Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the 2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select you have.
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made “Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and Here are the phone options with Uconnect:
to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you then select the appropriate number. Press the
 Redial
start the vehicle. Down Arrow button or the Settings Gear button
next to the selected number to display the  Dial by pressing in the number
 A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four
option’s pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to  Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
numbers per contact will be downloaded and
Favorites”. Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
updated every time a phone is connected to the
Uconnect Phone. NOTE:  Favorites
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
 Depending on the maximum number of entries  Mobile Phonebook
remove an existing favorite.
downloaded, there may be a short delay before  Recent Call Log
the latest downloaded names can be used. Until
 SMS Message Viewer
MULTIMEDIA 245
CALL CONTROLS KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY

The touchscreen allows you to control the following 1. Press the Phone button.
call features: 2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and press
“Dial/Call”.
RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
1 — Answer
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of
2 — End
3 — Mute/Unmute
the following call types: 5
 All Calls
4 — Transfer
5 — Join Calls  Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display  Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
1 — Answer Other phone call features include:  Missed Calls
2 — Mute/Unmute  End Call These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
3 — Ignore Calls button on the phone main screen.
 Hold/Unhold/Resume
4 — Transfer You can also push the VR button on your steering
 Swap two active calls
wheel and perform the above operation. For
example, say “Show my incoming calls”.
246 MULTIMEDIA
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL — NOTE:

NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
rejecting an incoming call when another call is in
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio
progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an
system. Push the Phone button on the steering
incoming call or ignore it.
wheel, press the Answer button on the
touchscreen. DO NOT DISTURB
You can also press the Caller ID box to place the With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications
current call on hold or answer the incoming call. from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep
your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For
your convenience, there is a counter display to
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display keep track of your missed calls and text messages
while Do Not Disturb is active.
1 — Answer Button
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
2 — Caller ID Box
message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL — Automatic reply messages can be:
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
 “I am driving right now, I will get back to you
If a call is currently in progress and you have shortly”.
another incoming call, you will hear the same
 Create a custom auto reply message up to
network tones for call waiting that you normally
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display 160 characters.
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the NOTE:
1 — Answer Button Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
2 — Caller ID Box Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and touchscreen while typing a custom message.
answer the incoming call.
MULTIMEDIA 247
While in Do Not Disturb, “Conference Call” can be TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS If two calls are in progress (one active and one on
selected so you can still place a second call hold), press the Swap Calls button on the phone
without being interrupted by incoming calls. main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold
NOTE: at a time.
 Reply with text message is not compatible with You can also push the Phone button to toggle
iPhone® devices. between the active and held phone call.
 Auto reply with text message is only available on JOIN CALLS
phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP). When two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD Phone main screen to combine all calls into a
conference call.
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
button on the Phone main screen. CALL TERMINATION 5
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
CALL IS IN PROGRESS End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone
End button on the steering wheel. Only the active
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on
button on the Phone main screen, then dial a hold, it will become the new active call.
number from the keypad (if supported by your
mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the REDIAL
phonebooks.
Push the VR button and after the
“Listening” prompt and the following
beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
248 MULTIMEDIA
CALL CONTINUATION  Ensure that no one other than you is speaking Even though international dialing for most number
during a voice command period combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call
 Low-To-Medium Blower Setting number combinations may not be supported.
on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition
has been switched to OFF.  Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed Audio Performance
NOTE:  Low Road Noise Audio quality is maximized under:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system  Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
 Smooth Road Surface
until the phone becomes out of range for the
 Fully Closed Windows  Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to
press the Transfer button on the touchscreen  Dry Weather Conditions  Low Road Noise
when leaving the vehicle.  Smooth Road Surface
Advanced Phone Connectivity WARNING!  Fully Closed Windows
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the  Dry Weather Conditions
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE PHONE wheel. You have full responsibility and assume
 Operation From The Driver's Seat
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be all risks related to the use of the Uconnect
transferred from your mobile phone without features and applications in this vehicle. Only Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and
from your connected mobile phone to the do so may result in an accident involving serious network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer injury or death. Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
button on the Phone main screen. lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect Even though the system is designed for many
PHONE VOICE COMMANDS
Phone languages and accents, the system may not always
work for some. Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
VOICE COMMAND easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button
NOTE:
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is
For the best performance: It is recommended that you do not store names in
ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile
your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in
 Always wait for the beep before speaking phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
motion.
 Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/ when the entries are not similar. You can say “O”
meters away from you (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
MULTIMEDIA 249
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
say a command. Here are some examples: incoming text messages only. For further
RESPONSES information on how to enable this feature on your
 “Call John Smith”
Stuck in Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone® “User
 “Dial 123 456 7890” Yes. See you later.
traffic. Manual”.
 “Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number) Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible
Start without
 “Call back” (call previously answered incoming
No. I’ll be late.
me. with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
phone number) Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a
Where are I will be 5 <or
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command, Okay. text message.
you? 10, 15, 20,
push the Phone button and say “Call”, then 25, 30, 45,
Are you there SIRI® EYES FREE — IF EQUIPPED
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your Call me. 60> minutes
phonebook. When a contact has multiple phone yet? late. When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected
numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work”. to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use
I’ll call you I need See you in 5 5
your voice to send text messages, select media,
VOICE TEXT REPLY — IF EQUIPPED later. directions. <or 10, 15, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
20, 25, 30, natural language to understand what you mean
Uconnect can announce incoming text messages. 45, 60>
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right and responds back to confirm your requests. The
Push the VR button or Phone button and minutes.
say: now. system is designed to keep your eyes on the road
I’m lost. Thanks. and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
1. “Listen” to have the system read an incoming perform useful tasks.
text message. (Must have compatible mobile
phone paired to Uconnect system.) NOTE: To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Only use the numbering listed in the provided Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, you
been read. table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose the
message. can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the directions, read text messages, and many other
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messages useful requests.
full implementation of the Message Access Profile
and follow the system prompts.
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
250 MULTIMEDIA
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK technology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs
and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the radio
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
display’s touchscreen to control many of your
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
apps. To use Android Auto™, perform the following
connection can generally be re-established by
procedure:
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is
recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode. NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
POWER-UP mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either features may or may not be available in every
the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language region and/or language.
change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to 1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage
using the system Ú page 431. Google Play store on your Android™-powered NOTE:
smartphone.
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — 2. Connect your Android™-powered smartphone area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
IF EQUIPPED to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle.
If the Android Auto™ app was not downloaded,
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio screen.
the first time you plug your device in the app Data plan rates apply.
ANDROID AUTO™ begins to download. Your vehicle should be in 3. Once the device is connected and recognized,
Use this QR code to access your PARK the first time you use the app. the Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar
digital experience. NOTE: changes to the Android Auto™ icon.
Android Auto™ is a feature of your Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that
Uconnect system, and your came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may NOTE:
Android™ 6.0 or higher powered not work. Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately once a
smartphone with a data plan, that compatible device is connected. You can also
allows you to project your launch it by pressing the Android Auto™ icon on the
smartphone and a number of its apps onto the touchscreen.
touchscreen radio display. Android Auto™ brings
you useful information, and organizes it into simple
cards that appear just when they are needed.
Android Auto™ can be used with speech
MULTIMEDIA 251
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your For further information on the navigation function, Apps
Uconnect system, the following features can be please refer to https://support.google.com/
The Android Auto™ App displays all the compatible
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan: android or https://support.google.com/
apps that are available to use with Android Auto™,
 Google Maps™ for navigation androidauto/.
every time it is launched. You must have the
 YouTube Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for Music compatible app downloaded, and you must be
music Android Auto™ allows you to access and signed in to the app through your mobile device for
stream your favorite music with apps like it to work with Android Auto™.
 Hands-free calling and texting for communica-
tion YouTube Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Refer to https://play.google.com/store/apps/ to
Using your smartphone’s data plan, you see the latest list of available apps for Android
 Various compatible apps
can stream endless music on the road. Auto™.
Maps NOTE: Android Auto™ Voice Command
Push and hold the Voice Recognition (VR) Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up
button on the steering wheel until the NOTE: 5
on your smartphone prior to using Android Auto™
beep or tap the Microphone icon to ask Feature availability depends on your carrier and
for them to work with Android Auto™.
Google to take you to a desired mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™
NOTE: features may or may not be available in every
destination by voice. You can also touch the
To see the track details for the music playing region and/or language.
Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access other
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
navigation apps.
system’s media screen. interact with its best-in-class speech technology
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™ For further information, refer to https:// through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
provides voice-guided: support.google.com/androidauto. and use your smartphone’s data plan to project
 Navigation your Android™-powered smartphone and a
Communication
 Live traffic information number of its apps onto your Uconnect
With Android Auto™ connected, push and touchscreen. Connect your Android™ 6.0 or higher
 Lane guidance hold the VR button on the steering wheel to one of the media USB ports, using the
For further information, refer to www.android.com/ to activate voice recognition specific to factory-provided USB cable, and press the new
auto/ (US) or https://www.android.com/intl/ Android Auto™. This allows you to send Android Auto™ icon that replaces your Phone icon
en_ca/auto/ (Canada). and reply to text messages, have incoming text on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto™.
messages read out loud, and place and receive
hands-free calls.
252 MULTIMEDIA
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, APPLE CARPLAY® 2. Once the device is connected and recognized,
or press and hold the Microphone icon within the Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar
Android Auto™, to activate its VR, which recognizes Use this QR code to access your changes to the Apple CarPlay® Icon.
natural voice commands, to use a list of your digital experience.
NOTE:
smartphone’s features: Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately. You
 Maps Apple CarPlay®, the smarter, can also launch it by pressing the Apple CarPlay®
more secure way to use your icon on the touchscreen.
 Music
iPhone® in the car, and stay
 Phone focused on the road. Use your
 Text Messages Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehicle's knobs
and controls, and your voice with Siri to get access
 Additional Apps
to Apple Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
NOTE:
NOTE:
 To use Android Auto™ on your car display, you’ll Feature availability depends on your carrier and
need an Android™ phone running Android™ 6.0 mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
or higher, an active data plan, and the Android CarPlay® features may or may not be available in
Auto™ app. every region and/or language.
 To wirelessly use Android Auto™ on your car To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are using
display, you need a compatible Android™ smart- iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings,
phone with an active data plan. You can check ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for the very first
which smartphones are compatible at g.co/ connection only, and then use the following Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage
androidauto/requirements. procedure: 1 — LTE Data Coverage
Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc. 1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media 2 — Apple CarPlay® Icon
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE: NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular
that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables data is turned on, and that you are in an area with
may not work. cellular coverage. Your data and cellular coverage
is shown on the left side of the radio screen. Data
plan rates apply.
MULTIMEDIA 253
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your Messages Apple CarPlay® Voice Command
Uconnect system, the following features can be NOTE:
Push and hold the VR button on the
utilized using your iPhone® data plan: Feature availability depends on your carrier and
steering wheel to activate a Siri voice
 Phone recognition session. Apple CarPlay® mobile phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay®
 Music allows you to use Siri to send or reply to features may not be available in every region and/
text messages. Siri can also read incoming text or language.
 Messages
messages, but drivers will not be able to read Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
 Maps messages, as everything is done via voice. interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
Phone recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
Maps
data plan to project your iPhone® and a number of
With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold the Push and hold the VR button on the its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect
VR button on the steering wheel to steering wheel until the beep or tap the your iPhone® 5 or higher to one of the media USB
activate a Siri voice recognition session. Microphone icon to ask Apple® Siri to ports, using the factory-provided Lightning cable,
You can also press and hold the Home take you to a desired destination by and press the new Apple CarPlay® icon that 5
button within Apple CarPlay® to start talking to Siri. voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon in replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to
This allows you to make calls or listen to voicemail Apple CarPlay® to access Apple® Maps. begin Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR
as you normally would using Siri on your iPhone®. button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
Apps
NOTE: Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate
The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible apps Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands to
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
that are available to use, every time it is launched. use a list of your iPhone® features:
steering wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR
You must have the compatible app downloaded,
session, not a Siri session, and it will not function  Phone
and you must be signed in to the app through your
with Apple CarPlay®.  Music
mobile device for it to work with Apple CarPlay®.
Music  Messages
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (US)
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/  Maps — If Equipped
your artists, playlists, and music from (Canada) to see the latest list of available apps for  Additional Apps — If Equipped
iTunes® or any third party application Apple CarPlay®.
installed on your device. Using your NOTE:
iPhone® data plan, you can also use select third Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
party audio apps including music, news, sports, iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., registered
podcasts, and more. in the US and other countries. Apple® terms of use
and privacy statements apply.
254 MULTIMEDIA
ANDROID AUTO™ AND A PPLE NOTE:

WARNING!
Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be
C ARPLAY® T IPS AND T RICKS launched from the front and center console USB ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic ports. the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
Bluetooth® Pairing the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
CarPlay® for the first time and undergoing the
setup procedure, the smartphone pairs to the
IF EQUIPPED use the features and applications when it is safe
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any setup to do so. Failure to comply may result in an
I S M Y VEHICLE CONNECTED? accident involving serious injury or death.
required every time it is within range, if Bluetooth®
is turned on. If equipped, vehicles with an ASSIST and an SOS
button are connected vehicles. These buttons will NOTE:
NOTE:
be located on either the rearview mirror or SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection, trans-
Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while
overhead console, depending on the vehicle. If mission and use of data from your vehicle
Android Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth®
these buttons are present in your vehicle, you have Ú page 271.
connections to function. The connected device is
a connected radio and can take advantage of the
unavailable to other devices when connected
many connected vehicle features.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information
using Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®. SiriusXM Guardian™/Care
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect For further information about the ASSIST and SOS
buttons Ú page 330.  US residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
System — If Equipped
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html or call
It is possible to have multiple devices connected to I NTRODUCTION TO C ONNECTED V EHICLE 1-844-796-4827
the Uconnect system. For example, if using Android SERVICES  Canadian residents visit: https://www.driveuco-
Auto™/Apple CarPlay®, the connected device will
nnect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call
be used to place hands-free phone calls or send One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s
1-877-324-9091
hands-free text messages. However, another Uconnect system is that you can now take
device can also be paired to the Uconnect system, advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?
via Bluetooth®, as an audio source, so the services. To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device in
passenger can stream music. Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first need to the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle,
activate SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services. which receives GPS signals and communicates
with the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
center via wireless and landline communications
MULTIMEDIA 255
networks. Depending on the type of device in your Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are available Activation — If Equipped
vehicle, some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected for all models.
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian™
services require an operable LTE (voice/data) or SiriusXM Guardian™ provides: in your vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM
3G or 4G (data) network compatible with your
 The ability to remotely lock/unlock and remote Guardian™ connected services.
device. SiriusXM Guardian™ is available only on
equipped vehicles purchased within the start your vehicle from virtually anywhere by 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
continental United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto using the Mobile App or your computer. in-vehicle touchscreen.
Rico and Canada.  If equipped — Send & Go capability with the 2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list
NOTE: Mobile App. Use the Mobile App to easily search, of apps.
map and send your locations directly to your 3. For customers in the United States, select
 Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected Uconnect Navigation.
services are dependent upon an operative “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
telematics device, a cellular connection, naviga-  The ability to locate your vehicle, when you Guardian™ Customer Care agent who will
tion map data, and GPS satellite signal recep- forget where you parked, using the Vehicle activate services in your vehicle, or select
Finder function of the Mobile App. “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
5
tion, which can limit the ability to reach the
response center or reach emergency support. Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the For customers in Canada, enter your email ad-
 Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are easy-to-use Uconnect system and SiriusXM dress to activate services in your vehicle.
available everywhere at all times, particularly in Guardian™ connected services.
remote or enclosed areas. The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
 Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM Rearview Mirror Or Overhead Console Your new vehicle may come with an included trial*
Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service If equipped, the ASSIST Button is used for period for use of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
delivery are hills, structures, buildings, tunnels, contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, services starting on the date of vehicle purchase.
weather, damage to the electrical system or Uconnect Care, and SiriusXM Guardian™ To get started with your trial, enrollment in
other important parts of your vehicle, network Customer Care. The SOS Call button connects you SiriusXM Guardian™ is required.
congestion, civil disturbances, actions of third directly to SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care for * Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
parties or the government, Internet failure, and/ assistance in an emergency.
Features And Packages
or the physical location of your vehicle, such as
in an underground parking structure or under a After the trial period, you must purchase a
bridge. subscription to continue your services by calling a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
256 MULTIMEDIA
GETTING S TARTED WITH CONNECTED d. After clicking the email link, it will take you  Press the Settings side menu in the upper left
to a website and prompt you to assign your corner of the app to bring up app settings and
V EHICLE SERVICES account with a password. access the Assist Call Centers.
Download The Mobile App e. Once you have added a password, the Using Your Owner’s Site
Once you have activated your services, you’re only website will direct you to your homepage
Your Owner’s Site website https://
a few steps away from using connected services. where you can add in your VIN. www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents), or
 Download the Mobile App to your mobile device.  For customers in Canada, register your account www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) provides you
via your vehicle. with all the information you need, all in one place.
 Use your Owner Account login and password to
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom menu You can track your service history, find
open the app and then set up a PIN. recommended accessories for your vehicle, watch
bar.
videos about your vehicle's features, and easily
b. Press the Activate Services button from the access your manuals. It is also where you can
apps list. manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account. This
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confir- section will familiarize you with the key elements of
mation email will be sent to the provided the website that will help you get the most of your
email address. SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
d. Press “Continue Activation” from the confir- For customers in the United States, press the Sign
mation email. It may take a short time In/Register button and enter your email address
before remote services will be available, but and password.
you will be able to log into the Mobile App For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle
 For customers in the United States, visit
and the Owner’s Site. button. Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle Health
www.mopar.com, and click the Sign In/Register  Once on the Remote screen and you have set up Report”, and “Recalls”. The website will then
button in the upper right-hand corner to register your four-digit PIN, you can begin using Remote prompt you to log in using your email address and
your account online. Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and password.
a. Click the Register button. activate your horn and lights remotely, if  Edit/Edit Profile:
equipped. To manage the details of your SiriusXM
b. Select the correct country and email
address then click “Register”.  Press the Location button on the bottom menu Guardian™ account, such as your contact infor-
bar of the app to bring up a map to locate your mation, password and SiriusXM Guardian™ PIN,
c. You will then receive an email notification to vehicle or send a location to your Mobile Naviga- click on the Edit/Edit Profile button to access
confirm/verify your newly created account. tion, if equipped. the details of your account.
MULTIMEDIA 257
 Connected Services Status: USING S IRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ in the event of an emergency. When the
This statement will indicate your SiriusXM connection between the vehicle and the live agent
Guardian™-equipped vehicle. SOS Call — If Equipped is made, your vehicle will automatically transmit
location information. In the event of a minor
 Remote Commands: WARNING! collision, medical or any other emergency, press
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM Guardian™ the SOS button to be connected to a call center
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services,
subscription, press one of these icons and enter agent who can send emergency assistance to your
including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance
your four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN vehicle’s location.
Call, will NOT work without a network connection
to remotely start (if equipped), lock/unlock
compatible with your device. NOTE:
doors or sound the horn and flash the lights.
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services
Editing Your Notifications are dependent on an operational Uconnect
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A
Notifications are an important element of your Button system, cellular network availability that is
SiriusXM Guardian™ account. For example, any compatible with the device in your vehicle, and
time you use your remote services (such as GPS network availability. Not all features of
5
Center Light Status Description
Remote Door Unlock), you can elect to receive a SiriusXM Guardian™ are available everywhere at
text message, push notification, and/or E-mail to Off No call activated all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
notify you of the event. To set up the notifications, Green Active call in progress How It Works
please follow these instructions: Red System error 1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator light
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at https:// will turn green indicating a call has been
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents) placed.
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
and select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca
Features NOTE:
(Canadian Residents), select “My Vehicle”
and then “Dashboard”. With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has  In case the SOS Call button is accidentally
onboard assistance features located on the pushed, there is a 10-second delay before
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button.
rearview mirror or overhead console designed to the SOS call is placed. The system will
3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™” enhance your driving experience if you should ever verbally alert you that a call is about to be
where you can edit Notification Preferences. need assistance or support. made. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email Description push the SOS Call button on the rearview
address to notify you, and you can customize mirror or overhead console or press the
SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact
the types of messages. Cancel button on the touchscreen within
with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
10 seconds.
258 MULTIMEDIA
 During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth®-paired  The light will continuously be illuminated red. If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason
phone is disconnected so incoming or  The screen will display the following message (including during or after an accident), the SOS Call
outgoing calls will go through your mobile “Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact system, among other vehicle systems, will not
device versus the hands-free system which your dealer.” operate.
is not available due to the SOS Call. Requirements
 An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a phone requires service. Please contact your  This feature is available only on vehicles sold in
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent is dealer.” the US or Canada.
made, the agent will stay on the line with you.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
NOTE: factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the or stop SOS Call system operation. These include, Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center may be but are not limited to, the following factors: Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
recorded or monitored for quality assurance includes the applicable feature.
 The ignition key is in OFF position.
purposes. Through your enrollment in and use of
 The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services, you
consent to being recorded. or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat-
 The vehicle battery loses power or becomes ible with your device.
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
SOS Call System Limitations  Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC
 The SOS Call system software and/or hardware (Accessory) position with a properly functioning
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US and is damaged during a vehicle crash.
that travel into Mexico and Canada may have electrical system.
limited services. In particular, responses to SOS  LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) coverage
calls or other emergency services may be and/or GPS signals are unavailable or WARNING!
unavailable or very limited. Vehicles purchased obstructed.
 Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
outside the United States and Canada are unable  Network congestion. LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) and GPS
to receive SiriusXM Guardian™ connected  Weather conditions. antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data)
services. or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which
 Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any can prevent your vehicle from placing an
tunnels.
of the following may occur at the time the emergency call.
malfunction is detected: (Continued)
MULTIMEDIA 259
1. Automatic SOS will initiate a call with an

WARNING! WARNING! agent.
 Do not add any aftermarket electrical equip-  Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could mean 2. An agent will receive the call and confirm the
ment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This you will not have SOS Call services if needed. location of the emergency.
may prevent your vehicle from sending a If the Rearview Mirror Light is illuminated, 3. If needed, the agent will request the
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid have an authorized dealer service the SOS assistance of emergency services.
interference that can cause the SOS Call Call system immediately.
system to fail, never add aftermarket equip- 4. First responders will arrive on scene. The
 If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., agent will remain on the call until emergency
ment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road condi- services arrive.
data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
tions or location), do not wait for voice contact
system or modify the antennas on your NOTE:
from a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES POWER FOR  Agents are available 24/7 to assist you in the
agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER case of an emergency.
AN ACCIDENT), NEITHER THE MOBILE APPS
immediately and move to a safe location. 5
 On your behalf, agents are able to notify family
NOR THE SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ CONNECTED  Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
members about the collision.
SERVICES WILL OPERATE. and regular inspection of your vehicle may
result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.  Agents can brief first responders of the situation
 The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns before they arrive on scene.
on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instru-
Automatic SOS — If Equipped  In the event vehicle occupants are unable to
ment panel if a malfunction in any part of the
speak, emergency services will be dispatched
air bag system is detected. If the Air Bag Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that based on the last known GPS coordinates.
Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag can immediately connect you with help in the event
system may not be working properly and the  SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. After an
SOS Call system may not be able to send a dependent upon an operative telematics
accident, a live agent will contact you through the
signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer device, a cellular connection, navigation map
Uconnect system and alert emergency services.
Care center. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illu- data, and GPS satellite reception, which can
minated, have an authorized dealer service
NOTE: limit the ability to reach the response center or
your vehicle immediately. An active SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is reach emergency support.
required for this feature to function.  Terms of service of the Uconnect and the
(Continued)
After a crash where the airbags deploy: SiriusXM Guardian™ subscriber agreement
apply. See terms of services for complete
service limitation.
260 MULTIMEDIA
Remote Commands Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile 3. On your dashboard, you will see remote
Device And The Mobile App commands. Press the desired icon to activate
On the Remote Commands screen, you have
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon on that feature.
access to several vehicle features that can be
controlled remotely from your mobile device. These your mobile device. 4. You will then be asked to enter your SiriusXM
features include locking/unlocking, remote 2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same
starting, and activating the horn and lights of the SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the four-digit code established when you activated
vehicle. same four-digit code established when you your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services).
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected Please enter your SiriusXM Guardian™
Press this button to Security PIN.
Lock services). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
lock your vehicle.
Security PIN on the keypad. 5. A message will appear on the screen to let you
Press this button to know if the command was received by your
Vehicle Start 3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the
start your vehicle. vehicle.
command to go through to your vehicle.
Press this button to
4. A message will let you know if the command Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
Horn & Lights sound the horn and
was received by your vehicle. (for example, in case of an accidental lock-out):
activate your lights.
Press this button to Using A Remote Command Through Your Owner’s 1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
Unlock if you are unable to lock your vehicle through
unlock your vehicle. Site
the Mobile App or your key fob.
Press this button to 1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the
Cancel Vehicle Start 2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM
cancel remote start. username and password you used when
activating your SiriusXM Guardian™ Guardian™ Customer Care agent will verify
connected services in your vehicle. your identity by asking for your four-digit
Remote Commands lets you send a request to your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
vehicle in one of three ways: NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links are 3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™
 Anywhere using your mobile device and Mobile Security PIN, you can ask them to perform a
provided on the website to help you retrieve them.
App remote command.
2. If you have more than one vehicle registered
 From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not NOTE:
into your Owner’s Site, select the vehicle you
available on all functions) Anyone with access to your PIN may request
want to send the command to by clicking on its
 Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care image along the top. Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsibility
(not available on all functions) to protect your PIN appropriately.
MULTIMEDIA 261
Remote Door Lock/Unlock Remote Door Lock/Unlock if following a Remote Working Vehicle Conditions
Horn & Lights activation.  The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
Description
 Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will not  The vehicle has been started with the key fob
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides
you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your be processed if the vehicle is in motion, the igni- within the last 14 days.
vehicle without the keys and from virtually any tion key is on or during an emergency call.
 The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
distance. NOTE:
 The vehicle’s security system has been armed
Working Vehicle Conditions All other remote services should be performed via
and not triggered since the last vehicle start.
your Owner’s Site or through the Mobile App on
 The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill. your compatible device.  The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are closed.
 The vehicle must be in an open area with cell Remote Vehicle Start  The vehicle’s check engine light must be off.
tower reception.
Description  The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank of
 Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi fuel, along with oil and battery power.
connection. The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you with 5
the ability to start the engine on your vehicle  The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.
Requirements without the keys and from virtually any distance.  If equipped, the vehicle must have an automatic
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with Once started, the preset climate controls in your transmission.
SiriusXM Guardian™. vehicle can warm up or cool down the interior.
 The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) You can also send a command to turn off an tower reception.
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection. If using engine that has been started using Remote Vehicle
 Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
the Mobile App to command your vehicle, your Start. After 15 minutes, if you have not entered
connection.
device must be compatible and be connected to your vehicle with the key, the engine will shut off
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) automatically.  If the Panic button has been pressed, the
network connection. vehicle must be started at least once after
This remote function requires your vehicle to be
alarming the system.
 Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that system. NOTE:
includes the applicable feature. You can set up push notifications every time a The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents
command is sent to activate or cancel Remote are not authorized for Remote Vehicle Start
 An ignition cycle is required for some remote
Start. services. Contact the Uconnect Care Team for
commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start and
assistance.
262 MULTIMEDIA
Remote Horn & Lights connected services have been activated, the ASSIST the touchscreen. Make your selection by pressing
button can connect you directly to the Customer the touchscreen.
Description
Care call center (if equipped). You will be directed to Requirements
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or one of the following four services:
noisy parking area by activating the horn and  This feature is available only on vehicles sold in
 Roadside Assistance — If you get a flat tire or the US and Canada.
lights. It may also help if you need to draw attention
to your vehicle for any reason. need a tow, you’ll be connected to someone
who can help anytime.  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
If you want, you can set up push notifications every SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
 Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM
time a command is sent to turn on the horn and  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
lights. Guardian™ Customer Care call center to acti-
vate your services, renew after your trial has or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Working Vehicle Conditions expired, for in-vehicle support for your SiriusXM  Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
 The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill. Guardian™ connected services, or help Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
answering any general questions surrounding includes the applicable feature.
 The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception. your connected services.  Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC
 Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all (Accessory) position with a properly functioning
 Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
non-connected Uconnect system features, such electrical system.
connection.
as radio and Bluetooth® connections. Disclaimers
NOTE:
 Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle. If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed to
be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind the SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any
surroundings when using this feature. You are Features — If Equipped additional roadside assistance service costs that
responsible for compliance with local laws, rules With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM
and ordinances in the location of your vehicle onboard assistance features located on the Guardian™ connected services to you, we may
when using Remote Horn & Lights. rearview mirror or overhead console designed to record and monitor your conversations with
Roadside Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect
Assist — If Equipped enhance your driving experience if you should ever
need assistance or support. Care, or SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care,
Description whether such conversations are initiated through
How It Works the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services in
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services feature may contain an ASSIST Simply push the ASSIST button in the vehicle and your vehicle, or via a landline or mobile device, and
button in the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM Guardian™ you will be presented with your ASSIST options on may share information obtained through such
recording and monitoring in accordance with
MULTIMEDIA 263
regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree 4. Confirm your destination in the vehicle through  Vehicle ignition must have been turned on
and consent to any recording, monitoring or a notification or in the Navigation system. within 14 days.
sharing of information obtained through any such Requirements 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
call recordings.
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) Description
Send & Go — If Equipped or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat- 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that
Description ible with your device. connects your device to an LTE (voice/data) or 4G
The Send & Go feature allows you to search for a  Vehicle must have an active subscription that (data) network that is ready to go wherever you are.
destination on your mobile device, and then send includes the applicable feature. After you've made your purchase, turn on your
the route to your vehicle’s Navigation system. Vehicle Finder device’s Wi-Fi and connect your devices.
How It Works Description  Enables all your passengers to be simultane-
1. There are multiple ways to find a destination. ously connected to the web.
The Vehicle Finder feature allows you to find the
After selecting the Location tab at the bottom location of your vehicle.  Connect several devices at one time. 5
of the App, browse through one of the  Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop or
categories provided, or type the name or You can also sound the horn and flash the lights to
make finding your vehicle even easier. any other portable-enabled media — can
keyword in the search box. You can also connect over your private in-vehicle network.
select categories such as “Favorites” or How It Works
“Contact List”.  A high-speed, secured connection lets anyone
Select the Vehicle Finder function within the on your private network access the Web — great
2. Select your destination from the list that Mobile App and select the Location tab at the for working and relaxing.
appears. Location information will then be bottom of the App. Then, press the Vehicle icon to
displayed on the map. find your vehicle. WARNING!
From this screen, you will be able to: Requirements
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi
 View the location on a map.  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Hotspot while driving the vehicle as doing so
 See the distance from your current location.
Uconnect system. may result in an accident involving serious injury
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or death.
 Send the destination to the vehicle
(Send & Go). or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat-
ible with your device.
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect
Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call  Vehicle must have an active subscription that
the destination by pressing the Call button. includes the applicable feature.
264 MULTIMEDIA
Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle devices from the app screen by pressing the View The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care Agent
How It Works Connected Devices button. will ask for the stolen vehicle report number
NOTE: (as issued by your local law enforcement). If
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not required you have downloaded the Mobile App, you can
the vehicle passengers with an internet
in order to purchase and use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot. push the Settings menu button on your device,
access hotspot in the vehicle, using the
radio as an access point. The hotspot will select “Help”, and then select “SiriusXM
allow Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle devices (such as a
WARNING! Guardian™ Customer Care” to make the call.
laptop or any other portable-enabled media Always drive safely with your hands on the 3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
device) to wirelessly connect to the internet. steering wheel and obey all applicable laws. You authenticate that you are the owner of the
Uconnect offers a complimentary 3-month trial have full responsibility and assume all risks vehicle and contact the law enforcement with
period that includes 1GB of total data. The trial can related to the use of the features and whom you filed the stolen vehicle report.
be activated any time within the first year of new applications in this vehicle. Only use the
4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will work
vehicle ownership. features and applications in this vehicle when it
with your local law enforcement to locate the
Use one of these three ways to purchase a is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result in
vehicle. You will be contacted by law
subscription to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot: an accident involving in serious injury or death.
enforcement if your vehicle is recovered. While
1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select the the investigation is ongoing, you should also
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the How To Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If Equipped contact your insurance company to inform it of
Purchase button and follow the instructions. Description the situation.
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link to If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™ Requirements
the AT&T portal to get set up. Customer Care agent may be able to locate the
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
3. For existing Connected Car customers: Push stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to
Uconnect system.
the ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T help recover it.
Customer Care agent who will assist you.  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
How It Works
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat-
Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you can 1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law ible with your device.
change its name and the password by selecting the enforcement as soon as possible. They will
 Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing the Setup Wi-Fi work with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that
Hotspot button. You can also view the connected 2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer includes the applicable feature.
Care that your vehicle has been stolen.
MULTIMEDIA 265
NOTE: Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more NOTE:
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are information, located at www.driveuconnect.com/ Pressing “OK” or the X button on the pop-up screen
available everywhere at all times, particularly in connectedservices/privacy.html (US Residents) or will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the In-Vehicle
remote or enclosed areas. www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). Messages mailbox will display. In the Mailbox, you
Monthly Vehicle Health Report — For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™ can reopen messages or delete messages.
If Equipped private policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/ Amazon Alexa Skill — If Equipped
privacy-policy. Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to
Description
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect
Vehicle Health Alert —If Equipped command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa!
service through which a summary of the Description With Amazon Alexa, you can connect to your
performance of your vehicle’s key systems will be Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses vehicle and remotely access key services and
sent to you every month so you can stay on top of a problem with one of your vehicle’s key systems. features.
your vehicle’s maintenance needs. This is provided For further information, go to your Owner’s If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect
as a convenience to you and does not substitute website. Navigation, you can send a destination directly to 5
for regular maintenance to your vehicle. your vehicle using Alexa.
NOTE:
In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to register If you need assistance, you can always ask Alexa
Report, the Uconnect system in your vehicle may and activate services. During this process you will for help, or complete a list of commands by saying:
collect and transmit vehicle data to SiriusXM be asked to provide an email address to which the “Alexa, ask <brand name> for help with my car.”
Guardian™ and to FCA, such as your vehicle’s reports will be sent. Here are a few of the many questions you can ask
health and performance, your vehicle’s location,
your utilization of the features in your vehicle, and
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped Alexa:
other data. Description  “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to start my <vehicle
name> with your Voice Code .”
This data collection and transmission begins when Your vehicle will send you notifications to remind
you enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will continue you when services are needed, or to alert you of  “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my <vehicle
even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™ other important information, such as recall name> with your Voice Code.”
subscription unless you call SiriusXM Guardian™ notices. When you receive a notification through  “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000
Customer Care and tell them to deactivate your your touchscreen, press OK to dismiss the Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my
Uconnect Services. message, or press Call Care to speak with a <vehicle name>.”
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
 “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel
level of my <vehicle name>.”
266 MULTIMEDIA
An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is Google Home. If you need assistance, ask Google 5. Press “Sign In” and enter the email address
required. To use Amazon Alexa, first, register for for help, or for a complete list of commands by and password you created when you activated
SiriusXM Guardian™ Ú page 255. saying: “Hey Google, ask <brand name> for help SiriusXM Guardian™. There will be additional
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle to with my car.” settings to confirm on the following screen.
Amazon Alexa: Here are a few examples of commands: 6. Lastly, press “Authorize” to complete the
1. Download the Amazon Alexa app on your  “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to start my linking process.
mobile device (Apple® or Android™). <vehicle name> with your Voice Code.” Now, you can ask Google Assistant to help you:
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to SKILLS.  “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my  Remotely start the engine, or cancel a remote
3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap <vehicle name> with your Voice Code.” start
Enable.  “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000  Send a destination to your vehicle’s built-in
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted. Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my Uconnect Navigation system
<vehicle name>.”  Monitor vehicle vitals, such as tire pressure, fuel
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle
brand> Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.  “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> what is the level and oil life
fuel level of my <vehicle name>.”  And more!
6. Log in using your Owner Account credentials.
To link your Uconnect account with Google
This will be the same user name and password Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
you used when registering for SiriusXM Assistant, follow these steps:
Description
Guardian™ connected services. There will be 1. Download and install the Google Assistant
additional settings to confirm on the following app on your smart phone from the App Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving and
screen. Store® or Google Play. give you peace of mind when your loved ones are
out on the road. You can set boundary limits,
7. AUTHORIZE the account to return to the 2. After installation, log in to the Google Assistant
monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your vehicle’s
<vehicle brand> Skill. app with your Gmail ID. Verify your account by
location any time, any place. Use the Mobile App to
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand> Skill pressing the icon in the upper right-hand
set alerts:
on Alexa! corner.
 Boundary Alert
3. Press the Discover button in the bottom left
Google Assistant — If Equipped Receive a notification the moment your vehicle
corner of the screen. Enter the vehicle brand
With the Google Assistant, you can get help and name. is driven either out of or into a geographic
keep tabs on your car. Google Assistant is available boundary that you set.
4. A prompt will appear to link your Uconnect
across your devices, including Android™ phones,
account. Press “Link Uconnect to Google”.
iPhone® devices, or voice-activated speakers, like
MULTIMEDIA 267
 Curfew Alert  Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the ASSIST button and press the Activate button on the
Receive a notification when your car is being remote lock button in the app and entering your touchscreen to activate services.
driven outside of the curfew time. security PIN.
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS —
 Speed Alert  Remote start or stop your vehicle.
IF E QUIPPED
Receive a notification whenever your car  View important vehicle stats, such as fuel level,
exceeds a speed limit you set. vehicle location, tire pressure warning, and 1. What happens if I accidentally push the SOS
more. Call button on the mirror or overhead console?
 Valet Alert
For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube channel You have 10 seconds after pushing the SOS
Receive a notification if and when your vehicle is Call button to cancel the call. To cancel the
for SmartWatch Integration.
driven outside a quarter-mile radius of a valet call, either push the SOS Call button again, or
drop-off zone. MANAGE M Y SIRIUSXM G UARDIAN™ press the Cancel button on the in-vehicle
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped ACCOUNT touchscreen.
Description 2. What type of information is sent when I use the 5
To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account, SOS Call button from my vehicle? Certain
SmartWatch Integration puts the Mobile App right press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call vehicle information, such as make and model,
on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear. To get SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care. is transmitted along with the last known GPS
started, follow these steps:
NOTE: location.
1. Download the Mobile App from the App It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or 3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You can
Store® or Google Play. turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM Guardian™ use the SOS Call button to make a call if you or
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone using Care to remove your personal data. someone else needs emergency assistance.
the username and password you created when
you first set up your account. CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE D OOR
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are For additional information about SiriusXM LOCK/UNLOCK FAQ S
connected through Bluetooth®. Guardian™, active subscribers can push the
4. The Mobile App should appear on your ASSIST button (if equipped) and then select 1. How long does it take to unlock or lock the
SmartWatch. SiriusXM Guardian™ Call on your in-vehicle door? Depending on various conditions, it can
touchscreen to contact SiriusXM Guardian™. Your take up to three minutes or more for the
Once the app is downloaded on your SmartWatch, request to get to your vehicle.
you can enjoy these features: call will be directed to a SiriusXM Guardian™ agent
or held in a queue until an agent is available. If you 2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App?
do not have an active subscription, push the Your key fob will lock/unlock the door more
268 MULTIMEDIA
quickly, however its range is limited and your CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE 3. Can I select a different route than the most
Mobile App comes in handy for these and recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you
other situations. ASSISTANCE FAQ S enter the vehicle, and start the engine, the
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device? 1. What is the phone number for roadside pop-up message offers a “Locations” option.
People sometimes lose their mobile devices, assistance call? The phone number is: Once “Locations” is selected, you can choose
which is why security measures have been from a list of recently sent destinations.
 US: 1-800-521-2779
engineered into the Mobile App. Asking for
your username, password and SiriusXM
 Canada: 1-800-363-4869 CONNECTED S ERVICES V EHICLE F INDER
Guardian™ Security PIN are required for the 2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™, FAQ S
activation of Remote services through your does it cover towing or other expenses
mobile device. It is your responsibility to incurred by using roadside assistance? No, 1. Can someone else locate my vehicle? Your
protect your passwords and PINs. however your new vehicle may include vehicle may be located by anyone who has
Roadside Assistance Call services. your PIN and access to your account. It is your
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile responsibility to guard your PIN accordingly.
App? The Mobile App is compatible with most
devices with the Apple® and Android™
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & G O See the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™
terms of service for more information.
operating systems. The capabilities of these FAQ S — IF E QUIPPED
devices allow us to remotely command your 2. How long does it take to sound my horn and
1. How long does it take to send the route and flash the lights? Depending on various
vehicle. Other operating systems may be
destination to my vehicle? Depending on conditions, it can take three minutes or more
supported in the future.
various conditions, it can take up to three for the request to get through to your vehicle.
5. Why is the Mobile App running slow? The minutes for the request to get through to your
Mobile App relies on a mobile network 3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn
vehicle.
connection from your device to send them on? If you are close enough to the
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle? Yes, vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the
commands to your vehicle which must have an
once you enter your vehicle, and start the horn and lights by pushing the red Panic
operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G, 4G (data), or
engine, the pop-up message stating that you button.
5G (data) network connection. If either your
have a new route will appear. There is an exit
device or your vehicle is in an area with below
button on the pop-up that will cancel the route
average coverage, it may take longer to log in
if selected.
and send commands.
MULTIMEDIA 269
CONNECTED S ERVICES S TOLEN VEHICLE NOTE: 4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle using
Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance the App? No. Driving your vehicle still requires
ASSISTANCE FAQ S — I F EQUIPPED companies, and SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an the keys to be in the vehicle. The Remote Start
1. Can someone locate my vehicle? To enhance insurance product. You are responsible for feature simply starts the engine to warm up or
your privacy, and the privacy of others using obtaining insurance coverage for your vehicle and cool down the interior before you arrive.
your vehicle, a stolen vehicle police report is yourself. 5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with
required for you to activate this service. You the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command?
must involve local law enforcement to have CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel
SiriusXM Guardian™ locate your vehicle. We S TART FAQ S Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop the
may also locate the vehicle for other law vehicle.
enforcement or government agencies, 1. How long does it take to remotely start my
6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile
subject to a valid court order telling SiriusXM vehicle? Depending on various conditions, it
App? The Mobile App has been designed to
Guardian™ to do so. We will also provide the can take three minutes or more for the
service for FCA entities to locate a vehicle that request to get through to your vehicle.
work on most devices with the Apple® and 5
Android™ operating systems. The capabilities
you have purchased through them. 2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App? of these devices allow us to remotely
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered? Your key fob will remote start your vehicle command your vehicle. Other operating
After you provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ more quickly. However its range is limited. For systems may be supported in the future.
Customer Care agent with the stolen vehicle example, when you are leaving the stadium
report, the agent will work together with law after the game, you can use the Mobile App to CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE H ORN
enforcement to try to locate your vehicle. If remote start your vehicle and have the inside
your vehicle is recovered, you will be contacted of your vehicle comfortable by the time you get & L IGHTS FAQ S
by law enforcement. to it. 1. How long does it take to sound my horn and
3. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my insurance 3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless flash the lights? Depending on various
rates? Some insurance providers offer lower device? People sometimes lose their wireless conditions, it can take three minutes or more
rates on vehicles equipped with systems that devices, which is why security measures have for the request to get through to your vehicle.
can deter auto theft. When shopping for been engineered into the Mobile App. Asking 2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App?
insurance, be sure to inform the insurance for your username, password and SiriusXM Your key fob will sound the horn and flash the
provider of your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected Guardian™ Security PIN help to ensure that lights quicker; however, its range is limited.
services subscription to find out if the insurance nobody can start your vehicle if they happen to
find your device. 3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn
provider can offer you a lower rate.
them on? If you are close enough to the
270 MULTIMEDIA
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the 72 hours. Once you click the activation link, updated online, or by calling SiriusXM
horn and lights by pressing the red Panic you will be prompted to fill out your informa- Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in your
button. Otherwise, Remote Horn & Lights will tion and accept Terms and Conditions. vehicle. To update online: login to your Owner’s
continue for a maximum of three minutes. Then, you will be directed to the SiriusXM Site, and select Edit Profile > SiriusXM
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile Guardian™ home page to complete your Guardian™ Payment Account.
App? The Mobile App has been designed to profile and demo the remote services. 6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
work on most devices with the Apple® and 2. Why do I need an email address? Without an profile? Your name, home address, phone
Android™ operating systems. The capabilities email address, customers cannot register for number, email address and SiriusXM
of these devices allow us to remotely SiriusXM Guardian™. Customers need to Guardian™ Security PIN can be updated online
command your vehicle. Other operating register so they can subscribe to receive on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your Owner’s
systems may be supported in the future. additional services and create a SiriusXM Site then select Edit Profile to edit your
Guardian™ Security PIN for remote command personal information. Make your edits and
CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT FAQS — requests. click Save.
IF E QUIPPED 3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™ security 7. Can I try features or packages before I buy
PIN? Set up your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security them? Your new vehicle purchase may have
1. How do I register for my SiriusXM Guardian™ PIN during the registration process. The come with an included trial period for certain
account? There are three ways that you can SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN will be Apps and services.
register your SiriusXM Guardian™ Account: required to authenticate you when accessing 8. Can I access every App and service while
 Push the ASSIST button. A call will be placed your account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or driving? No, some applications and services
to an agent who can assist in registering performing any remote services, such as are not available while driving. For your own
your new account. Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn & safety, it is not possible to use some of the
 Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start. touchscreen features while the vehicle is in
menu. Select the button to speak with an 4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™ motion (e.g. key pad).
agent, who can assist in registering your security PIN? If you’ve already activated 9. What happens when my subscription comes
new account. services and forgot your SiriusXM Guardian™ up for renewal? If you have added a credit card
 Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps Security PIN, you can reset the PIN by selecting to your account information, your subscription
menu. Enter your email on the touchscreen Edit Profile on your Owner’s Site. will be automatically renewed for a term length
and then follow the prompts from the 5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ in accordance with the service plan that you
provided email. You will receive an email payment account address? Your SiriusXM have selected at the then current subscription
with an activation link that will be good for Guardian™ Payment Account address can be rate and on every renewal date thereafter,
MULTIMEDIA 271
unless you cancel your subscription by calling 14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire 18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/
SiriusXM Guardian™ Care. If you have not subscription? Prorated refunds are provided data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network
added a credit card to your account, SiriusXM from the date of cancellation for annual plans connection compatible with my device is
Guardian™ will send you an email or letter in or longer. Please see the Uconnect and temporarily unavailable? The SOS Call and
advance of your expiration date to remind you SiriusXM Guardian™ Terms & Conditions for ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are not
that your subscription is ending soon. refunds related to billing plans of other lengths connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™ and other circumstances. 3G, 4G (data), 5G (data) network. Services that
notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM 15. Can I cancel a subscription before it expires? required your smartphone only direct calls to
Guardian™ Customer Care, or go to your Yes. If you have an annual subscription, your Roadside Assistance Call may be functioning if
Owner’s Site and then update your subscription will be canceled the day you you have an operable network.
preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™ cancel. If you have a monthly subscription,
customer web portal. your subscription will be canceled on the last DATA C OLLECTION & PRIVACY
day of the month in which you choose to
11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact
cancel.
The Uconnect system collects and transmits data 5
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by which may include information about your vehicle,
pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview 16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle? your vehicle’s health and performance, your
mirror or overhead console. Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner, vehicle’s location, your utilization of the features in
12. How do I update my credit card information? you’ll want to remove your account your vehicle, and other data. The collection, use
Login to your Owner’s Site, and select Edit information. This process removes all personal and sharing of this information is required to
Profile, then select SiriusXM Guardian™ information, returns the Uconnect system to provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
Payment Account. its original factory settings, removes all services and is further described by the Uconnect
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services and Privacy Policy, which can be found at
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on account information. To remove your account www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/
my subscription? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ information from the Uconnect system, privacy.html (US Residents) or
Customer Care. contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care. www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). This
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and 17. What if I forgot to remove my account information may be collected by SiriusXM®
choose a subscription to view its expiration information before I returned my lease vehicle Connected Vehicle Services Inc. and shared with
date. When your subscription is about to ex- or sold it? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ FCA US LLC for the purposes stated in the
pire, you will receive an email or letter of notifi- Customer Care. Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle health and
cation.
272 MULTIMEDIA
diagnostic information including location data may

be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle Health
REGULATORY AND SAFETY OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Report to you. I NFORMATION If your vehicle is equipped with Off-Road Pages, it
Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™ US/CANADA will provide you vehicle status information while
subscription, this vehicle diagnostic health operating on off-road conditions. It supplies
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation information relating to the status of the drivetrain,
information, including location data, may still be
The radiated output power of the internal wireless transfer case, coolant/oil gauges, pitch and roll of
transmitted from your vehicle and you may still
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency the vehicle and access to the trailcam system.
have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps button
Use of any of the connected services including will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in
SiriusXM Guardian™ is deemed to be your consent on the touchscreen, and then select “Off-Road
(20 cm) or further from the human body. Pages”.
to the collection, use and disclosure of this
The internal wireless radio operates within
information in accordance with the Uconnect
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
Privacy Policy. If you do not want this information to
standards and recommendations, which reflect
be collected, used, or shared, you must cancel your
the consensus of the scientific community.
Uconnect services in their entirety by contacting us
as referenced in the Uconnect Privacy Policy. The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy of wireless radios may be restricted in some
performance from your radio. This condition may situations or environments, such as aboard
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance on the wireless radio Ú page 431. Main Menu
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
1 — Mobile Apps Button
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone 2 — Off-Road Pages App
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
MULTIMEDIA 273
OFF-R OAD P AGES S TATUS BAR DRIVETRAIN

The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the The Drivetrain page displays information
bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
the three selectable page options. It provides The following information is displayed:
continually updating information for the following
items:  Steering angle in degrees
 Status of Transfer Case
 Current Transfer Case Status
 Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped
 Current Latitude/Longitude
 Current Altitude of the vehicle
 Status of Hill Descent/Selec-Speed Control and
Selected Speed in MPH (km/h) Status Bar 2WD/4WD
 Status of Off-Road+ Mode
5
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Current Latitude/Longitude
3 — Current Altitude
4 — Hill Descent Control
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD

1 — Steering Angle
2 — Sway Bar
3 — Front Axle Locker Status
4 — Rear Axle Locker Status
274 MULTIMEDIA
ACCESSORY G AUGE PITCH & ROLL TRAILCAM — I F EQUIPPED

The Accessory Gauge page displays the current The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current Your vehicle may be equipped with a TrailCam that
status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to allows you to see an on-screen image of the front
Temperature, Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only), side) in degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a view of your vehicle. The image will be displayed on
Transmission Temperature, and Battery Voltage. visualization of the current vehicle angle. the touchscreen along with a caution note “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
To activate, press the TrailCam button on the
touchscreen.
Accessory Gauges Menu 2WD/4WD Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD

1 — Coolant Temperature 1 — Current Pitch
2 — Oil Temperature 2 — Current Roll
TrailCam Activation
3 — Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only)
4 — Transmission Temperature
(Automatic Transmissions Only)
5 — Battery Voltage
275
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification WARNING!
ANTI-L OCK BRAKE S YSTEM (ABS) may result in degraded ABS performance.  The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and WARNING! following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
brake performance under most braking conditions. planing.
 The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer-  The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
enhances vehicle control during braking.
ence caused by improperly installed or high must never be exploited in a reckless or
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that output radio transmitting equipment. This dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle interference can cause possible loss of user’s safety or the safety of others.
is started and driven. During this self-check, you anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some such equipment should be performed by qual-
related motor noises. ified professionals. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning 6
The ABS is activated during braking when the Light
 Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
system detects one or more wheels are beginning their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you stay on for as long as four seconds.
may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s). need to slow down or stop. If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on
You also may experience the following normal while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion
 The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
characteristics when the ABS activates: of the brake system is not functioning and that
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
 ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may service is required. However, the conventional
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
continue to hear for a short time after the stop) brake system will continue to operate normally if
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
the ABS Warning Light is on.
 Brake pedal pulsations brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
 A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the (Continued)
stop
276 SAFETY
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system Brake System Warning Light
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore WARNING!
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition the natural laws of physics from acting on the
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
repaired as soon as possible. If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake prevent collisions, including those resulting from
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC) system is not functioning properly and that excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
SYSTEM immediate service is required. If the Brake System surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
additional information. repaired as soon as possible. jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Brake Assist System (BAS) others.
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system
includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force braking capability during emergency braking Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll Mitigation maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
EBD manages the distribution of the braking
(ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start braking situation by sensing the rate and amount
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System (TCS). of brake application and then applies optimum
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to
These systems work together to enhance both pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle
vehicle stability and control in various driving braking distances. The BAS complements the
instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
conditions. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
entering ABS before the front axle.
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Hill receive the benefit of the system, you must apply Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
Descent Control (HDC), Rain Brake Support (RBS), continuous braking pressure during the stopping ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
Ready Alert Braking (RAB), and Trailer Sway sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
Control (TSC). reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle
the BAS is deactivated. and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen
SAFETY 277
the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only Engine power may also be reduced to help the
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during vehicle maintain the desired path. WARNING!
severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot  Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more  Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as than appropriate for the steering wheel position. prevent the natural laws of physics from acting
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
objects or other vehicles.  Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
NOTE: cannot prevent accidents, including those
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC
mode (if equipped) Ú page 277.
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual also cannot prevent accidents resulting from
WARNING! path does not match the intended path, ESC loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
conditions and driving conditions, influence the condition. dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
especially those that involve leaving the roadway
located in the instrument cluster will start to flash 6
as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The user’s safety or the safety of others.
or striking objects or other vehicles. The
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also  Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
flashes when the TCS is active. If the ESC maintain your vehicle, may change the handling
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to characteristics of your vehicle, and may nega-
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
flash during acceleration, ease up on the tively affect the performance of the ESC system.
or the safety of others.
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Changes to the steering system, suspension,
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the braking system, tire type and size or wheel size
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) prevailing road conditions. may adversely affect ESC performance. Improp-
ESC enhances directional control and stability of erly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modifi-
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the cation or poor vehicle maintenance that
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system
wheel(s) to counteract the above conditions. can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
278 SAFETY
ESC Operating Modes predetermined speed the system will return to ESC
WARNING! “Full Off”.
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.  When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function- If equipped with Off Road+ and if Off Road+ is
ality of ESC, except for the limited slip feature active when "Full Off" mode is enabled by the
ESC On described in the TCS section, has been driver, ESC will not switch to "Partial Off" mode at
“ESC On” is the normal operating mode for the disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will any speed and will remain in "Full Off" mode until
ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, Off Road+ is exited or ESC is re-enabled by the
system will be in this mode. This mode should be the engine power reduction feature of TCS is driver.
used for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
modes should only be used for specific reasons as offered by the ESC system is reduced. WARNING!
noted in the following paragraphs.
 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when  In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
Partial Off the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. reduction and stability features are disabled.
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC Full Off — If Equipped by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emer-
thresholds for activation, which allows for more gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will
wheel spin than normally allowed. The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway or not engage to assist in maintaining stability.
off-road use only and should not be used on any ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator off-highway or off-road use only.
features are turned off. To enter the “Full Off”
Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, mode, push and hold the ESC OFF button for five  The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the prevent the natural laws of physics from
OFF Indicator Light will turn off. engine running. After five seconds, a chime will acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
NOTE: sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the and the “ESC Off” message will display in the tions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents,
push and release of the button will toggle the ESC instrument cluster. To turn ESC on again, including those resulting from excessive
modes. Multiple attempts may be required to momentarily push the ESC OFF button. speed in turns, driving on very slippery
return to “ESC On”. surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
NOTE: prevent collisions.
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial
Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined
speed. When the vehicle speed slows below the
SAFETY 279
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light NOTE: Enabling HDC

And ESC OFF Indicator Light  The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on following conditions must also be met to enable
Light in the instrument cluster will come momentarily each time the ignition is placed in HDC:
on when the ignition is turned to the “ESC the ON position.  The driveline is in 4WD Low.
On” mode. It should go out with the  Each time the ignition is place in the ON posi-  The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
engine running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the turned off previously.  The parking brake is released.
engine running, a malfunction has been detected  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking  The driver door is closed. (If doors are attached,
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after sounds when it is active. This is normal; the then door must be closed. If doors are
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive detached, then driver seat belt must be
driven several miles (km) at speeds greater than following the maneuver that caused the ESC buckled.)
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as activation. Activating HDC
soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected. Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving
if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The 6
set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed
can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC while descending hills during various driving
following summarizes the HDC set speeds:
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively
when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/ controlling the brakes. HDC Target Set Speeds
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during HDC has three states:  P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not not activate
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your activate).  R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but  N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the activation conditions are not met, or driver is  D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
customer has elected to have the actively overriding with brake or throttle
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a  1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
application).
reduced mode.  2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).  3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
280 SAFETY
 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h) Disabling HDC  The cluster icon and switch indicator light will
 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h) HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the flash for several seconds then extinguish when
following conditions occur: HDC disables due to excess speed.
 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
 The driver pushes the HDC switch.  The cluster icon and switch indicator light will
 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h) flash when HDC deactivates due to overheated
 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)  The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low. brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will acti-
 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped  The parking brake is applied. vate again once the brakes have cooled suffi-
 The driver door opens. (Driver door opens if ciently.
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC doors are attached or driver seat belt is
unbuckled if doors are detached.) WARNING!
target speed selection, but will not affect the gear
chosen by the transmission. When actively  The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling HDC the transmission will shift appro- (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds. controlling vehicle speed when descending hills.
priately for the driver-selected set speed and corre- The driver must remain attentive to the driving
 The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
sponding driving conditions. conditions and is responsible for maintaining a
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
Driver Override safe vehicle speed.
 HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
The driver may override HDC activation with Feedback To The Driver
throttle or brake application at any time. Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
Deactivating HDC The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back
HDC switch has an indicator light, which offers
from a complete stop while on an incline. If the
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
driver releases the brake while stopped on an
of the following conditions occur:  The cluster icon and switch indicator light will incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake
 Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or illuminate and remain on solid when HDC is pressure for a short period. If the driver does not
brake application. enabled or activated. This is the normal oper- apply the throttle before this time expires, the
 Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but ating condition for HDC. system will release brake pressure and the vehicle
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).  The cluster icon and switch indicator light will will roll down the hill as normal.
 Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient flash for several seconds then extinguish when
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill the driver pushes the HDC switch but enable
grade. conditions are not met.
 Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
SAFETY 281
The following conditions must be met in order for

HSA to activate: WARNING! WARNING!
 The feature must be enabled. There may be situations where the Hill Start  If you use a trailer brake controller with your
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
 The vehicle must be stopped.
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there
 The parking brake must be off. loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is may not be enough brake pressure to hold
 The driver door must be closed. (If the doors are not a substitute for active driving involvement. It both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
attached, then the door must be closed. If the is always the driver’s responsibility to be the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
doors are detached then the driver's seat belt attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, rolling down an incline while resuming accel-
must be buckled.) and objects, and most importantly brake eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
 The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
under all road conditions. Your complete releasing the brake pedal.
 The gear selection must match vehicle uphill attention is always required while driving to
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward  HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear). parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
follow these warnings can result in a collision or
Also, be certain to place the transmission in
 HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward serious personal injury. 6
PARK (P).
gears. The system will not activate if the trans-
mission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles  Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
Disabling And Enabling HSA collision or serious personal injury.
equipped with a manual transmission, if the
clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, refer to Ú page 207 for
further information. Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
Towing With HSA
conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on
back while towing a trailer. the front brake rotors. It functions when the
windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS
is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
282 SAFETY
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) SSC has three states:  The transmission is in any selection other than
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not PARK.
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It activate)  Your vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
anticipates when an emergency braking situation 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but  The driver door is closed. (If doors are attached,
may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is activation conditions are not met, or driver is the door must be closed. If doors are detached,
released by the driver. The Electronic Brake actively overriding with brake or throttle the driver seat belt must be buckled).
Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake system for application) The set speed for SSC is selectable by the driver,
a panic stop.
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively and can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-.
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) — controlling vehicle speed) Additionally, the SSC set speed may be reduced
If Equipped when climbing a grade and the level of set speed
Enabling SSC reduction depends on the magnitude of grade. The
RSRA will consider the presence of an object in the
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but the following summarizes the SSC set speeds:
rear seat when a rear entry/exit door is opened at
the beginning of each key cycle. To activate, the following conditions must also be met to enable SSC Target Set Speeds
rear door must be open for more than one second SSC:
 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
and the vehicle must be placed in the RUN position  The driveline is in 4WD Low.
 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
within 10 minutes. When the potential presence of  The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
an object is determined and/or otherwise inferred,  3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
a message will appear in the cluster display  The parking brake is released.
 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
reminding driver to check the rear seat(s)  The driver door is closed (If doors are attached,
 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
immediately after key off, accompanied by an alert the door must be closed. If doors are detached,
upon exiting the vehicle. the driver seat belt must be buckled).  6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped  The driver is not applying throttle.  7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
SSC is intended for off-road driving in Activating SSC  8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
4WD Low only. SSC maintains vehicle Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically  9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) — if equipped
speed by actively controlling engine once the following conditions are met:  REVERSE = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
torque and brakes.
 The driver releases the throttle.  NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
 The driver releases the brake.  PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
 The driver seat belt is buckled.
SAFETY 283
SSC Target Set Speeds — If Equipped With Off Driver Override Feedback To The Driver
Road+ The driver may override SSC activation with throttle The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the
 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) or brake application at any time. SSC switch has a lamp that offers feedback to the
 2nd = 0.9 mph (1.5 km/h) Deactivating SSC driver about the state SSC is in.
 3rd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) SSC will be deactivated but remain available if any  The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate
of the following conditions occur: and remain on solid when SSC is enabled or
 4th = 1.5 mph (2.5 km/h) activated. These are the normal operating
 5th = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)  The driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle conditions for SSC.
or brake application.
 6th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)  The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
 The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) several seconds then extinguish when the driver
 7th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h). pushes the SSC switch but enabled conditions
 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)  The vehicle is shifted into PARK. are not met.
 REVERSE = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) Disabling SSC  The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
 NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the several seconds then extinguish when SSC
 PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active following conditions occur: disables due to excess speed. 6
NOTE:  The driver pushes the SSC switch.  The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash then
extinguish when SSC deactivates due to over-
 During SSC, the +/- gear selector input is used  The driveline is shifted out of the 4WD Low.
heated brakes.
for SSC target speed selection but will not affect
 The parking brake is applied.
the gear chosen by the transmission. While
 The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph WARNING!
actively controlling SSC, the transmission will
shift appropriately for the driver-selected set (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds. SSC is only intended to assist the driver in
speed and corresponding driving conditions.  The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph controlling vehicle speed when driving in
 SSC operation is influenced by Off Road+ drive (64 km/h). SSC will exist immediately. off-road conditions. The driver must remain
mode if active. The differences may be notable attentive to the driving conditions and is
 The driver door opens. (Driver door opens if
to the driver as a varying level of aggressive- responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle
doors are attached or driver seat belt is
ness. speed.
unbuckled if doors are detached).
284 SAFETY
Traction Control System (TCS) disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light
Off” or “Full Off” modes. will momentarily illuminate in both outside
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the
WARNING! system is operational. The BSM system sensors
TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
and enters standby mode when the vehicle is in
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
PARK (P).
the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD) functions adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
similarly to a limited slip differential and controls The BSM detection zone covers approximately one
the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS (3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. rearview mirror and extends approximately 10 ft
This will allow more engine torque to be applied to BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of the
the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain I F E QUIPPED vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability Control zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle
(ESC) are in reduced modes. The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or
inside the taillights, to detect highway licensable higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) areas.
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/
side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.  The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
NOTE: outside the detection zones.
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the  The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
trailer tongue weight recommendations change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. There-
Ú page 192. fore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for
both your vehicle and trailer before making a
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e.,
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the
power may be reduced and you may feel the
side of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
Rear Detection Zones
SAFETY 285
Warning Light remaining illuminated the entire The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
time the vehicle is in a forward gear Ú page 207. three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
 The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM
experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of the system will issue an alert during these types of
side mirror warning indicator lamps when a zone entries.
motorcycle or any small object remains at the Entering From The Side
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
(more than a couple of seconds). either side of the vehicle.
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice,
mud, or other road contaminations accumulate on
the rear fascia/bumper where the radar sensors BSM Radar Location (Left Side Shown)
are located. The system may also detect blockage The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
if the vehicle is operated in areas with extremely detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning
low radar returns such as a desert or parallel to a Light located in the outside mirrors in addition to
large elevation drop. If blockage is detected, a sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the
“Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Wipe Rear radio volume Ú page 287.
6
Corners” message will display in the cluster, both
mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP
alerts will not occur. This is normal operation. The
system will automatically recover and resume Side Monitoring
function when the condition clears. To minimize
system blockage, do not block the area of the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are
located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it clear of road
contaminations.
Warning Light Location

286 SAFETY
Entering From The Rear The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle
either side and enter the rear detection zone with in adjacent lanes Ú page 431.
a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Overtaking/Approaching
Opposing Traffic
Rear Monitoring
WARNING!
Overtaking Traffic
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle
The BSM system is not designed to detect
remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 sec-
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
onds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
difference in speed between the two vehicles is Overtaking/Passing check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert shoulder, and use your turn signal before
will not illuminate.
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally serious injury or death.
the system may alert on such objects. This is
normal operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
SAFETY 287
Rear Cross Path (RCP) NOTE: Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be with both visual and audible alerts when a
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the detected object is present. Whenever an audible
of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming
sensors are blocked by other structures or alert is requested, the radio is muted.
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will driver.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in
WARNING!
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver. the appropriate side view mirror based on a
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup detected object. If the turn signal is then activated,
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a and it corresponds to an alert present on that side
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
lot situation. Drivers must be careful when sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check object are present on the same side at the same
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots on) will also be muted. 6
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death. NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
RCP Detection Zones Blind Spot Modes When the system is in RCP, the system shall
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both Blind Spot has three selectable modes of respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving operation that are available in the Uconnect detected object is present. Whenever an audible
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum system. alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects Blind Spot Alert Lights Only hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state
moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph always requests the chime.
(32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations. When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the side view mirror based on a detected object.
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible However, when the system is operating in Rear
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
288 SAFETY
Blind Spot Alert Off instrument cluster display), and may apply a haptic completely, the system will hold the vehicle at
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no warning in the form of a brake jerk, to warn the standstill for two seconds and then release the
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. brakes.
systems. The warnings are intended to provide the driver
with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the
NOTE: potential collision.
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the NOTE:
vehicle is started the previously stored mode will FCW monitors the information from the forward
be recalled and used. looking sensors as well as Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
Door Removal
forward collision. When the system determines
When either the front driver or passenger door is that a forward collision is probable, the driver will
removed, the instrument cluster will display “Blind be provided with audible and visual warnings as
Spot Temporarily Unavailable” and the BSM well as a possible haptic warning in the form of a
system will disable. While the system will continue brake jerk. FCW Message
to indicate whatever blind spot mode it was
If the driver does not take action based upon these When the system determines a collision with the
previously in within the Uconnect system, no visual
progressive warnings, then the system will provide vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
or audible alerts will be provided. As long as the
a limited level of active braking to help slow the warning message will be deactivated Ú page 431.
doors are removed, the instrument cluster will
vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. NOTE:
provide the “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable”
If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and
pop-up as a reminder that the system is disabled  The minimum speed for FCW activation is
the system determines that the driver intends to
every time the ignition is cycled. 3 mph (5 km/h).
avoid the collision by braking but has not applied
Upon re-installation of both doors, the system will sufficient brake force, the system will compensate  The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
resume functionality based on the personalized and provide additional brake force as required. other than vehicles such as guardrails or sign
mode selected. posts based on the course prediction. This is
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
FORWARD C OLLISION WARNING (FCW) below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide
and functionality.
the maximum braking possible to mitigate the
WITH MITIGATION — I F EQUIPPED potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
The FCW with Mitigation system provides the driver Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle
with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
SAFETY 289
 It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent Turning FCW On Or Off front using audible/visual warnings and it
such misuse of the system, after four Active applies autonomous braking.
The FCW setting menu can be adjusted through
Braking events within a key cycle, the Active  The system will retain the last setting selected
the Uconnect Settings Ú page 207.
Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until by the driver after ignition shutdown.
the next key cycle.  To turn the FCW system on, select between
“Only Warning” and “Warning and Braking” in FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
 The FCW system is intended for on-road use
the FCW menu. The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec-  Select “OFF” in the FCW menu to turn the FCW programmable through the Uconnect system
essary warnings to the surroundings. system off. Ú page 207.
 FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as NOTE:  Far
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects  When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to  When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects warn the driver of a possible collision with the “Far” setting, this allows the system to warn
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicle in front. the driver of a possible more distant colli-
vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.  When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system sion with the vehicle in front using audible/
 FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavail- from warning the driver of a possible collision visual warnings.
able screens. with the vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”,  More cautious drivers that do not mind
6
“FCW OFF” will be displayed in the instrument frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
WARNING! cluster display. NOTE:
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended  When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW prevents the system from providing limited FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
detect every type of potential collision. In rare active braking, or additional brake support if the  Medium
situations, the system may react to surrounding driver is not braking adequately in the event of
a potential frontal collision.  When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
objects such as tunnels, bridges, guardrails, etc.
“Medium” setting, this allows the system to
The driver has the responsibility to avoid a  When FCW status is set to “Warning and warn the driver of a possible collision with
collision by controlling the vehicle via braking, Braking”, this allows the system to warn the the vehicle in front using audible/visual
steering, and acceleration. Unintended braking driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in warnings.
reactions can always be overridden by pressing
down hard on the accelerator. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or
death.
290 SAFETY
 Near Service FCW Warning inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
 When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
“Near” setting, this allows the system to The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle
displays:
warn the driver of a possible closer collision is driven. This is normal and there should be no
 ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required adjustment for this increased pressure.
with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings.  Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required See Ú page 391 on how to properly inflate the
 This setting provides less reaction time than This indicates there is an internal system fault. vehicle’s tires.
the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
allows for a more dynamic driving experi- conditions, have the system checked by an if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
ence. authorized dealer. warning limit for any reason, including low
 More dynamic or aggressive drivers that TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM temperature effects and natural pressure loss
want to avoid frequent warnings may prefer through the tire.
this setting.
(TPMS) The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
FCW possible collision warnings experienced. vehicle recommended cold placard pressure. the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the
NOTE: low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring
FCW Limited Warning System Warning Light) illuminates, you must
The alert warning on the cluster will stay on until
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW the tire is inflated to the placard pressure. increase the tire pressure to the recommended
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” The tire pressure will vary with temperature by Warning Light to turn off.
momentarily, there may be a condition that limits approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).
This means that when the outside temperature NOTE:
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
drivable under normal conditions, the active decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
braking may not be fully available. Once the above the recommended cold placard pressure in
condition that limited the system performance is inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
no longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see an at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
authorized dealer. (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
SAFETY 291
The system will automatically update and the NOTE:

TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the system CAUTION!
 The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle  The TPMS has been optimized for the original care and maintenance, or to provide warning of
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures a tire failure or condition.
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive and warning have been established for the tire
 The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
this information. size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure, unless
For example, your vehicle may have a system operation or sensor damage may
your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Fill Alert or
recommended cold (parked for more than three result when using replacement equipment
Selectable Tire Fill Alert feature.
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on  Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a aftermarket wheels, and may contribute to a causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the poor overall system performance. Customers failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). are encouraged to use Original Equipment ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the Manufacturer (OEM) wheels to ensure TPMS vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause feature operation.  The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi  Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility 6
(193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will sensor to become inoperable. After using an rate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation
turn off only after the tires are inflated to the aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended has not reached the level to trigger illumination
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure that you take your vehicle to an authorized of the TPMS Warning Light.
value Ú page 431. dealer to have your sensor function checked.  Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
NOTE: pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
 After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need tire pressure in the tire.
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
above the recommended cold placard pressure in valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off. sensor.
292 SAFETY
System Operation  Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light XX" message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LOW automatically update, the pressure values in the
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted
PRESSURE WARNINGS graphic display in the instrument cluster will return
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in to their original color, and the TPMS Warning Light
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
the instrument cluster and a chime will will turn off.
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the
receiver module. sound when tire pressure is low in one or NOTE:
more of the four active road tires. In When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
addition, the instrument cluster will display a "Tire to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
Low" message for a minimum of five seconds, an above the recommended cold placard pressure in
"Inflate to XX" message and a graphic showing the order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
pressure values of each tire with the low tire The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
pressure values in a different color. 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
SERVICE TPMS WARNING

When a system fault is detected, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display and then remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster
NOTE:
will display a "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM"
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
message for a minimum of five seconds and then
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to
and to maintain the proper pressure.
indicate which sensor is not being received.
The TPMS consists of the following components: Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Pressure Warning
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
 Receiver module Should this occur, you should stop as soon as providing the system fault still exists. If the system
 Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors possible and inflate the tires with low pressure fault no longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will
 Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(those in a different color in the instrument cluster no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
messages, which display in the instrument graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a
cluster placard pressure value as shown in the "Inflate to pressure value will display in place of the dashes.
SAFETY 293
A system fault can occur due to any of the 3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
following: 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn off the TPMS and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The
 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving Warning Light as long as none of road tires are instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TIRE
next to facilities emitting the same radio below the low pressure warning threshold. PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then display
frequencies as the TPMS sensors pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
TPMS DEACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED ignition cycle the "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
 Installing some form of aftermarket window SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed as
tinting that affects radio wave signals The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel long as no system fault exists.
 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS
housings TIRE FILL ALERT
sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and
 Using tire chains on the vehicle tire assemblies on your vehicle. This feature notifies the user when the placard tire
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the
 Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not tire.
sensors
equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System The customer may choose to disable or enable the
Vehicles With A Full-Size Matching Spare
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes Tire Fill Alert feature in the customer settings menu
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a matching above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, of the Uconnect system. 6
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it has the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
a Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor, NOTE:
seconds and then remain on. The instrument
and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure  Only one tire can be filled at a time when using
cluster will display the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
Monitoring System (TPMS) when swapped the Tire Fill Alert system.
SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in
with a low pressure road tire. place of the pressure values.  The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
2. In the event that the matching full-size spare existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire, system is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TIRE
the next ignition switch cycle will still show the PRESSURE SYSTEM” message in the instrument The system will be activated when the system
TPMS Warning Light to be on, a chime to cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the detects an increase in tire pressure while filling the
sound, an Inflate to XX message to appear in pressure values. tire. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode with
the instrument cluster, and the graphic display the transmission in PARK for vehicles equipped
will still show the low tire pressure value in a To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and
with an automatic transmission. For vehicles
different color. tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with
equipped with a manual transmission, the parking
TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to
brake must be applied.
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
294 SAFETY
NOTE: NOTE: You may also store pressure values chosen for
It is not required to have the engine running to The Tire Fill Alert feature is set to “Disabled” every each axle in the Uconnect system application as
enter Tire Fill Alert mode. time the ignition is turned to “OFF”. To re-enable preset pressure values. Up to two sets of preset
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the the Tire Fill Alert feature at the next ignition “RUN” pressure values can be stored in the Uconnect
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard lamps state, the customer must re-enable the feature system for the front and rear axle. Once you select
do not come on while inflating the tire, the Tire through use of the customer settings in the radio. the tire pressures for the front and rear axles that
Pressure Monitoring System sensor may be in an you want to inflate or deflate to, you can begin
inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor
SELECTABLE TIRE FILL ALERT (STFA) — inflating or deflating one tire at a time.
signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle IF EQUIPPED NOTE:
may need to be moved slightly forward or The STFA system is an optional feature that is The STFA system will only support inflating or
backward. included as part of the normal Tire Fill Alert system. deflating one tire at a time.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire The system is designed to allow you to select a The system will be activated when the TPMS
pressure display screen will be displayed in the pressure to inflate or deflate the vehicle's front and receiver module detects a change in tire pressure.
instrument cluster. rear axle tires to, and to provide feedback while The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode, with the
inflating or deflating the vehicle's tires. transmission in PARK in vehicles with an automatic
Operation:
NOTE: transmission, and in NEUTRAL with the parking
 The horn will chirp once to let the user know brake engaged in vehicles with a manual
To use the STFA feature, the Tire Fill Alert feature
when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches transmission. The hazard lamps will come on to
must be enabled through use of the customer
recommended pressure. confirm the vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
settings in the radio.
 The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over- In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
filled and will continue to chirp every five located in the apps menu of the Uconnect system, pressure screen will be displayed in the instrument
seconds if the user continues to inflate the tire. you will be able to select a pressure setting for both cluster. If the hazard lamps do not come on while
 The horn will chirp once again when enough air the front and rear axle tire pressures by scrolling inflating or deflating the tire, the Tire Pressure
is let out to reach proper inflation level. through a pressure range from XX to 15 psi in 1 psi Monitoring System sensor may be in an
 The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is increments for each axle setting. inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor
then underinflated and will continue to chirp XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values for signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle
every five seconds if the user continues to the front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle may need to be moved slightly forward or
deflate the tire. placard pressure label. backward.
SAFETY 295
Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are I MPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 7. The driver and front passenger seats should
inflated/deflated. The horn will chirp under the be moved back as far as practical to allow the
following STFA states: Please pay close attention to the information in front air bags room to inflate.
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
1. The horn will chirp once when the selected 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
pressure is reached to let you know when to vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
as safe as possible.
stop inflating or deflating the tire. occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
Here are some simple steps you can take to into the space between occupants and the
2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag: door and occupants could be injured.
over-inflated or over-deflated.
1. Children 12 years old and under should 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
3. The horn will chirp once again when enough air
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a modified to accommodate a disabled person,
is added or removed to reach proper selected
vehicle with a rear seat. see Ú page 428 for customer service contact
pressure level.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the information.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or WARNING!
Some of the most important safety features in your belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
vehicle are the restraint systems: position Ú page 314.  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in 6
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
OCCUPANT R ESTRAINT SYSTEMS 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
FEATURES front passenger seat, move the seat as far
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
 Seat Belt Systems back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 314.  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
 Child Restraints child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
behind them or under their arm.
Some of the safety features described in this does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
5. You should read the instructions provided with rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
section may be standard equipment on some
your child restraint to make sure that you are
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
using it properly.
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
296 SAFETY
SEAT BELT S YSTEMS outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder active when the outboard front passenger seat is
a poor driver and could cause a collision that Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
includes you. This can happen far away from home front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front animal or other items are placed on the outboard
or on your own street. passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a BeltAlert Warning Sequence restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
times.
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the NOTE:
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
(BeltAlert) BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
the driver and outboard front seat on and remain on until the driver and outboard
Light will remain on until the seat belts are front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
passenger (if equipped with outboard buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and Lap/Shoulder Belts
their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/ are buckled. The driver should instruct all with lap/shoulder belts.
RUN position. occupants to buckle their seat belts. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
Initial Indication Change Of Status very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime equipped with outboard front passenger seat with you under normal conditions. However, in a
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
SAFETY 297
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown WARNING! WARNING!
out of the vehicle.  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat  A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
WARNING! including the driver, should always wear their won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
 Relying on the air bags alone could lead to seat belts whether or not an air bag is also but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
more severe injuries in a collision. The air provided at their seating position to minimize part of your seat belt as low as possible and
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you the risk of severe injury or death in the event keep it snug.
properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t of a crash.
 A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even  Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
though you have air bags. your injuries in a collision much worse. You Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
 In a collision, you and your passengers can might suffer internal injuries, or you could without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
suffer much greater injuries if you are not even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte- instructions to wear your seat belt safely and dealer immediately and have it fixed.
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you to keep your passengers safe, too.
 A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be 6
 Two people should never be belted into a buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
sure you and others in your vehicle are single seat belt. People belted together can portion could ride too high on your body,
buckled up properly. crash into one another in a collision, hurting possibly causing internal injuries. Always
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no you.
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri- matter what their size.
 A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
ously injured or killed. properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and Wear your seat belt snugly.
seat belts. (Continued)
(Continued)
298 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

WARNING!
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
 A seat belt that is worn under your arm is and adjust the seat.
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
worn under the arm can cause internal inju- seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
your strongest bones will take the force in a necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
collision. your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
 A shoulder belt placed behind you will not 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
protect you from injury during a collision. You low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
and shoulder belt are meant to be used too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
together. belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
 A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a under the seat belt in a collision.
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi- Pulling Out The Latch Plate
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
collision, or if you have questions regarding “click.”
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
Positioning The Lap Belt
SAFETY 299
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage NOTE:
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt away
shoulder belt. in the upward position without pushing or
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button button to release the anchorage, and move it up or squeezing the release button. To verify the
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically down to the position that serves you best. shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
retract to its stowed position. If necessary, on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow into position.
the seat belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure  Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted your injuries in a collision much worse. You
lap/shoulder belt. might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
the anchor point.
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and 6
to keep your passengers safe, too.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt  Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
Adjustable Upper Anchorage and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate. As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded shoulder belt.
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the position, and if you are taller than average, you will
slot at the top of the latch plate. prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher  Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
position. After you release the anchorage button, the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is locked in position.  Always make all seat belt height adjustments
no longer twisted. when the vehicle is stationary.
300 SAFETY
Seat Belt Extender Seat Belts And Pregnant Women from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
restraints.
when the webbing is fully extended and the
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if NOTE:
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
occupant, it must be removed. pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
WARNING! replaced immediately.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
 ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically Energy Management Feature
required in order to properly fit the original Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of with an Energy Management feature that may help
Extender if, when worn, the distance between an accident is reduced for the mother and the further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
buckle and the center of the occupant’s body Position the lap belt snug and low below the assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
is LESS than 6 inches. abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. controlled manner.
 Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
can increase the risk of serious injury or death from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender behind the back or under the arm. (ALR)
when the lap belt is not long enough and only Seat Belt Pretensioner The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
use in the recommended seating positions. are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender The front outboard seat belt system is equipped Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
when not needed. with pretensioning devices that are designed to restraint system. The figure below illustrates the
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a locking feature for each seating position
collision. These devices may improve the Ú page 322.
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
SAFETY 301
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
completely in this case and then carefully pull out belt.
only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s 2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until the entire seat belt is extracted.
until you hear a "click." 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Locking Mode.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Locations Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
(Two-Door Models) restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
and under should always be properly restrained in allow it to retract completely to disengage the
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode. 6
WARNING!
WARNING!
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger  The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
front air bag can cause death or serious injury switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
to a child 12 years or younger, including a feature or any other seat belt function is not
child in a rear-facing child restraint. working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Locations  Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
(Four-Door Models) could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
If the passenger seating position is equipped with does not have a rear seat, do not transport a (Continued)
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
302 SAFETY
 Knee Impact Bolsters turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
WARNING! momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
 Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
 Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
 Seat Belt Buckle Switch initial startup.
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.  Supplemental Side Air Bags The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
The locked mode is only used to install  Front and Side Impact Sensors illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
 Seat Belt Pretensioners
that have a harness for restraining the child. the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
 Seat Track Position Sensors
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
 Occupant Classification System is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
SUPPLEMENTAL R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS
Air Bag Warning Light following occurs, have an authorized dealer
(SRS) service the air bag system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Some of the safety features described in this monitors the readiness of the electronic  The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
section may be standard equipment on some parts of the air bag system whenever the during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer. position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position  The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on four to eight-second interval.
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller and the air bags will not inflate.  The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and The ORC contains a backup power supply system tently or remains on while driving.
interconnecting wiring associated with the that may deploy the air bag system even if the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your NOTE:
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag prior to deployment.
System Components: related gauges are not working, the Occupant
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In
Air Bag System Components instrument panel for approximately four to eight this condition the air bags may not be ready to
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, dealer service the air bag system immediately.
 Air Bag Warning Light
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
 Steering Wheel and Column detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
 Instrument Panel
SAFETY 303
Front Air Bags

WARNING! WARNING!
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your belts for both the driver and front passenger. The  Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt ment panel during front air bag deployment
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the restraint systems. The driver front air bag is could cause serious injury, including death. Air
light does not come on as a bulb check when the mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start passenger front air bag is mounted in the ably extending your arms to reach the steering
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have instrument panel, above the glove compartment. wheel or instrument panel.
an authorized dealer service the air bag system The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
immediately. embossed on the air bag covers. front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light to a child 12 years or younger, including a
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is child in a rear-facing child restraint.
detected, which could affect the  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
6
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
illuminate on the instrument panel. The does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations Features
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle 2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters driver and front passenger air bags. This system
immediately Ú page 128. provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
304 SAFETY
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to show that Front Air Bag Operation
during an impact that requires air bag deployment. the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
A low energy output is used in less severe deploy during a collision.
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more NOTE: air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
severe collisions. When the front passenger seat is empty or when injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or very light objects are placed on the seat, the air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy including some that may produce substantial
detects whether the driver or front passenger seat even though the Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) vehicle damage — for example, some pole
belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated. collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air collisions.
Bags. WARNING!
On the other hand, depending on the type and
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or  No objects should be placed over or near the location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
front passenger seat track position sensors that air bag on the instrument panel or steering crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front wheel because any such objects could cause that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Air Bags based upon seat position. harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
This vehicle has an Occupant Classification enough to cause the air bag to inflate. deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
System (OCS) in the front passenger seat. The OCS  Do not put anything on or around the air bag by themselves are not good indicators of whether
is designed to activate or deactivate the Passenger covers or attempt to open them manually. You or not an air bag should have deployed.
Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the may damage the air bags and you could be Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
occupant’s seated weight. It is designed to injured because the air bags may no longer be collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag functional. The protective covers for the air position, away from an inflating air bag.
for an unoccupied seat and for occupants whose bag cushions are designed to open only when
seated weight classifies them in a category other When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
the air bags are inflating.
than a properly seated adult. This could be a child, detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
teenager, or even an adult.  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
more severe injuries in a collision. The air non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Indicator bags work with your seat belt to restrain you bags.
Light (an amber light located on the overhead properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
sports bar) tells the driver and front passenger The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even passenger side of the instrument panel separate
when the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is though you have air bags.
deactivated. The PAD Indicator Light illuminates and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
SAFETY 305
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain located underneath the front passenger seat. The
the driver and front passenger. Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will be
Front Passenger Seat sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from
the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part most probable classification. The OCM
of a Federally regulated safety system for this communicates this information to the ORC. The
vehicle. It is designed to activate or deactivate the ORC uses the classification to determine whether
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending on it should activate or deactivate the Passenger Seated Properly
the occupant’s seated weight. It is designed to Advanced Front Air Bag. In order for the OCS to
deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag operate as designed, it is important for the front The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the
for an unoccupied seat and for occupants whose passenger to be seated properly and properly Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS
seated weight classifies them in a category other wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers estimates that:
than a properly seated adult. This could be a child,
teenager, or even an adult.
are:  The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has 6
 Sitting upright
very light objects in it.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)  The front passenger seat is occupied by a
Consists Of The Following:  Facing forward
rear-facing child restraint.
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)  Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
 The front passenger seat is occupied by a child,
comfortably on or near the floor
 Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and including a child seated in a forward-facing child
Sensor located in the front passenger seat  Sitting with their back against the seat back and restraint or booster seat.
the seat back in an upright position
 Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator  The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
Light – an amber light located on the overhead passenger, including a child or small adult.
sports bar  The front passenger is not properly seated or his
 Air Bag Warning Light or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period
 Passenger Seat Belt of time.
306 SAFETY
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System

Front Passenger Advanced Air Bag Disabled
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Status
Indicator Light (“PAD”) Status
Unoccupied seat* Unbuckled NOT ILLUMINATED DEACTIVATED
Unoccupied seat*Buckled “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Grocery bags, heavy briefcases, and other
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
relatively light objects
Rear-facing child restraint** “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
restraint or booster seat**
Small adult “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” DEACTIVATED
Properly seated adult NOT ILLUMINATED ACTIVATED
* When the front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even
though the PAD System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated.
** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and
never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
SAFETY 307
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD) child restraint system, the PAD Indicator Light may comfortably on or near the floor, and with their
Indicator Light not be illuminated, even though the Passenger back against the seatback.
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. This can 5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger
(PAD) Indicator Light (an amber light located on the occur if the child restraint is lighter than the lightest remain in this seated position for two to three
overhead sports bar) tells the driver and front weight necessary to illuminate the PAD Indicator minutes after restarting the vehicle.
passenger when the Passenger Advanced Front Air Light. NEVER assume the Passenger Advanced Front
Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indicator light Air Bag is deactivated unless the PAD Indicator Light
is illuminated with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG WARNING!
illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”
to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag OFF.”  If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated
will not deploy during a collision. When the front NOTE: for an adult passenger, have an authorized
passenger seat is empty or when very light objects If the seat belt is buckled for an empty seat, the dealer service the air bag system immediately.
are placed on the seat and the seat belt is PAD Indicator Light will illuminate. Failure to do so may cause serious injury or
unbuckled, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag If The PAD Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An death. If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated
will not deploy even though the PAD indicator light Adult Passenger: with the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF,"
is NOT illuminated. the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not
If an adult passenger is seated in the front
The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated passenger seat and the PAD Indicator Light is
deploy in the event of a collision. 6
when an adult passenger is properly seated in the illuminated, the passenger may be sitting  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front passenger seat. The driver and adult improperly. Follow the steps below to allow the front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
passenger should verify that the PAD Indicator OCS to detect the adult passenger’s seated weight front air bag can cause death or serious injury
Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in to activate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag: to a child 12 years or younger, including a
the front passenger seat. If an adult is not seated child in a rear-facing child restraint.
properly, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag 1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult
may deactivate and the PAD Indicator Light will be passenger step out of the vehicle.  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
illuminated. 2. Remove any extra materials from the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
passenger seat, such as cushions, pads, seat child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated and does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be covers, seat massagers, blankets, extra
clothing, etc. rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
deactivated for most properly seated and restrained
children in the passenger seat and for most properly 3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.  Children 12 years or younger should always
installed child restraint systems. However, under ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of
certain conditions, even with a properly installed with a rear seat.
the seat, with the passenger’s feet
308 SAFETY
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults) increased seated weight, which may result in  Accessories that may change the seated weight
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small deactivation or activation of the Passenger on the front passenger seat are attached to the
adult, occupies the passenger seat, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not front passenger seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag may be deactivated. mean that the OCS is working improperly.  Anything that may decrease or increase the
Therefore, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on front passenger’s seated weight.
may or may not be activated for a lighter weight the front passenger seat may result in deactivation
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag causing The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
passenger, including a small adult (depending on probable classification. If an occupant in the front
size) who is seated in the passenger seat. This serious injury or death. Increasing the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant
does not mean that the OCS is working improperly. may provide an output signal to the OCS that is
seat may result in activation of the Passenger
The driver and passenger must always use the PAD Advanced Front Air Bag. Examples of improper different from the occupant’s properly seated
Indicator Light as a determination of whether the front passenger seating include: weight input, for example:
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is activated or
deactivated. If the PAD Indicator Light is  The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
illuminated with the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
OFF” when an adult is in the front passenger seat, rest or instrument panel).
have the passenger reposition his or her body in  The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
the seat until the PAD Indicator Light goes out. turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the  The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger upright position.
Advanced Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event  The front passenger carries or holds an object
of a collision. while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front  Objects are lodged under the front passenger Not Seated Properly
Passenger’s Seated Weight On The Front seat.
Passenger Seat
 Objects are lodged between the front passenger
The front passenger’s seated weight must be seat and center console.
properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death. The OCS determines the most probable
classification of the occupant that it detects. The
OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
SAFETY 309
WARNING!
 Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position, your
back against the seatback, sitting upright,
facing forward, in the center of the seat, with
your feet comfortably on or near the floor.
 Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may
Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly seated
WARNING! weight input, which may result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
 If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
The Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate 6
seated improperly, the occupant may provide
an output signal to the OCS that is different whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front
from the occupant’s properly seated weight passenger seat status.
input. This may result in serious injury or death A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation
in a collision. of the air bag system. If the Air Bag Warning
(Continued) Light does not come on, or stays on after you
start the vehicle, or it comes on as you drive, take
Not Seated Properly
the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service
immediately.
310 SAFETY
passenger, the OCS components must function as

WARNING! designed. Do not make any modifications to the WARNING!
 Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your front passenger seat components, assembly, or to  Unapproved modifications or service proce-
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the needs service for any reason, take the vehicle to related components, seat cover, or cushion
light does not come on as a bulb check when an authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved may inadvertently change the air bag deploy-
the ignition is first turned on, stays on after seat accessories may be used. ment in case of a frontal collision. This could
you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you The following requirements must be strictly result in death or serious injury to the front
drive, have an authorized dealer service the followed: passenger if the vehicle is involved in a colli-
air bag system immediately. sion. A modified vehicle may not comply with
 Do not modify the front passenger seat
 Placing an object on the floor under the front required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
assembly or components in any way.
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from dards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
 Do not use prior or future model year seat Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
working properly, which may result in serious
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
injury or death in a collision. Do not place any  If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
objects on the floor under the front passenger for persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
Always use the correct seat cover and cushion
seat. rized dealer.
specified for the vehicle.
 If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the  Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
PAD Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning aftermarket seat cover or cushion. Knee Impact Bolsters
Light will illuminate to show that the
 Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat. The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deacti-
of the driver and front passenger, and position the
vated. Should this occur, the Passenger  At no time should any Supplemental Restraint
front occupants for improved interaction with the
Advanced Front Air Bag will remain deacti- System (SRS) component or SRS related
front air bags.
vated until the fault is cleared. This indicates component or fastener be modified or replaced
that you should take the vehicle to an autho- with any part except those which are approved
WARNING!
rized dealer for service immediately. by FCA US LLC.
 Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect Passenger Advanced  Do not mount any accessories to the knee
Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
properly classify the seated weight of a front seat citizen band radios, etc.
SAFETY 311
Supplemental Side Air Bags SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
high force that it could injure occupants if they are collisions, including some collisions at certain
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) collisions where the front air bags deploy.
are located in the outboard side of the front seats. WARNING! Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or Do not use accessory seat covers or place restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the than it takes to blink your eyes.
outboard side of the seats. performance could be adversely affected and/or
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant objects could be pushed into you, causing WARNING!
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to serious injury.  Occupants, including children, who are up
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
belts and body structure. seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area 6
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular in an infant or child restraint.
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity  Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid priate) are necessary for your protection in all
the ORC in determining the appropriate response collisions. They also help keep you in position,
to impact events. The system is calibrated to away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag pants must wear their seat belts properly and
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air sit upright with their backs against the seats.
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact Children must be properly restrained in a child
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle the size of the child.
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
the space between the occupant and the door. The or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
312 SAFETY
 Knee Impact Bolsters  As the air bags deflate, you may see some
WARNING! smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
 Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
 Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean by-product of the process that generates the
 Seat Belt Buckle Switch non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.  Supplemental Side Air Bags airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
 Front and Side Impact Sensors nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
 Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
deployment could cause you to be severely  Seat Belt Pretensioners
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
injured or killed.  Seat Track Position Sensors continues, see your doctor. If these particles
 Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead  Occupant Classification System settle on your clothing, follow the garment
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain If A Deployment Occurs
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags The front air bags are designed to deflate deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt immediately after deployment. the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
even though you have Side Air Bags. NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli- WARNING!
NOTE: sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior the air bag system.
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. If you do have a collision which deploys the air air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
Air Bag System Components bags, any or all of the following may occur: belt retractor assemblies replaced by an autho-
 The air bag material may sometimes cause abra- rized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant
NOTE: Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
sions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
similar to friction rope burns or those you might NOTE:
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor.
nents listed below:  Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) They are not permanent and normally heal trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi- ment.
 Air Bag Warning Light
cantly within a few days, or if you have any blis-  After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
 Steering Wheel and Column
tering, see your doctor immediately. to an authorized dealer immediately.
 Instrument Panel
SAFETY 313
Enhanced Accident Response System  Electric park brake ground near the engine compartment and fuel
 Automatic transmission gear selector tank before resetting the system and starting the
In the event of an impact, if the communication
engine.
network remains intact, and the power remains  Horn
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
 Front wiper performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response  Headlamp washer pump (if equipped) be towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected
System perform the following functions: NOTE: and to have the Enhanced Accident Response
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to System reset.
 Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
 Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
the START or ON/OFF position and remove the key Maintaining Your Air Bag System
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
equipped).
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in WARNING!
 Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has the engine compartment and on the ground near
power.  Modifications to any part of the air bag system
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
 Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as resetting the system and starting the engine. If
could be injured if the air bag system is not
long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo- 6
from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
Response System. accident, reset the system by following the
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
 Unlock the power door locks.
procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
contact an authorized dealer.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any instrument panel. Do not modify the front
of these other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident Response System fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
Enhanced Accident Response System: Reset Procedure aftermarket side steps or running boards.
 Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for  It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door additional information. air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
 Cut off battery power to the: In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response who works on your vehicle that it has an air
System functions after an event, the ignition switch bag system.
 Engine
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN (Continued)
 Electric Motor (if equipped) to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel
 Electric power steering leaks in the engine compartment and on the
 Brake booster
314 SAFETY
WARNING!
 How various systems in your vehicle were oper- CHILD R ESTRAINTS
ating;
 Do not attempt to modify any part of your air Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
 Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden- all times, including babies and children. Every
belts were buckled/fastened;
tally or may not function properly if modifica- state in the United States, and every Canadian
 How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the province, requires that small children ride in
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover  How fast the vehicle was traveling. can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way These data can help provide a better Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
(including removal or loosening/tightening of understanding of the circumstances in which buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an crashes and injuries occur. crash statistics, children are safer when properly
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
NOTE:
approved seat accessories may be used. If it is
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a WARNING!
necessary to modify the air bag system for
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
persons with disabilities, contact an autho- In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
rized dealer. a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However, to hold even an infant on your lap could become
Event Data Recorder (EDR) other parties, such as law enforcement, could so great that you could not hold the child, no
This vehicle is equipped with an event data combine the EDR data with the type of personally matter how strong you are. The child and others
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to identifying data routinely acquired during a crash could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
record, in certain crash or near crash-like investigation. in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting To read data recorded by an EDR, special the child’s size.
a road obstacle, data that will assist in equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
The EDR is designed to record data related to manufacturer, other parties, such as law
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short enforcement, that have the special equipment,
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The can read the information if they have access to the
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data vehicle or the EDR.
as:
SAFETY 315
There are different sizes and types of restraints for Before buying any restraint system, make sure that NOTE:
children from newborn size to the child almost it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable  For additional information, refer to http://
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check Safety Standards. You should also make sure that www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. 1–888–327–4236
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
 Canadian residents should refer to Transport
and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the Canada’s website for additional information:
labels attached to the child restraint. https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Children who are two years old or younger and who Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Infants and Toddlers have not reached the height or weight limits of their Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
child restraint vehicle
Children who are at least two years old or who have Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point 6
Small Children outgrown the height or weight limit of their Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
rear-facing child restraint vehicle
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
Larger Children child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
Children Too Large for Child Restraints outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster
vehicle
seat
316 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
WARNING! child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
Safety experts recommend that children ride
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the the vehicle by the seat belt.
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle WARNING!
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant does not have a rear seat, do not transport a  Improper installation can lead to failure of an
carriers and convertible child seats. rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the a collision. The child could be badly injured or
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth Older Children And Child Restraints killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
until they reach the weight or height limit of the turer’s directions exactly when installing an
Children who are two years old or who have
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used infant or child restraint.
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.  After a child restraint is installed in the
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight Forward-facing child seats and convertible child vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers seats used in the forward-facing direction are for or rearward because it can loosen the child
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who children who are over two years old or who have restraint attachments. Remove the child
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
than at least two years old. Children should remain their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children position. When the vehicle seat has been
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
height allowed by their convertible child seat. harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
 When your child restraint is not in use, secure
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
WARNING! it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
All children whose weight or height is above the anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
front air bag can cause death or serious injury seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with or seatbacks and cause serious personal
to a child 12 years or younger, including a knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while injury.
child in a rear-facing child restraint. the child’s back is against the seatback, they
(Continued)
SAFETY 317
Children Too Large For Booster Seats 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
shoulder between the neck and arm? the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
Children who are large enough to wear the
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
touching the child’s thighs and not the correctly.
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
their back is against the seatback, should use the stomach?
WARNING!
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s trip? Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
seat belt alone: under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
If the answer to any of these questions was “no”,
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
back of the vehicle seat? which may result in serious injury or death. A
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
child must always wear both the lap and
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
the front of the vehicle seat while the child is the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
still sitting all the way back? or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints 6

Combined Weight of Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Anchors LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether
Restraint Seat Belt Only
Only + Top Tether Anchor Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs
X X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs
X X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
318 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren LATCH Positions For Installing Child
(LATCH) Restraint System Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions (Four-Door Models)

LATCH Label Lower Anchorage Symbol
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
LATCH Positions (Two-Door Models)
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The Lower Anchorage Symbol
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
SAFETY 319
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once
child restraint?
the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together
No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster
seat owner’s manual for more information.
Four Door Only: You can install child restraints with flexible
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the Two Door Models – No
lower anchors in the center position. The inner anchorages are
inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating Center Seating Position
18.5 inches (484 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints
positions? Four Door Models – Yes
with rigid lower anchors in the center position.
6
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
No LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
LATCH anchorage?
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH
anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
Yes if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See
passenger seat?
your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Two Door Models — None
Two Door Models – No Four Door — The center head restraint can be removed if it
Can the rear head restraints be removed?
Four Door Models – Yes interferes with the installation of the child restraint.
For further information, see Ú page 48.
320 SAFETY
NOTE: Locating The LATCH Anchorages

If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint inter- The lower anchorages are round bars
feres with the installation of the child restraint, the that are found at the rear of the seat
head restraint may be folded and the child seat cushion where it meets the seatback.
installed in front of it (Two-Door Models). They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
WARNING!
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
Always make sure the head restraint is in its between the seatback and seat cushion. If your
upright position when the seat is to be used by vehicle is equipped with anchorage symbols on the
an occupant who is not in a child restraint. seatback, they will be located just above the lower
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its anchorages. LATCH Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Two-Door Models:
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located on the back of the seat, near the
floor.
LATCH Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded

1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
Tether Strap Anchorages (Two-Door Models)

SAFETY 321
Four-Door Models: Center Seat LATCH Always follow the directions of the child restraint
There are tether strap anchorages behind each manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Two-Door Models:
rear seating position located on the back of the Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
seat. WARNING! described here.
This vehicle does not have a center seating To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
position. Do not use the center lower LATCH Restraint
anchorages to install a child seat in the center of If the selected seating position has a Switchable
the back seat. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
Four-Door Models: Ú page 322 to check what type of seat belt each
seating position has.
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower
attachments in the center seating position. Only 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
install this type of child restraint in the outboard on the tether strap of the child seat so that
seating positions. Child restraints with flexible, you can more easily attach the hooks or
Tether Strap Anchorages (Four-Door Models) webbing mounted lower attachments can be connectors to the vehicle anchorages. 6
installed in any rear seating position. 2. Place the child seat between the lower
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
anchorages for that seating position. If the
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
WARNING! second row seat can be reclined, you may
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child more than one child restraint. If you are
can be moved forward and rearward in the
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will installing LATCH-compatible child restraints next
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether to each other, you must use the seat belt for the
rear-most position to make room for the child
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the center position. You can then use either the
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for
to allow more room for the child seat.
after it is attached to the anchorage. installing child seats in the outboard positions.
Please see Ú page 321 for typical installation
instructions.
322 SAFETY
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the behind the child restraint, route the seat belt WARNING!
selected seating position. through the child restraint belt path and then  Improper installation or failure to properly
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
it to the top tether anchorage. See children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not the restraint. The child could be badly injured
Ú page 325 for directions to attach a tether toys and that they should not play with them. or killed.
anchor.  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
WARNING!
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child directions exactly when installing an infant or
restraint rearward and downward into the  Improper installation of a child restraint to the child restraint.
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac- The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
infant or child restraint.
the belt path. It should not move more than portion of the seat belt tight around the child
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.  Child restraint anchorages are designed to restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
withstand only those loads imposed by clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
(ALR) Seat Belt: circumstances are they to be used for adult retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
items or equipment to the vehicle. a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
into the retractor.
being used by other occupants or being used to
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure Installing Child Restraints Using The Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the Vehicle Seat Belt in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child (ALR)” Ú page 300 for additional information on
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured ALR.
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s Please see the table below and the following
of a lap/shoulder belt.
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the sections for more information.
SAFETY 323
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing

Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations

(Four-Door Models)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
(Two-Door Models)
6
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
324 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
Weight limit of the Child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended
Restraint
attach a forward facing child restraint? weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
Yes restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also
passenger seat?
allows contact.
Two Door — None
Two Door Models – No Four Door — The center head restraint can be removed if it
Can the rear head restraints be removed?
Four Door Models – Yes interferes with the installation of the child restraint.
For further information, see Ú page 48.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR
No
the belt path of the child restraint? retractor.
NOTE: Installing A Child Restraint With A

If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint inter- Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
feres with the installation of the child restraint, the
(ALR):
head restraint may be folded and the child seat
installed in front of it (Two-Door Models). Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
WARNING! of a lap/shoulder belt.
Always make sure the head restraint is in its WARNING!
upright position when the seat is to be used by
an occupant who is not in a child restraint.  Improper installation or failure to properly
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
lowered position could result in serious injury or the restraint. The child could be badly injured
death in a collision. 1 — Folded Headrest or killed.
2 — Child Restraint
(Continued)
SAFETY 325
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
WARNING! a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is Tether Anchorage
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s now in the Automatic Locking mode.
directions exactly when installing an infant or 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it WARNING!
child restraint. is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
1. Place the child seat in the center of the step 5. including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
seating position. If the second row seat can 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or tighten the lap portion around the child seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a restraint while you push the child restraint that seating position, located behind the top of
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved rearward and downward into the vehicle seat. the vehicle seat. For the location of approved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may tether anchorages in your vehicle, see
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
wish to move it to its rear-most position to Ú page 318.
the seating position has a top tether
make room for the child seat. You may also
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
move the front seat forward to allow more
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
room for the child seat.
Ú page 325 for directions to attach a tether
6
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the anchor.
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path.
the belt path. It should not move more than
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
hear a “click.”
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
allow the webbing to retract back into the
326 SAFETY
1. Look behind the seating position where you Center Tether Attachment — Four-Door
plan to install the child restraint to find the Without Center Armrest
tether anchorage. If the seat can be moved,
you may need to move the seat forward to 1. If adjustable, lower the adjustable center
provide better access to the tether head restraint to the full down position.
anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage 2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and
for that seating position, move the child head restraint.
restraint to another position in the vehicle if
one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor Tether Strap Mounting
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped (Four-Door Models With Center Armrest)
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint, and where possible, route the 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
tether strap under the head restraint and restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
between the two posts. If not possible, lower in the diagram.
the head restraint and pass the tether strap 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
around the outboard side of the head restraint. the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Strap Mounting
(Four-Door Models Without Center Armrest)
WARNING!
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
 An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
restraint to the center tether anchorage
lead to increased head motion and possible
located on the back of the seat.
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
secure a child restraint top tether strap. the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
 If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear

seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models) you remove slack in the strap.
SAFETY 327
SAFETY TIPS Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if

equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
TRANSPORTING P ASSENGERS secured by seat belts. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
CONNECTED VEHICLES have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
AREA. Privacy of any wireless and wired communications dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully Program facility for inspection.
WARNING! intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer
Air Bag Warning Light
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
may cause serious injury or death. Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard four to eight seconds as a bulb check
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” when the ignition switch is first placed in
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
Ú page 137.
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli- not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
sion, people riding in these areas are more WARNING! driving, have the system inspected at an
likely to be seriously injured or killed. authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the 6
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and breached. It may be possible that vehicle
seat belts. stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes
systems, including safety related systems, could on intermittently or remains on while driving, have
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could an authorized dealer service the vehicle
and using a seat belt properly. occur that may result in an accident involving immediately. See Ú page 295 for further
serious injury or death. information.
TRANSPORTING P ETS Defroster
SAFETY CHECKS Y OU S HOULD M AKE Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about I NSIDE THE VEHICLE place the blower control on high speed. You should
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during be able to feel the air directed against the
Seat Belts windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
panic braking or in a collision.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking your defroster is inoperable.
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
328 SAFETY
Floor Mat Safety Information

WARNING! WARNING!
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the  ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your  NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
operation of the pedal assemblies. Only use a floor vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
mat that is securely attached using the floor mat be properly attached and secured to your change the position of the floor mat and may
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, cause interference with the accelerator,
interfere with the pedal assemblies or impair safe only use a FCA approved floor mat for the brake, or clutch pedals.
operation of your vehicle in other ways. specific make, model, and year of your
 If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
vehicle.
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
WARNING!  ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer- secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the each pedal to check for interference with the
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to re-install the floor mats.
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent check for interference. If your floor mat inter-
 It is recommended to only use mild soap and
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
 ALWAYS securely attach your floor always check your floor mat has been properly
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO installed and is secured to your vehicle using
trunk.
NOT install your floor mat upside down the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull  ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat the passenger’s side floor area.
fasteners on a regular basis.  ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
 ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING into the driver’s side floor area when the
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before vehicle is moving. Objects can become
installing any other floor mat. NEVER trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
install or stack an additional floor mat pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
on top of an existing floor mat. control.
(Continued) (Continued)
SAFETY 329
PERIODIC S AFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD EXHAUST GAS authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken,
MAKE OUTSIDE T HE V EHICLE damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
WARNING!
Tires Open seams or loose connections could permit
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or odorless. Breathing it can make you system each time the vehicle is raised for
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. unconscious and can eventually poison you. To lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the CARBON M ONOXIDE W ARNINGS
lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires  Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. confined areas any longer than needed to
WARNING!
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
Lights Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
 If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift-
Have someone observe the operation of brake Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
lights and exterior lights while you work the monoxide poisoning:
windows are closed and the climate control
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT  Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain 6
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
use the recirculation mode. carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas,
Door Latches which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed
 If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked
the engine running, adjust your heating or
vehicle with the engine running for an extended
Fluid Leaks cooling controls to force outside air into the
period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking with the engine running for more than a short
for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if period, adjust the ventilation system to force
gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid The best protection against carbon monoxide entry fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
leaks are suspected, the cause should be located into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
 Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
and corrected immediately. engine exhaust system.
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be any abnormal conditions repaired promptly.
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an open.
330
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will WARNING!
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on continue to operate even though the ignition is ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the instrument panel below the climate controls. placed in the OFF position. the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
NOTE: the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers and assume all risks related to the use of the
may wear down your battery. features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber Ú page 431.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button  The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
data) or 4G (data) network, which comes as a
Flashers. When the button is activated, all
built-in function. Other Uconnect services will
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
only be operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button
service is active and you are connected to an
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning Assist And SOS Buttons operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
Flashers.
1 — Assist Button Assist Call
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it 2 — SOS Button The Assist Button is used to automatically connect
only when your vehicle is disabled or signaling a you to any one of the following support centers:
safety hazard warning for other motorists. If equipped, the overhead console contains an  Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
Assist and an SOS button. need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 331
you’ll be connected to someone who can help. may transmit the following important vehicle mine if additional help is needed. Once the
Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle information to an SOS operator: SOS operator opens a voice connection with
you’re driving and its location. Additional fees  Indication that the occupant placed an SOS the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
may apply for roadside assistance. Call should be able to speak with you or other
 SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle vehicle occupants and hear sounds occur-
 The vehicle brand ring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
 The last known GPS coordinates of the system will attempt to remain connected
 Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all vehicle with the SOS operator until the SOS oper-
other vehicle issues. ator terminates the connection.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
 Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for operator through the vehicle audio system to 5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
Radio, Phone and NAV issues. determine if additional help is needed. appropriate emergency responders and
SOS Call provide them with important vehicle
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead WARNING! information and GPS coordinates.
console. ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
NOTE: the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on WARNING!
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
 If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
system initiates a call to an SOS operator. To conditions or location), do not wait for voice 7
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All
button on the overhead console or press the occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termi- accident involving serious injury or death.
and move to a safe location.
nation of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED
light on the overhead console.  Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
NOTE:
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and operable network and GPS antennas. You
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as could prevent operable network and GPS
SOS buttons on the overhead console will turn authorized by the subscriber.
green once a connection to an SOS operator signal reception, which can prevent your
 Once a connection is made between the vehicle from placing an emergency call. An
has been made.
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper- operable network and GPS signal reception is
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an ator, the SOS operator may be able to open required for the SOS Call system to function
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system a voice connection with the vehicle to deter- properly.
(Continued)
332 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
WARNING! of the following may occur at the time the factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
 The SOS Call system is embedded into the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of or stop the SOS Call system operation. These
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after- each ignition cycle: include, but are not limited to, the following
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s  The light located within the Assist and SOS factors:
electrical system. This may prevent your buttons will continuously illuminate red.  The ignition is in the OFF position
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an
 The Device Screen will display the following  The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
emergency call. To avoid interference that can
message “Vehicle device requires service.  The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
Please contact an authorized dealer.” are damaged during a crash
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your  An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle  The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the device requires service. Please contact an disconnected during a vehicle crash
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE authorized dealer.”
 LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON
WARNING! Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavail-
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
able or obstructed
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND  Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT  Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
you will not have SOS Call services. If the Rear-
OPERATE. facility
view Mirror light is illuminated, have an autho-
rized dealer service the SOS Call system  Operator error by the SOS operator
 Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to fail immediately.  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network conges-
when you need it. You could be injured if the  The Occupant Restraint Control module turns tion
air bag system is not there to help protect you. on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument  Weather
panel if a malfunction in any part of the  Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
SOS Call System Limitations system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning tunnels
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
service the Occupant Restraint Control system
system capabilities.
immediately.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
NOTE:
WARNING! Changes or modifications not expressly approved WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to by the party responsible for compliance could void  Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the user's authority to operate the equipment. is on a jack.
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility Automatic SOS — If Equipped  The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that changing tires only. The jack should not be
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
can immediately connect you with help in the event used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
use the features and applications when it is safe
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci-
your provided radio supplement for complete surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
dent involving serious injury or death.
information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING PREPARATIONS FOR J ACKING

CAUTION!
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, WARNING! slippery areas.
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
 Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
WARNING!
and wipe the mirror clean.
enough off the road to avoid the danger of Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
being hit when operating the jack or changing the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far 7
NOTE: the wheel. enough off the road to avoid being hit when
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho- operating the jack or changing the wheel.
 Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
rized by the subscriber. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
 Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE you. You could be crushed. Never put any part 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. 3. Apply the parking brake.
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take
GPS signal reception, which can prevent your it to a service center where it can be raised on 4. Shift the automatic transmission into
vehicle from placing an emergency call. An oper- a lift. PARK (P), or a manual transmission into
able LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network REVERSE (R).
(Continued)
connection and a GPS signal is required for the
SOS Call system to function properly.
5. Turn the ignition OFF. J ACK L OCATION

6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear
diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For
cargo area. To remove jack and tools proceed as
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
follows:
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
1. Lift the load floor in the cargo area.
Hardware Storage Cover Latch

3. Turn the plastic wing nut counterclockwise to
loosen the jack from the storage bin.
Wheel Blocked Example

Load Floor Handle
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when NOTE:
the vehicle is being lifted or raised. The load floor can be removed for easier access by
pulling the load floor handle up and directly
rearward.
2. Remove the hardware storage cover by
pinching the latch on the left side and pulling
upward. Plastic Wing Nut Location
4. Remove tool kit and assemble tools.
SPARE T IRE R EMOVAL WARNING!

1. To remove the spare tire from the carrier,  Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
remove the tire cover, if equipped. to be raised.
2. Remove the Rear Camera Cover by turning the
 Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
lock bolt counterclockwise with the #T40 torx
on a jack.
head driver and ratchet from the supplied tool
kit.  Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
 Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
Removing The Spare Tire jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
J ACKING INSTRUCTIONS raised on a lift.
 Only use the jack in the positions indicated
WARNING! and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to  If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
help prevent personal injury or damage to your careful of motor traffic.
vehicle: 7
Unlock Rear Camera Cover  To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
 Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
3. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench the edge of the roadway as possible before the valve stem facing the ground.
turning them counterclockwise. If equipped, raising the vehicle.
remove the locking lug nut with the lock key  Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
(located in the glove box) turning it counter-
clockwise.  Apply the parking brake firmly and shift an
automatic transmission in PARK; a manual
transmission to REVERSE.
(Continued)
Jack Warning Label Assembled Jack And Tools Jack Lift Box Usage
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from NOTE: 4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of
the stored location. If your vehicle comes with factory equipped the vehicle. Place the jack under the axle tube,
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts 35 inch (88.9 centimeters) tires, a jack lift block is as shown. Do not raise the vehicle until you are
by turning them to the left one turn while the provided in the rear cargo area. The jack lift block sure the jack is fully engaged.
wheel is still on the ground. is used to provide higher ground clearance when
changing a flat or spare tire. When placing the jack
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect
lift block under the jack, be sure the bottom of the
the jack handle driver to the extension, then to
jack fits securely inside of the raised edges of the
the lug wrench.
block.
Front Lifting Point

NOTE:
Keep the jack and tools aligned while raising the
WARNING!
vehicle to prevent tool damage. Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
CAUTION! jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on only enough to remove the tire.
locations other than those indicated.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Mount the spare tire on the axle.
Rear Lifting Point 8. Install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts
clockwise.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
7
Front Jacking Location
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to

the counterclockwise, and remove the jack.
Rear Jacking Location
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw on the wrench while at the end of the handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the tire for increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts
just clears the surface and enough clearance in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been
is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tightened twice Ú page 417. If in doubt about
tire lift provides maximum stability. the correct tightness, have them checked with
a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at
a service station.
11. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut NOTE:
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all WARNING! When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel. A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision the manufacturer's operating instructions and
12. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks. or hard stop, could endanger the occupants of precautions.
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
13. Secure the jack and tools in their proper
spare tire in the places provided. PREPARATIONS FOR J UMP START
locations.
14. Secure the damaged wheel/tire on the spare
tire carrier. Torque down lug nuts and locking JUMP STARTING
lug nut.
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
15. Return the lock bolt to the lock position on the jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
camera cover by turning the lock clockwise battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable
using the provided #40 torx head driver and battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
ratchet. Then, reinstall the camera cover by dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the
slipping it over the camera/tire carrier until it procedures in this section carefully.
snaps into place.
WARNING!
Supplemental Battery – If Equipped
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause WARNING!
personal injury.
 Only use the positive battery post on the main
battery to jump start your vehicle. Serious
CAUTION! injury or death could result if you attempt to
jump start using the supplemental battery.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage  Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
Lock Bolt Location starter motor, alternator or electrical system may use a booster battery or any other booster
occur. source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do
not allow cable clamps to touch each other.
(Continued)
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover

WARNING! over the positive (+) battery post.
 Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso- 4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
hands after handling. cable’s reach, apply the parking brake and
 If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is make sure the ignition is OFF.
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the WARNING!
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting. Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
Positive (+) Battery Post – Diesel Engine could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right NOTE:
rear of the engine compartment. The positive (+) battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to WARNING!
the post.
 Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start
system, it will be equipped with two batteries whenever the hood is raised. It can start
Ú page 165. anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be 7
injured by moving fan blades.
See the following steps to prepare for jump
starting:  Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
transmission into PARK (P) (manual
seriously injured.
transmission in NEUTRAL) and turn the
Positive (+) Battery Post – Gas Engine ignition OFF.  Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
accessories. which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
J UMP S TARTING P ROCEDURE 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A booster battery, let the engine idle a few
WARNING! “ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted minutes, and then start the engine in the
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as vehicle with the discharged battery.
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground
could result in personal injury or property must be away from the battery and the fuel CAUTION!
damage due to battery explosion. injection system.
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit,
wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle
CAUTION!
engine.
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper
vehicle or the discharged vehicle. cables in the reverse sequence.
NOTE: Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cables are not contacting each other or either cable from the engine ground of the vehicle
vehicle while making connections. Jump Starting Label with the discharged battery.
Connecting The Jumper Cables 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper WARNING! jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged booster battery.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
vehicle. 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) electrical spark could cause the battery to cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the explode and could result in personal injury. battery.
booster battery. 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster discharged vehicle.
battery.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the positive

(+) post of the discharged vehicle. CAUTION! WARNING!
NOTE: Driving with a hot cooling system could damage You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
If frequent jump starting is required to start your your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
vehicle you should have the battery and charging HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the If you see or hear steam coming from under the
system tested at an authorized dealer. vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
CAUTION! the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear system pressure cap when the radiator or
continuous chimes, turn the engine off immedi- coolant bottle is hot.
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power out- ately and call for service.
lets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without NOTE:
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will dis- There are steps that you can take to slow down an In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
charge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or impending overheat condition: transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as
prevent the engine from starting.  If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling available.
system and turning the A/C off can help remove
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS this heat.
WARNING!
7
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be  You can also turn the temperature control to Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
serviced by an authorized dealer. maximum heat, the mode control to floor and parking brake before activating the Manual Park
the blower control to high. This allows the heater Release. In addition, you should be seated in the
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and driver’s seat with your foot firmly on the brake
the potential for overheating by taking the
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling pedal when activating the Manual Park Release.
appropriate action.
system. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
 On the highways — slow down. your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
 In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmission parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow
into NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
speed. an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park

Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the manual park release cover located
in front of the gear selector, to access the
release tether strap.
Tether Strap Released Position

4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake To Reset The Manual Park Release:
pedal.
1. Pull upward on the tether strap, releasing it
5. Pull the tether strap up until the release lever from the “locked” position.
locks into place in the vertical position. The
vehicle is now out of PARK (P) and can be 2. Lower the Manual Park Release lever
moved. Release the parking brake only when downward and to the left, into its original
the vehicle is securely connected to a tow position.
Manual Park Release Cover
vehicle.
3. Fish the tether strap up through the opening in
the console base.
Reinstalling Tether
3. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the NOTE:

console, and reinstall the cover. CAUTION!
 For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts
between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only  Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
NOTE: be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) lead to transmission overheating and failure.
When the lever is locked in the release position the or less. Whenever the transmission remains in Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
access cover cannot be reinstalled. NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE (D) five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE or REVERSE (R). overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or
transmission failure during prolonged efforts
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or  Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
to free a stuck vehicle.
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF”
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 277.  When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
clear the area around the front wheels. For Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC between DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE,
vehicles with automatic transmission, push and OFF button again to restore “ESC On” mode. do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph
hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then, (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and WARNING!
 Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
REVERSE (R) (with automatic transmission) or
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces fast may lead to transmission overheating and
SECOND (2) gear and REVERSE (R) (with manual
generated by excessive wheel speeds may failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not
transmission), while gently pressing the
accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) 7
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. while in gear (no transmission shifting occur-
pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than ring).
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 sec-
engine.
onds continuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described Ú page 198.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground 4WD MODELS
 Automatic Transmission in PARK (P)
 Manual Transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL)
Flat Tow NONE
 Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
 Tow in Forward direction
Front NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to If you must use the accessories (wipers,
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition CAUTION!
and other equipment designed for this purpose, must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC  Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. position. Vehicle damage may occur.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions  When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,
or other towing device to main structural members on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK
of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated do not attach to front or rear suspension
(P) in order to move the vehicle Ú page 341. components. Damage to your vehicle may
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed. result from improper towing.
FOUR W HEEL DRIVE M ODELS WITHOUT THE KEY FOB

FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels Special care must be taken when the vehicle is
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow towed with the ignition in the OFF mode. The only
the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the approved method of towing without the key fob is
vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is
dolly. necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on I F E QUIPPED
the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are Rear Tow Hook
and the transmission is in PARK (P) (for automatic mounted in the front and the rear fascia/bumpers.
transmissions) or in gear NOT in NEUTRAL, for NOTE:
manual transmissions) Ú page 198. For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
CAUTION! damage to the vehicle. Always use an appropriately
rated tow strap.
 Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
WARNING! 7
transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel  Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
lift is used when towing. Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
 Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission  Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
Front Tow Hooks hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged,
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New causing serious injury.
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue (EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an event data
a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced record data that will assist in understanding how a
hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing.
Accident Response System. vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
You could damage your vehicle. Tow straps are
recommended when towing the vehicle, chains This feature is a communication network that or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
may cause vehicle damage. takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 313. deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 314.
347
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING — On non-instrument cluster display equipped
vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash in the instrument
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
 Check the engine oil level.
GASOLINE ENGINE cluster odometer and a single chime will sound,
 Check the windshield washer fluid level.
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil  Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
change indicator system. The oil change indicator An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled unusual wear or damage, rotate at the first sign
system will remind you that it is time to take your of irregular wear.
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
by someone other than an authorized dealer, the  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil message can be reset by referring to the steps brake master cylinder, and power steering, and
change indicator message will illuminate. This described under Instrument Cluster Display for fill as needed.
means that service is required for your vehicle. further information Ú page 120.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,  Check the function of all interior and exterior
trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient NOTE: lights.
temperatures will influence when the “Change Oil” Under no circumstances should oil change
or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
within the next 500 miles (805 km). whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
On vehicles equipped with instrument cluster
customers.
8
display, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed
and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil
change is necessary.
348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE P LAN
Refer to the maintenance plan for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

 Change oil and filter.
 Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
 Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
 Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
 Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
 Inspect exhaust system.
 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions; replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
 Inspect all door latches for presence of grease; reapply if necessary.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First):
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, rear suspension, and replace
X X X X X X X
if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance 8
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace Spark Plugs – 2.0L Engine.1 X X
Replace spark plugs – 3.6L Engine.1 X

Flush and replace the engine, intercooler (if equipped) coolant at
X X
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First):
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of
the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police,
delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or X X X X X
more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
Change transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the
X X
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
Change front and rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for police, taxi,
X X X
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
 You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE Engine Oil Filter Replacement Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Residual oil in the housing may spill from the  Check engine oil level
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil housing when the new filter is installed if the
change indicator system. The oil change indicator  Check windshield washer fluid level
residual oil is not either removed from the housing
system will remind you that it is time to take your or enough time has not elapsed to allow the oil to  Check the tire pressures and look for unusual
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. drain back into the engine. When servicing the oil wear or damage
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil filter on this engine, open the filter cap  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
change indicator message will illuminate. This approximately six turns until the cap o-ring is brake master cylinder, and fill as needed
means that service is required for your vehicle. visible and stop. Wait five minutes with the cap in  Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, this position to allow dirty engine oil to drain back
trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient into the engine. After five minutes, the cap and
temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change filter assembly can be removed and discarded.
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle When installing the new oil filter cartridge
serviced as soon as possible, within the next assembly, ensure the cap is tightened to the
500 miles (805 km). specified torque to prevent low oil pressure
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change conditions.
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
by someone other than an authorized dealer, to
reset the message Ú page 120.
NOTE: 8
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or
12 months, whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE P LAN — D IESEL FUEL UP TO B5 BIODIESEL

Refer to the maintenance plan for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

 Change oil and filter.
 Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank.
 Drain water from fuel filter assembly.
 Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
 Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
 Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
 Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
 Inspect exhaust system.
 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions; replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
At Every Second Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
 Change fuel filter.
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your
X X X X X X X
vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Drain water from fuel filter assembly. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 8
Under normal conditions the diesel fuel filter should be replaced every other oil change and
must not exceed 20,000 miles (32,000 km) if using diesel fuel up to B5. If the vehicle is
Replace fuel filters and drain water from the fuel filter being used in severe operating conditions, or in certain geographical areas of the country
assembly. (Pennsylvania, New York, Ohio, Maryland, West Virginia, Arkansas, Oklahoma, Kansas, Iowa,
Missouri and Nebraska) due to fuel cleanliness issues, it is recommended to replace the fuel
filter every oil change and must not exceed 10,000 miles.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or

X X
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Replace accessory drive belt(s). X
Change transfer case fluid. X
WARNING!
 You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
ADDITIONAL M AINTENANCE — B6 TO B20 BIODIESEL

NOTE:
 Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or six months, whichever comes first when using biodiesel blends
greater than 5% (B5).
 The owner is required to monitor mileage for B6-B20 biodiesel, the automatic oil change indicator system does not reflect the use of biofuels.
 Fuel filter change interval is maintained at every second oil change. This is especially important with biodiesel usage.
For more information on using biodiesel Ú page 421.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L GASOLINE ENGINE
1 — Battery 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap

2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 10 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap
3.6L GASOLINE ENGINE
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Cap — If Equipped
2 — Battery 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 11 — Motor Generator Unit Coolant Pressure Cap— If Equipped
6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
3.0L DIESEL E NGINE
1 — Battery 6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
CHECKING OIL L EVEL Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at NOTE:
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil Use care when filling under hood fluids such as
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil level to the high end of the range marking. engine oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the minimize spillage onto the top of the engine. Any
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel CAUTION! excess fluid that is spilled onto the top of the
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is engine should be removed using compressed air
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could or an absorbent cloth.
is shut off.
damage your engine.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground WARNING!
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Commercial windshield washer solvents are
There are four possible dipstick types: ADDING W ASHER FLUID flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
 Crosshatched zone. The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and must be exercised when filling or working around
the rear window washer (if equipped) is shared. the washer solution.
 Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
The fluid reservoir is located in the engine
 Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level at
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the MAINTENANCE-F REE BATTERY
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
range. washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
 Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some battery. You will never have to add water, and
MIN and the MAX ends of the range. washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and periodic maintenance is not required.
NOTE: wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help blade
performance. WARNING!
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer  Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
NOTE:
that meets or exceeds the temperature range of battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
Use care when filling under hood fluids such as
your climate. This rating information can be found clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
engine oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to
on most washer fluid containers. attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
minimize spillage onto the top of the engine. Any
on skin, flush the area immediately with large
excess fluid that is spilled onto the top of the
amounts of water Ú page 338.
engine should be removed using compressed air
or an absorbent cloth. (Continued)
WARNING! CAUTION! PRESSURE WASHING

 Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep  It is essential when replacing the cables on Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not the battery that the positive cable is attached pressure washer is not recommended.
use a booster battery or any other booster to the positive post and the negative cable is
source with an output greater than 12 Volts. attached to the negative post. Battery posts CAUTION!
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
other. are identified on the battery case. Cable parts and connections however, the pressures
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts generated by these machines is such that
 Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
and free of corrosion. complete protection against water ingress
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
 If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
cannot be guaranteed.
hands after handling.
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
 Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
and the supplemental batteries must be
starting voltage. An authorized dealer has the qualified service
disconnected to completely de-energize the
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
12 Volt electrical system.  Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
perform all service operations in an expert
 Serious injury or death could result if you do manner. Service Manuals are available which
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how to include detailed service information for your
disconnected to completely de-energize the
properly disconnect, see an authorized dealer. vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
12 Volt electrical system.
attempting any procedure yourself. 8
 If the negative battery cables are not isolated NOTE:
properly it can cause a potential power spike Intentional tampering with emissions control
or surge in the system, resulting in damage to systems may void your warranty and could result in
essential electrical components. civil penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING! CAUTION! ENGINE OIL FILTER

You can be badly injured working on or around a Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which the chemicals can damage your engine. Such filter at every engine oil change.
you have the knowledge and the proper damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Engine Oil Filter Selection
equipment. If you have any doubt about your Limited Warranty. A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
to a competent mechanic. varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
Synthetic Engine Oils
filters should be used.
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils,
ENGINE OIL only use synthetic API approved engine oils. ENGINE AIR CLEANER F ILTER
Engine Oil Selection Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 348
correct API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity for gasoline engines or Ú page 352 for diesel
For engine oil selection Ú page 424.
grade numbers should not be used. engines.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Materials Added To Engine Oil NOTE:
Approved Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified the addition of any additives (other than leak maintenance interval if applicable.
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
trademark oils. engineered product and its performance may be WARNING!
The API Starburst trademark certifies impaired by supplemental additives. The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
Filters case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine such removal is necessary for repair or
and 5W-40 engine oil.
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a engine compartment before starting the vehicle
problem to the environment. Contact an with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
authorized dealer, service station or governmental etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
agency for advice on how and where used oil and serious personal injury.
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection 2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access
the engine air cleaner filter. CAUTION!
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality 3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter
Mopar® filters should be used. housing assembly. cover lid screws or damage may result.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement— Gasoline Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals Replacement — Diesel Engine
as shown in the Maintenance Schedule in this Follow the recommended maintenance intervals
section. as shown in the Maintenance Schedule in this
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal section.
1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
cleaner filter cover using a suitable tool. 1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air
cleaner filter cover using a suitable tool.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation

NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air 8
cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air cleaner
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover filter inspection surface facing downward.
2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Fasteners
fasteners using a suitable tool. 1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Fasteners
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access 2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover
the engine air cleaner filter. fasteners using a suitable tool.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
housing assembly. CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter
cover lid screws or damage may result.
DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR

FILTER — D IESEL ENGINE Fuel/Water Separator Filter
The fuel/water separator housing is located inside 1 — Retainers
the left frame rail in front of the fuel tank. The best
2 — Fuel Filter Protective Cover
access to this water drain valve is from under the
vehicle.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter If water is detected in the water separator while the
CAUTION! engine is running, or while the ignition switch is in
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
the ON position, the Water In Fuel Indicator Light
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter  Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter
will illuminate and an audible chime will be heard.
when the engine is running.
At this point you should stop the engine and drain
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation  Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving the water from the filter housing.
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate
NOTE: container.
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or
debris is present before replacing the engine air
cleaner filter. If necessary remove the fuel filter protective cover
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the to access the water drain valve.
housing assembly with the engine air cleaner
filter inspection surface facing downward.
NOTE:
Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids CAUTION!
from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately  Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a
discarded, can present a problem to the envi- new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris
ronment. Contact an authorized dealer, service could be introduced into the fuel filter during
station, or government agency for advice on recy- this action. It is best to install the filter dry and
cling programs and for where used fluids and allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel
filters can be properly disposed of in your area. system.
If more than two ounces or 60 ml of fuel have been
drained, follow the directions for Priming If The 1. Ensure engine is turned off.
Fuel/Water Separator Filter Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel Ú page 364.
2. Remove the fuel filter protective cover to
1 — Water In Fuel Drain Valve FUEL F ILTER REPLACEMENT — D IESEL access the fuel filter assembly.
E NGINE
Within 10 minutes of vehicle shutdown, turn the
NOTE:
filter drain valve (located on the bottom of the filter
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufac-
housing) counterclockwise to drain fuel/water;
turer’s filtration and water separating require-
allow the accumulated water to drain. Leave the
ments can severely impact fuel system life and reli-
drain valve open until all water and contaminants
ability. We recommend you use Mopar® Fuel Filter.
have been removed. When clear fuel is visible,
Must meet 3 micron rating.
close the drain valve by turning it clockwise. 8
Upon proper draining of the water from fuel filter CAUTION!
assembly, the Water In Fuel Indicator Light will
 Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
remain illuminated for approximately 10 seconds. Fuel Filter Assembly
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate
If the water was drained while the engine was
container. 1 — Retainers
running, the Water In Fuel Indicator Light may
remain on for approximately three minutes. (Continued) 2 — Fuel Filter Protective Cover
3. Place drain pan under the fuel filter assembly. 11. Install the new fuel filter cartridge onto the
4. Open the water drain valve, and let any cap.
accumulated water and fuel drain. 12. Insert the cap and filter into the housing with
5. Close the water drain valve. clockwise rotation, use a socket to tighten.
13. Push the ignition switch twice without your foot
on the brake to place vehicle in RUN position.
This will activate the in tank fuel pump for
approximately 30 seconds. Repeat this
process twice to prime the fuel system. Start
the engine using the Normal Starting
Fuel Filter Assembly procedure. After engine start, verify the fuel
1 — Fuel Filter Cap filter cap does not leak.
2 — Socket Adapter
PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT
8. Remove the used fuel filter cartridge from the
OF FUEL — DIESEL E NGINE
Fuel Filter Assembly
cap and dispose of according to your local
1 — Water Drain Valve regulations. WARNING!
9. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the cap and Do not open the high pressure fuel system with
6. Wipe clean the underside of the filter housing housing. the engine running. Engine operation causes
to prevent contamination from entering fuel high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel spray can
system during service. CAUTION! cause serious injury or death.
7. Remove the fuel filter cap and filter from the Take care when handling the new fuel filter to
housing using a socket. Rotate counter- prevent contamination from entering the fuel 1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the tank,
clockwise for removal. system. approximately 2 to 5 gal (8L to 19L).
2. Push ignition switch twice without your foot on
10. Lubricate o-ring on the cap with clean engine brake to put vehicle in RUN position. This will
oil. activate the in tank fuel pump for approxi-
mately 30 seconds. Repeat this process twice
to prime the fuel system.
3. Start the engine using the Normal Starting NOTE: Refer to Instrument Cluster Display for further
procedure Ú page 143.  Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can information Ú page 120.
negatively impact the fuel filter's ability to sepa-
rate water from the fuel, resulting in high pres- WARNING!
CAUTION!
sure fuel system corrosion or damage. A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
The starter motor will engage for approximately
 In addition, commercially available fuel addi- over materials that can burn. Such materials
30 seconds at a time. Allow two minutes
tives are not necessary for the proper operation might be grass or leaves coming into contact
between cranking intervals.
of your diesel engine. with your exhaust system. Do not park or oper-
ate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust sys-
 For extreme cold conditions, "Mopar® Premium
NOTE: tem can contact anything that can burn.
Diesel Fuel Treatment" is recommended to
The engine may run rough until the air is forced
assist with cold starting.
from all the fuel lines.
I NTERVENTION R EGENERATION DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID
WARNING!
STRATEGY — M ESSAGE PROCESS FLOW Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending simply by the name of its active component,
agent. They can be unstable under certain This engine meets all required diesel engine UREA—is a key component of Selective Catalytic
conditions and be hazardous or explosive when emissions standards. To achieve these emissions Reduction (SCR) systems, which help diesel
mixed with diesel fuel. standards, your vehicle is equipped with a vehicles meet stringent emission regulations. DEF
state-of-the-art engine and exhaust system. These is a liquid reducing agent that reacts with engine
systems are seamlessly integrated into your exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to convert
CAUTION! vehicle and managed by the Powertrain Control smog-forming Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) into harmless 8
Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine nitrogen and water vapor.
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline, combustion to allow the exhaust system’s catalyst
the use of these fuels can cause damage to the For further information Ú page 424.
to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM)
fuel system. pollutants, with no input or interaction on your part.
Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert you
to additional maintenance required on your vehicle
or engine.
ACCESSORY D RIVE BELT INSPECTION Some conditions can be caused by a faulty

component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
WARNING! should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
 Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive
Belt replacement on some models requires the
belt with vehicle running. use of special tools, we recommend having your
 When working near the radiator cooling fan, vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any AIR CONDITIONER M AINTENANCE
time regardless of ignition mode. You could be For best possible performance, your air conditioner
injured by the moving fan blades. Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt) should be checked and serviced by an authorized
 You can be badly injured working on or around Conditions that would require replacement: dealer at the start of each warm season. This
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which service should include cleaning of the condenser
 Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
you have the knowledge and the proper equip- from belt body)
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability should also be checked at this time.
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a  Rib or belt wear
competent mechanic.  Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two
WARNING!
ribs)  Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small  Belt slips cants approved by the manufacturer for your
cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the air conditioning system. Some unapproved
 “Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
belt, from rib to rib, are considered normal. These refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
correct position on pulley)
are not a reason to replace a belt. However, cracks injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
 Belt broken lubricants can cause the system to fail,
running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any
belt with cracks running along a rib must be  Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation) Information Book, located in your owner’s
excessive wear, frayed cords, or severe glazing. information kit, for further warranty informa-
NOTE: tion.
Identify and correct problem before new belt is
installed. (Continued)
Cabin Air Filter 3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.

WARNING!
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure
 The air conditioning system contains refrig- WARNING! the air filter access door to the HVAC housing.
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
personal injury or damage to the system, vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter
to be disconnected should be done by an removed and the blower operating, the blower
experienced technician. can contact hands and may propel dirt and
debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
Do not use chemical flushes in your air condition- behind the glove compartment. Perform the
ing system as the chemicals can damage your air following procedure to replace the filter:
conditioning components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 1. Open the glove compartment and remove all Air Filter Retaining Tabs
contents.
5. Remove the air filter from the HVAC air inlet
2. Push up on the glove compartment travel stop
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — and lower the door.
housing. Pull the filter elements out pinching
R–1234yf them to the right for clearance.
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
Hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the 8
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using recovery
and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants. Glove Compartment Travel Stop
Air Filter
6. Install the cabin air filter with the air filter For the proper maintenance intervals, see Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
position indicators pointing in the same Ú page 348 for gasoline engines or Ú page 352 periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
direction as removal. for diesel engines. blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
CAUTION! BODY LUBRICATION
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to Locks and all body pivot points, including such from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
indicate airflow direction through the filter. items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and contact with petroleum products such as engine
Failure to properly install the filter will result in rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and oil, gasoline, etc.
the need to replace it more often. hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with
NOTE:
a lithium based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
7. Close cabin air filter access door and secure protect against rust and wear. Prior to the on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
retaining tabs. application of any lubricant, the parts concerned performance of blades may be present with chat-
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back into
after lubricating excess oil and grease should be these conditions are present, clean the wiper
position ensuring you have properly engaged
removed. Particular attention should also be given blades or replace as necessary.
the travel damper.
to hood latching components to ensure proper The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
function. When performing other underhood inspected periodically, not just when wiper
services, the hood latch release mechanism, and performance problems are experienced. This
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. inspection should include the following points:
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated  Wear or uneven edges
twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring.  Foreign material
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly  Hardening or cracking
into the lock cylinder.  Deformation or fatigue
WINDSHIELD WIPER B LADES If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace

the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do
Travel Dampener Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth damaged.
1 — Travel Dampener Housing
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
2 — Travel Dampener Rod accumulations of salt or road film.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper Installing The Front Wipers
arm, push the release tab on the wiper blade 1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
CAUTION! and while holding the wiper arm with one wiper arm is in the full up position.
hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back 2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the
base of the wiper arm.
against the glass without the wiper blade in tip of the wiper arm.
place or the glass may be damaged. 3. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the
wiper arm, latch engagement will be
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off accompanied by an audible click.
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full 4. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
up position.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Open swing gate to access the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position

1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm J Hook
3 — J Hook Retainer
8
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position 3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
1 — Wiper Blade wiper blade from the wiper arm.
2 — Wiper Arm 4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass. Rear Wiper Assembly
3 — Release Tab 1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
2. Lift wiper arm off of the glass and rotate wiper If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
blade outward to disengage the wiper blade system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
from the wiper arm. inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
technician inspect the complete exhaust system
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
2 — Wiper Arm Receptacle WARNING!
Wiper Blade And Wiper Arm  Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
1 — Wiper Arm Installing The Rear Wiper Carbon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass. odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
2 — Wiper Blade
scious and can eventually poison you
2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the Ú page 327.
3. Gently set the arm on the glass. opening on the end of the wiper arm and rotate
the wiper in to place.  A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
3. Place with wiper on the glass and close the tail
rials might be grass or leaves coming into
gate.
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park
or operate your vehicle in areas where your
EXHAUST SYSTEM exhaust system can contact anything that can
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry burn.
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
In unusual situations involving grossly

CAUTION! malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor WARNING!
 The catalytic converter requires the use of may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst  Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a raised. The fan starts automatically and may
emissions control device and may seriously tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should start at any time, whether the engine is
reduce engine performance and cause be obtained immediately. running or not.
serious damage to the engine. To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
 When working near the radiator cooling fan,
damage:
 Damage to the catalytic converter can result if disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating  Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis- tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
condition. In the event of engine malfunction, sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. controlled and can start at any time the igni-
particularly involving engine misfire or other  Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or tion is in the ON mode.
apparent loss of performance, have your towing the vehicle.
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-  Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo- Coolant Checks
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction nents disconnected or removed, such as when
could cause the converter to overheat, Check the engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods (if equipped), and Motor Generator Unit (MGU) (if
resulting in possible damage to the converter during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
and vehicle. equipped) coolant (antifreeze) protection every
ating conditions.
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather,
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
COOLING SYSTEM where applicable). If the engine, battery (if
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
equipped), intercooler (if equipped), and MGU (if 8
WARNING! equipped) coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance,
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to the system should be drained, flushed and refilled
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent  You or others can be badly burned by hot with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032)
possible catalyst damage. engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
NOTE: radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any
Intentional tampering with emissions control under the hood, do not open the hood until the accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
systems can result in civil penalties being radiator has had time to cool. Never open a gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
assessed against you. cooling system pressure cap when the radi- down the face of the A/C condenser (if equipped)
ator or coolant bottle is hot. or the back of the radiator core.
(Continued)
Check the engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement.
(if equipped), and MGU (if equipped) cooling engine coolant is different and should not be To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
system hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology period, it is important that you use the same engine
cuts, and tightness of the connection at the (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat- coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is throughout the life of your vehicle.
entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE introduced into the cooling system in an emer- Please review these recommendations for using
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING gency, the cooling system will need to be Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
SYSTEM IS HOT. drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
rized dealer as soon as possible. engine coolant (antifreeze):
NOTE:  Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant  We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi- Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly tional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that
they may not be compatible with the radiator meets the requirements of the manufacturer
coolant is needed to be added to the system engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
please contact an authorized dealer. Material Standard MS.90032.
 This vehicle has not been designed for use with  Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of coolant that meets the requirements of the
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
recommended. and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(conforming to MS.90032).
 Some vehicles require special tools to add (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
For the proper maintenance intervals, see
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
Ú page 348 for gasoline engines or Ú page 352
properly could lead to severe internal engine an authorized dealer for assistance.
for diesel engines.
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to  Use only high purity water such as distilled or
Selection Of Coolant the system please contact an authorized dealer. deionized water when mixing the water/engine
For further information Ú page 424. Adding Coolant coolant solution. The use of lower quality water
NOTE: will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
in the engine cooling system.
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
engine coolant, may result in engine damage coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or
NOTE: The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there Coolant Level
 It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the is any accumulation of foreign material on the The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method
proper level of protection against freezing sealing surfaces. for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
according to the temperatures occurring in the With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the
area where the vehicle is operated. WARNING! engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be
 Use care when filling under hood fluids such as  Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
engine oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to mini- add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the The radiator normally remains completely full, so
mize spillage onto the top of the engine. Any engine is overheated. Do not loosen or there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant
excess fluid that is spilled onto the top of the remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant
engine should be removed using compressed Heat causes pressure to build up in the freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
air or an absorbent cloth. cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, service attendant of this. As long as the engine
do not remove the pressure cap while the operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
 Some vehicles require special tools to add
system is hot or under pressure. bottle need only be checked once a month.
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine  Do not use a pressure cap other than the one When additional engine coolant is needed to
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
the system, please contact an authorized dealer. engine damage may result. meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to
 Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
mended and can result in cooling system Disposal Of Used Coolant
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in Engine Coolant Level — 2.0L
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain, 8
OAT or HOAT, is a regulated substance requiring WARNING!
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
proper disposal. Check with your local authorities
MS.90032) as soon as possible.  Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
to determine the disposal rules for your
Cooling System Pressure Cap add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
Heat causes pressure to build up in the
engine coolant will return to the radiator from the puddles on the ground, clean up any ground spills
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank if so immediately. If ingested, seek emergency
do not remove the pressure cap while the
equipped. assistance immediately.
system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
Cooling System Notes  Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
WARNING! overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
NOTE:
 Do not use a pressure cap other than the one  Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
meters of operation, you may observe vapor
engine damage may result. the front of the condenser clean.
coming from the front of the engine compartment.
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,  Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the snow, or high humidity accumulating on the Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
engine coolant should be within the OK range radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
between the ADD and FULL range on the dipstick. opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
1. Remove the cap with level dipstick from the enter the radiator. engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
engine coolant bottle. If an examination of your engine compartment and increased emissions.
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
2. Clean off the coolant from the dipstick.
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
BRAKE SYSTEM
3. Rest the cap on the opening of the coolant
dissipate. In order to ensure brake system performance, all
bottle without tightening the cap.
 Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. brake system components should be inspected
4. Remove the cap with dipstick and check the periodically. For the proper maintenance intervals
coolant level on the dipstick.  Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
Ú page 348.
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
The radiator normally remains completely full, so coolant needs to be added, the contents of the WARNING!
there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant against freezing. Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
 If frequent engine coolant additions are
service attendant of this. As long as the engine or riding on the brake pedal can result in
required, the cooling system should be pressure
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
tested for leaks.
bottle need only be checked once a month. lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
 Maintain engine coolant concentration at a would not have your full braking capacity in an
When additional engine coolant is needed to minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to emergency.
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro-
meets the requirements of the manufacturer sion protection of your engine which contains
Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to aluminum components.
the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder

WARNING!
FRONT/REAR A XLE F LUID
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or  To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other
immediately if the Brake System Warning Light is reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly
on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is
designated marks on the side of the reservoir of suspected inspect the fluid level.
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top all times. Brake fluid in an open container
of the master cylinder area before removing cap. absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a Fluid Level Check
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil Lubricant should be approximately 1/8 inch
as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be unexpectedly during hard or prolonged (3 mm) below the bottom edge of the oil fill hole.
checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This
could result in a collision. NOTE:
is abnormally low, check the system for leaks
Make sure that the vehicle is level and supported
Ú page 426.  Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result by the axles.
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
WARNING! causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake Adding Fluid
 Use only the manufacturer recommended fluid can also damage painted and vinyl Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the
brake fluid Ú page 426. Using the wrong type surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its level specified above.
of brake fluid can severely damage your brake contact with these surfaces. Selection Of Lubricant
system and/or impair its performance. The  Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contam- Use only manufacturer recommended fluid
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components Ú page 426. 8
also identified on the original factory installed could be damaged, causing partial or
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. complete brake failure. This could result in a
(Continued) collision.
TRANSFER C ASE MANUAL T RANSMISSION — IF E QUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —

Fluid Level Check Fluid Level Check I F E QUIPPED
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The Special Additives
fill hole when the vehicle is in a level position. fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill It is strongly recommended against using any
hole and a point not more than 3/16 of an inch special additives in the transmission. Automatic
(4.76 mm) below the bottom of the hole. Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper and its performance may be impaired by
level. supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any
Frequency Of Fluid Change fluid additives to the transmission. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid seals.
installed at the factory will give satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle. If the fluid CAUTION!
becomes contaminated with water, it should be
changed immediately. Otherwise, change the fluid Do not use chemical flushes in your
Transfer Case as recommended in the Maintenance Plan. Refer transmission as the chemicals can damage your
to the Maintenance Plan for the proper transmission components. Such damage is not
1 — Fill hole maintenance intervals Ú page 348. covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
2 — Drain hole
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer recommended manual
Drain And Refill transmission fluid Ú page 426.
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 348.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer recommended fluid
Ú page 426.
Fluid Level Check Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. FUSES
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the General Information
require adjustment under normal operating
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not WARNING!
required; therefore the transmission has no Selection Of Lubricant
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your  When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
transmission fluid level using special service tools. to ensure optimum transmission performance and appropriate replacement fuse with the same
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission life. Use only the manufacturer specified amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer transmission fluid Ú page 426. It is important to a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
immediately to have the transmission fluid level maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi-
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper using the recommended fluid. cated may result in a dangerous electrical
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage. system overload. If a properly rated fuse
NOTE: continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the
CAUTION! No chemical flushes should be used in any trans- circuit that must be corrected. Never replace a
mission; only the approved lubricant should be blown fuse with metal wires or any other mate-
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an used. rial. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
serious personal injury, fire and/or property
transmission damage may occur. An authorized CAUTION! damage.
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately. Using a transmission fluid other than the  Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
manufacturer recommended fluid may cause ignition is off and that all the other services
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or are switched off and/or disengaged. 8
Fluid And Filter Changes torque converter shudder Ú page 426.
 If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
authorized dealer.
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle. (Continued)
Power Distribution Center (PDC)

WARNING!
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
 If a general protection fuse for safety systems engine compartment near the battery. This center
(air bag system, braking system), power unit contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses, and relays.
systems (engine system, gearbox system) or The PDC top cover is labeled with each serviceable
steering system blows, contact an authorized fuse/relay location, function, and size.
dealer.
CAUTION!
The fuses protect electrical systems against When installing the power distribution center
excessive current. cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
Blade Fuses
When a device does not work, you must check the properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/ 1 — Fuse Element do so may allow water to get into the power
melt. 2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse distribution center and possibly result in an
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for element electrical system failure.
extended periods of time with the engine off may 3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
result in vehicle battery discharge. element (blown fuse)
8
Power Distribution Center Location – Gasoline Engine
Power Distribution Center Location – Diesel Engine
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 40 Amp Green – Starter
F03 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)

* If Equipped
20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump MTR/FPCM
F04 –
25 Amp Clear Fuel Pmp (6.4)*
F05 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F06 – – Spare
F07 – 15 Amp Blue Low Temp Radiator Cooling Pump (LTR)*
F08 – 15 Amp Blue Trans Control Module TCM-8HP CYGNUS
F09 – – Spare
Key Ignition Node (KIN)/Radio Frequency Hub (RF HUB)/
F10 – 15 Amp Blue
Electric Steering Column Lock (ESCL)
F11 – 10 Amp Red UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F12 – 25 Amp Clear HIFI Amplifier
F13 – – Spare
F14 – – Spare
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Switch Bank-Heavy Duty 8
F15 – 15 Amp Blue
Electrical Pkg (SWITCH BANK-HD ELEC)
F16 – – Spare
F17 – – Spare
F18 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch (AC CLUTCH)
F19 – – Spare
F20 30 Amp Pink – Central Body Controller (CBC) 1-INTERIOR LIGHTS
F21 – 20 Amp Yellow REAR WIPER

* If Equipped
Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module
F22 – 10 Amp Red (PCM)/Motor Generator Unit (MGU) WAKE UP/Power Pack
Unit (PPU) WAKE UP
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine Control Module
F23 – 10 Amp Red
(ECM)
F24 – – Spare
F25 – 10 Amp Red Module Shift By Wire (MOD_SBW)
F26 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 2-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #1
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F28 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 3-POWER LOCKS
F29 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 4-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #2
F30 – – Spare
F31 – 10 Amp Red DIAGNOSTIC PORT
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning Mod (HVAC CTRL MOD)/
F32 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Lock (SCL)/Occupant Classification Module
(OCM)/Driver Presence Detection Module (DPDM)
ParkTronics System (PTS)/Infrared Camera Module (IRCM)/
F33 – 10 Amp Red
Airbag Disable Lamps (AIRBAG DISABLE LMPS)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Electric Hydraulic Power
F34 – 10 Amp Red
Steering (EHPS)/Smart Bar Control Module (SBCM) WAKE UP
F35 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP*
F36 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW ELEC BRK MOD*

* If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW CONN 7W*
F38 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module (ECM)
F39 – 15 Amp Blue MGU Coolant Pump (3.6)*
DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM)/Axle Lock (AXLE LOC)
F40 – 15 Amp Blue
FT_RR
F41 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster (IC)/Security GateWay (SGW) WAKE UP
F42 – 10 Amp Red Power Control Relay Control Feed (Electric Stop/Start)*
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) BATT
F44 – 10 Amp Red InfraRed Camera (IRCAM) HEATERS
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) IGN
F46 – 10 Amp Red AUTO HDLP LVL MOD/LVL MTR/HDLP SW
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) 8
F50 – 10 Amp Red HD ACC*
Digital TV (DSRC)/USB/InSide RearView Mirror (ISRVM)/
F51 – 10 Amp Red
Compass Module (CSGM)
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow CIGAR LTR
F53 – – Spare
F54 – – Spare
F55 – 10 Amp Red Central Vision Processing Module (CVPM)

* If Equipped
F56 – 10 Amp Red IN-CAR TEMP SENSOR/PTC HTR COIL FEED
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Driver Heated Seat
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Pass Heated Seat
F59 – – Spare
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Comfort Steering Wheel Module (CSWM) (HTD STR WHEEL)
F61 – 10 Amp Red Left Blind Spot Sensor (LBSS)/Right Blind Spot Sensor (RBSS)
– Spare
F62 –
10 Amp Red Exhaust Sol*
F63 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F64 – – Spare
F65 – – Spare
F66 40 Amp Green – HVAC BLOWER MTR Front
F67 – – Spare
F68 – – Spare
F69 – 5 Amp Tan Motor Generator Unit MGU Belt Starter Generator (BSG)*
F70 – 25 Amp Clear INJ/IGN COIL (GAS)/GLO PLUG MOD (DSL)
F71 – – Spare
F72 – 10 Amp Red HD ELEC ACC PKG*
F73 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP LT
F74 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP RT

* If Equipped
Power Pack Unit - Battery Pack Control Module & Auxiliary
F75 – 10 Amp Red Power Module (PPU-BPCM & APM) Belt Starter Generator
(BSG)*
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM (GAS)/PCM (DSL)
F77 – 10 Amp Red HEATED MIRRORS
F78 – 10 Amp Red INTRUSION MOD/SIREN/INTRUSION SENSORS
F79 – 20 Amp Yellow SMART BAR CTRL MOD
15 Amp Blue Powertrain Control Module (PCM) / SOL 1,2 BLOCK SHIFT
F80 –
10 Amp Red Vapor Blocking Valve (BSG)
F81 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost (Electric Backlight *
F82 30 Amp Pink – FUEL HTR*
F83 60 Amp Yellow – GLOW PLUG*
F84 30 Amp Pink – UREA HTR CTRL UNIT*
F85 – 10 Amp Red PM SENSOR* 8
F86 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP 2*
F87 – 10 Amp Red SUPPLY/PURGING PMP*
F88 20 Amp Blue – NOx SENSOR #1/ #2*
Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)/ Cruise Control
F89 – 10 Amp Red
(CRUISE CTL)/Digital TV (DTV) / EVIC / Airbag Disable Lamp
F90 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW PARK LMP*
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow HORN

* If Equipped
F92 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #2*
F93 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #1*
F94 – – Spare
F95 – – Spare
F96 – 10 Amp Red PWR MIRROR SW
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow RADIO/TBM
F98 – 10 Amp Red SW BANK-HD ELEC/OFF ROAD
F99 – – Spare
F100 30 Amp Pink – ESC-ECU & VALVES
F101 30 Amp Pink – DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM)
F102 – 15 Amp Blue DUAL USB PORT
F103 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #3*
F104 – 15 Amp Blue PPU COOL PUMP*
Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Heat Ventilation Air
F105 – 10 Amp Red
Conditioning (HVAC)
F106 50 Amp Red – ESC -PUMP MTR
F107 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN LT*
F108 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #4*
F109 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RT*

* If Equipped
F110 30 Amp Pink – POWER INVERTER
F111 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW BACKUP*
Customer can select to switch the Cargo Power Outlet from F43 battery fed power to this position F45 which is fed when the ignition in ON.
BULB R EPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp 658
Heater Control Lamps (2) 194 8
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger, and Rear Wash/Wipe) **
Soundbar Dome Lamp 912
** Bulbs only available from an authorized dealer.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Headlamps (2) H13
Premium Head Lamps LED
Sport Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) 7444NALL
Premium Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) LED
Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Turn Lamp 7440NALL/WY21WLL
Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Park DRL Lamp 7443LL
Front Side Marker Lamps (2) LED
Base Fog Lamps PSX24W
Premium Fog Lamps LED
Rear Premium LED Tail Lamps LED
Rear Base Tail Lamp Stop/Tail/Turn Bulb 3157
Rear Base Tail Lamp Backup Bulb 7440
Rear Base Tail Lamp Side Marker LED
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED
License Lamp LED
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer or refer
to the applicable Service Manual.
Bulb Replacement 11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and push 2. Turn the socket assembly a quarter turn
the connector locking tab to the lock position. counterclockwise and remove from housing.
NOTE: Pull the bulb straight from the socket to
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric CAUTION! replace.
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
LED FRONT SIDE MARKER — IF EQUIPPED
change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
usually accelerate the clearing process. the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, See the following steps to replace:
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. 1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to
HALOGEN HEADLAMPS — IF EQUIPPED access side maker screw and electrical
See the following steps to replace: 12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb a connector.
1. Open hood and support using prop rod. quarter turn clockwise. 2. Remove fastening screw in the back of the
front side maker assembly and disconnect
2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers FRONT PARK/TURN SIGNAL — IF EQUIPPED electrical connector.
along the top a quarter turn counterclockwise
and remove. See the following steps to replace: 3. Remove and replace LED front side marker
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to light assembly.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at
one side and working toward the other. access bulb sockets.
HALOGEN FRONT FOG LAMP — IF EQUIPPED
4. Remove the three screws holding the
See the following steps to replace:
headlamp to the vehicle.
1. Reach under the vehicle to access the back of
5. Remove lamp from the vehicle.
the front fog lamp. 8
6. Remove the lamp from the collar.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from
7. Grab the bulb and rotate a quarter turn the front fog lamp connector receptacle.
counterclockwise.
3. Firmly grab the bulb by the two latch features
8. Pull the bulb from the housing. and squeeze them together to unlock the bulb
9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock from the back of the front fog lamp housing.
position.
10. Remove connector from bulb. Wheel Liner
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed 3. Remove the three screws from assembly
opening in the housing and then connect the bracket to access bulb sockets.
replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Trim Cap
LED Front Fog Lamp
2. Remove retaining screw and disconnect
If your vehicle is equipped with LED fog lamps they electrical connector, then remove tail lamp Assembly Bracket
are replaced as an assembly. assembly from the vehicle.
4. Rotate the appropriate socket a quarter turn
REAR TAIL, STOP, TURN SIGNAL, AND BACKUP NOTE: counterclockwise, then remove it from the
LAMP — IF EQUIPPED If necessary, push in on the assembly tab located housing.
inboard behind the lamp housing.
See the following steps to replace: 5. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to
1. Remove interior trim panel cap to access replace.
single retaining screw for tail lamp assembly.
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP
(CHMSL) — IF EQUIPPED
The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that
extends upward from the swing gate behind the
spare tire. If service is needed, obtain the LED
Assembly from an authorized dealer.
Retaining Screw
See the following steps to replace: Tire Markings NOTE:

1. Remove the spare tire.  P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
2. Remove the screws holding the tire carrier design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
cover. “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
3. Remove two screws from lamp assembly and
disconnect electrical connector.  European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
LICENSE PLATE LAMPS — IF EQUIPPED standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
See the following steps to replace: "P" is absent from this tire size designation.
NOTE: Example: 215/65R15 96H.
To install a new bulb, reverse the procedure above.  LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
When installing the new bulb, care should be taken Tire Markings US design standards. The size designation for
to not allow bare skin to come in contact with the LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
bulb. 1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
See an authorized dealer to replace LED lamps. (TIN) the sidewall preceding the size designation.
2 — Size Designation Example: LT235/85R16.
TIRES 3 — Service Description  Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 4 — Maximum Load
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or 8
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
5 — Maximum Pressure “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
following information: Tire Markings, Tire 6 — Treadwear, Traction and designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and Temperature Grades  High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5
R15 LT.
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
 Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
 "R" means radial construction, or
 "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
 A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
 A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
 The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
 XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
 LL = Light load tire or
 C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
8
 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 03 means the 3rd week
EXAMPLE:
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 01 means the year 2001
 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
Maximum Inflation Pressure
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
Tire Placard
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about
the:
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on 1. Number of people that can be carried in the
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the vehicle.
driver's side door. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
and spare tires.
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar) Loading
Tire And Loading Information Placard The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
Ú page 191.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear 8
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading,
Tire And Loading Information Placard and trailer towing Ú page 191.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of (4) The resulting figure equals the Metric Example For Load Limit
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined available amount of cargo and luggage For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
weight of occupants and cargo should never
load capacity. For example, if “XXX” there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading the amount of available cargo and luggage load
Information placard. The combined weight of amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue be five 150 lb passengers in your
shown in step 4.
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the vehicle, the amount of available cargo
weight referenced here. and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. NOTE:
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
Steps For Determining Correct Load your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Limit— (5) Determine the combined weight of The following table shows examples on how to
(1) Locate the statement “The combined luggage and cargo being loaded on the calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
weight of occupants and cargo should vehicle. That weight may not safely capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
exceed the available cargo and luggage configurations and number and size of occu-
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
vehicle's placard. load capacity calculated in Step 4.
and may not be accurate for the seating and
(2) Determine the combined weight of (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load carry capacity of your vehicle.
the driver and passengers that will be load from your trailer will be transferred  For the following example, the combined weight
riding in your vehicle. to your vehicle. Consult this manual to of occupants and cargo should never exceed
determine how this reduces the 865 lb (392 kg).
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
available cargo and luggage load
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
capacity of your vehicle.
XXX lbs.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
TIRES — G ENERAL I NFORMATION WARNING!

Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
Tire Pressure  Unequal tire pressures can cause steering abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the problems. You could lose control of your resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. vehicle.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
 Unequal tire pressures from one side of the Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
pressure:
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
 Safety drift to the right or left. uncomfortable ride.
 Fuel Economy  Always drive with each tire inflated to the Tire Inflation Pressures
 Tread Wear recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the side door.
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
At least once a month:
WARNING! sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.  Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
 Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
can cause collisions.
NOTE:
make a visual judgement when determining
 Unequal tire pressures from side to side may proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
 Underinflation increases tire flexing and can cause erratic and unpredictable steering
result in overheating and tire failure. even when they are under-inflated.
response.
 Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
 Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion  Unequal tire pressure from side to side may damage.
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
can cause damage that result in tire failure. CAUTION!
Fuel Economy
 Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
resulting in loss of vehicle control. prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
(Continued) valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Tire Repair
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure it meets the following criteria:
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle  The tire has not been driven on when flat.
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold  The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire  The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
sidewall. (6 mm).
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. and additional information.
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi WARNING!
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi- immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure mum load is dangerous. The added strain on size and service description (Load Index and
inside a garage, especially in the Winter. your tires could cause them to fail. You could Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle as well as it is not designed to be reused.
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a 8
Radial Ply Tires rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
condition.
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to WARNING! Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
be too low. capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
handle poorly. The instability could cause a colli-
sion. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire
Never combine them with other types of tires. is changed after driving with underinflated tire
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is Tread Wear Indicators Life Of Tire
not designed to be reused when driven under run
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
tires to help you in determining when your tires factors including, but not limited to:
NOTE: should be replaced.  Driving style.
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.  Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
run flat mode.
the need for earlier tire replacement.
See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section
 Distance driven.
for more information.
 Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
Tire Spinning or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds Tire Tread recommended.
continuously without stopping.
1 — Worn Tire
For further information Ú page 343. WARNING!
2 — New Tire
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
WARNING! six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Fail-
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the ure to follow this warning can result in sudden
generated by excessive wheel speeds may tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). tire failure. You could lose control and have a
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could When the tread is worn to the tread wear collision resulting in serious injury or death.
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your indicators, the tire should be replaced.
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
For further information Ú page 401.
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
NOTE: It is recommended you contact an authorized tire

Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when dealer or original equipment dealer with any WARNING!
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing questions you may have on tire specifications or  Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
tires. capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement adequate speed capability can result in
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires ride of your vehicle.
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
WARNING! CAUTION!
Replacement Tires
 Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or Replacing original tires with tires of a different
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of speed rating other than that specified for your size may result in false speedometer and
many characteristics. They should be inspected vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved odometer readings.
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation tires and wheels may change suspension
pressures. The manufacturer strongly dimensions and performance characteristics,
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the resulting in changes to steering, handling, and TIRE TYPES
originals in size, quality and performance when braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on All Season Tires — If Equipped
dictable handling and stress to steering and
“Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to suspension components. You could lose All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
the Tire and Loading Information placard or the control and have a collision resulting in (Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation serious injury or death. Use only the tire and levels may vary between different all season tires.
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for wheel sizes with load ratings approved for All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
your tire will be found on the original equipment M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
tire sidewall.
your vehicle. 8
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
 Never use a tire with a smaller load index or may adversely affect the safety and handling of
For more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 392. capacity, other than what was originally your vehicle.
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or smaller load index could result in tire over-
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can loading and failure. You could lose control and
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever have a collision.
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
(Continued)
specifications match those of the original wheels.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Snow Tires SPARE T IRES — IF E QUIPPED

Equipped Some areas of the country require the use of snow NOTE:
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with sidewall.
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not If you need snow tires, select tires
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. equivalent in size and type to the original CAUTION!
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient equipment tires. Use snow tires only in
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads sets of four; failure to do so may
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
are covered with ice or snow. For more adversely affect the safety and handling of your
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
information, contact an authorized dealer. vehicle.
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
Summer tires do not contain the all season Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than result.
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; should not be operated at sustained speeds over
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
handling of your vehicle. designated for temporary emergency use
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an
Ú page 195.
authorized tire dealer for recommended safe
WARNING! operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. pressures. And Wheel — If Equipped
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in While studded tires improve performance on ice, Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces wheel equivalent in look and function to the
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. original equipment tire and wheel found on the
vehicle control. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
laws should be checked before using these tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If
types. your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

WARNING!
The compact spare is for temporary emergency The limited use spare tire is for temporary
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is Compact and collapsible spares are for tempo- emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the rary emergency use only. With these spares, do located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Tempo- contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
Information Placard located on the driver’s side rary use spares have limited tread life. When the tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
Example: T145/80D18 103M. your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
tire failure and loss of vehicle control. original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
at the first opportunity.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) Full Size Spare — If Equipped
WARNING!
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
opportunity. only. This tire may look like the originally equipped Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
When the tread is worn to the tread wear more than the speed listed on the limited use
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Loading Information Placard located on the 8
given time.
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
at the first opportunity. driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
WHEEL A ND W HEEL TRIM C ARE When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. CAUTION!
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
Wash wheels with the same soap solution wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
recommended for the body of the vehicle and or polishing compounds. They will permanently
aluminum or chrome wheels.
remember to always wash when the surfaces are damage this finish and such damage is not
not hot to the touch. covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These basis; this is all that is required to maintain this
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road products may damage the wheel's protective finish.
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s recommended.
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
NOTE:
CAUTION! If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or brakes to remove the water droplets from the
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel brake components. This activity will remove the
cleaners and automatic car washes may red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such vibration when braking.
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
SNOW TRACTION D EVICES

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage.
 Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
 No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
 Please follow the table for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
Snow Traction Device

Trim Level Axle Tire/Wheel Size
(maximum projection beyond tire profile or equivalent)
Sport 245/75R17 S Class or Autosock
Willy’s LT255/75R17C
Sahara Rear 255/70R18
Autosock
Rubicon LT285/70R17C
High Altitude 275/55R20
WARNING! CAUTION! CAUTION!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S,  Because of restricted traction device clear-  Install device as tightly as possible and then 8
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause ance between tires and other suspension retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
unpredictable handling. You could lose control components, it is important that only traction Autosock traction devices do not require
and have a collision. devices in good condition are used. Broken retightening.
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the
 Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
CAUTION! indicate device breakage. Remove the  Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe damaged parts of the device before further large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
the following precautions: use. (Continued)
(Continued) (Continued)
CAUTION!
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward The specific grade rating assigned by the
cross” shown in the following diagram. tire's manufacturer in each category is
 Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry shown on the sidewall of the tires on
pavement.
your vehicle.
 Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use. to Federal safety requirements in
Always use the suggested operating speed of addition to these grades.
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
30 mph (48 km/h).
TREADWEAR
 Do not use traction devices on a compact The Treadwear grade is a comparative
spare tire. rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross) when tested under controlled conditions
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS on a specified government test course.
CAUTION! For example, a tire graded 150 would
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle wear one and one-half times as well on
operate at different loads and perform different Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
steering, handling, and braking functions. For depends on tires of equal size, type, and the government course as a tire graded
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. circumference on each wheel. Any difference in 100. The relative performance of tires
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tire size can cause damage to the transfer case. depends upon the actual conditions of
Tire rotation schedule should be followed to their use, however, and may depart
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially balance tire wear.
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as significantly from the norm due to
those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will variations in driving habits, service
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION practices, and differences in road
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a characteristics and climate.
smooth, quiet ride. UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 348. The following tire grading categories TRACTION G RADES
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should were established by the National The Traction grades, from highest to
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
Highway Traffic Safety Administration. lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet passenger vehicle tires must meet
WARNING!
pavement, as measured under under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
controlled conditions on specified Standard No. 109. Grades B and A  Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
government test surfaces of asphalt and represent higher levels of performance
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor on the laboratory test wheel, than the disconnected to completely de-energize the
traction performance. minimum required by law. 12 Volt electrical system.
WARNING! WARNING!  Serious injury or death could result if you do

not disconnect both batteries. To learn how to
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based The temperature grade for this tire is properly disconnect, see an authorized dealer.
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and established for a tire that is properly inflated and
does not include acceleration, cornering, not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. or excessive loading, either separately or in CAUTION!
combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure. If the negative battery cables are not isolated
TEMPERATURE G RADES properly it can cause a potential power spike or
surge in the system, resulting in damage to
The Temperature grades are A (the STORING THE VEHICLE essential electrical components.
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and WARNING! If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested  Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan weeks, we recommend that you take the following 8
under controlled conditions on a whenever the hood is raised. It can start steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be battery:
Sustained high temperature can cause injured by moving fan blades.  Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
the material of the tire to degenerate  Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,  If your vehicle is equipped with Stop/Start
and reduce tire life, and excessive watch bands and bracelets that could make system then disconnect both the main and
temperature can lead to sudden tire an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be supplemental negative battery cables.
seriously injured.
failure. The grade C corresponds to a  Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
(Continued) service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
level of performance, which all
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower assistance is needed to disconnect the battery What Causes Corrosion?
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri- system, see an authorized dealer.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor  Do not disconnect the Intelligent Battery Sensor of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
damage when the system is started again. (IBS), or your Stop/Start system may not func- The most common causes are:
 If assistance is needed to disconnect the tion for up to 24 hours, due to the IBS being set
battery system, see an authorized dealer. into learn mode.  Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
 Stone and gravel impact.
BODYWORK  Insects, tree sap and tar.
 Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
 Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
AGENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to BODY AND UNDERBODY M AINTENANCE
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that Cleaning Headlights
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Battery Cable Disconnect
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
1 — Supplemental Negative Battery Cable which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
2 — Main Negative Battery Cable weather and other extreme conditions will have an be followed.
3 — Main Negative Battery Terminal adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
4 — Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) protection. and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
The following maintenance recommendations will cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
NOTE: enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the solution followed by rinsing.
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
 You must isolate the supplemental battery
connection point, as well as the main battery solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
terminal from the post, as shown in the image, clean the lenses.
to fully de-energize both batteries for storage. If
PRESERVING T HE B ODYWORK Special Care Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
 If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you To maintain the appearance of your vehicle's
Washing
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage interior trim and top, follow these precautions:
 Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your at least once a month.  Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
 It is important that the drain holes in the lower wash. Window scratches and wax build-up may
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be result.
completely with water.
kept clear and open.  Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the
 If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
 If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the top down, as exposure to sun or rain may
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of damage interior trim.
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
such repairs is considered the responsibility of  Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents
 Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar® the owner. on top material, as damage may result.
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
 If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or  Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec- dry on the paint, leaving a streak.
scratch the paint.
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
 Avoid using abrasive compounds and power as possible. The cost of such repairs is consid-  After cleaning your vehicle's fabric top, always
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out ered the responsibility of the owner. make sure it is completely dry before lowering.
the paint finish.  Be especially careful when washing the
 If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such windows by following the directions for “Care of
CAUTION! Fabric Top Windows.”
materials are well packaged and sealed.
 Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
 If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
Washing – Use Mopar® Car Wash or equivalent, or 8
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder mild soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush with
consider mud or stone shields behind each
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. soft bristles. If extra cleaning is required, use
wheel.
Mopar® Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or
 Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi  Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as equivalent, or a mild foaming cleaner on the entire
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal soon as possible. An authorized dealer has top, but support the top from underneath.
of paint and decals. touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle. Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by
rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water.
Remember to allow the top to dry before lowering it.
 Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead,

CAUTION! CAUTION! use a microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moist-
Failure to follow these cautions may cause  Avoid washing with rollers and/or brushes in ened with cold or warm, clean water, and wipe
interior water damage, stains, or mildew of the washing stations. Wash the vehicle only by across the window, not up and down. Mopar®
top material: hand using neutral pH detergents; dry it with a Jeep® Soft Glass Window Cleaner or equivalent
wet chamois leather. Abrasive products and/ will safely clean all plastic windows without
 Do not run a fabric top through an automatic
or polishes should not be used for cleaning scratching. It removes fine scratches to improve
car wash. Window scratches and wax build-up visibility and provides UV protection to help
the car. Bird droppings must be washed off
may result. prevent yellowing.
immediately and thoroughly as the acid they
 It is recommended that the top be free of contain is particularly aggressive.  When washing, never use hot water or anything
water prior to opening it. Operating the top, stronger than a mild soap. Never use solvents
 Avoid (if at all possible) parking the vehicle
opening a door or lowering a window while the such as alcohol or harsh cleaning agents.
under trees; remove vegetable resins immedi-
top is wet may allow water to drip into the
ately as, when dried, it may only be possible to  Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then
vehicle’s interior.
remove them with abrasive products and/or wipe with a soft and slightly moist, clean cloth.
 Use care when washing the vehicle, water polishes, which is highly inadvisable as they  When removing frost, snow or ice, never use a
pressure directed at the weather strip seals could alter the typical opaqueness of the scraper or de-icing chemicals. Use warm water
may cause water to leak into the vehicle’s paint. only if you must clean the window quickly.
interior.
 Do not use pure windshield washer fluid for  Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from
 Careless handling and storage of the remov- cleaning the front windshield and rear off-road driving will have an impact on plastic
able roof panels may damage the seals, window; dilute it min. 50% with water. Only retainer operation. Even normal on-road driving
causing water to leak into the vehicle’s inte- use pure windshield washer fluid when strictly and vehicle washing will eventually impact
rior. necessary due to outside temperature condi- window plastic retainer operation. To maintain
tions. ease of use of the window plastic retainers,
 The front panel(s) must be positioned properly
to ensure sealing. Improper installation can each window plastic retainer should be cleaned
cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior. Care Of Fabric Top Windows and lubricated regularly. Clean them with a mild
soap solution and a small brush. Cleaning prod-
Your vehicle's fabric top has pliable plastic ucts are available through an authorized dealer.
windows which can be scratched unless special
care is taken by following these directions:  Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any
tape to the windows. Adhesives are hard to
remove and may damage the windows.
INTERIORS WARNING!
CARPET S AFETY I NFORMATION  NEVER place any objects under the carpet
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
Always use carpet designed to fit your vehicle. Only change the position of the carpet and may
use carpet that does not interfere with the cause interference with the accelerator,
operation of the pedal assemblies. Only operate brake, or clutch pedals.
the vehicle when the carpet is securely attached by
the grommets so it cannot slip out of position and  ONLY install carpet designed to fit your
interfere with the pedal assemblies or impair safe vehicle. NEVER install carpet that cannot be
operation of your vehicle in other ways. properly attached and secured to your vehicle.
If the carpet needs to be replaced, only use Front Carpet
WARNING! manufacturer approved carpet for the specific 1 — Grommets
make, model, and year of your vehicle.
 If operating the vehicle without carpet in place
the floor may become hot, and there is a risk  If the vehicle carpet has been removed and 2. Pull the carpet out from the front to the rear.
of burns. re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check that the floor mat
 An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
damaged grommets may cause your carpet to Fully depress each pedal to check for interfer-
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch ence with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To pedals then re-install the floor mats.
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: ALWAYS 8
securely attach your carpet using the grom-
mets. CARPET R EMOVAL
 ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide Front Carpets (Two And Four Door Models):
into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle 1. Remove the front grommets.
is moving. Objects can become trapped under Front Carpet Pulled Away
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could
cause a loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat.

First for the rear carpet and then the front
carpet.
Rear Underside Of Front Seat Front Seat And Floor

1 — Harness 1 — Grommets
2 — Carpet Split 2 — Carpet Split
Front And Rear Carpet Split
4. Under the back of the front seat, open the 5. Finally open the carpet split around seat 6. When reinstalling carpet please perform these
carpet split and then pull out the rear edge and bracket and then remove the last two steps in reverse order making sure that the
slide the carpet to the front (do not remove the grommets. carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar,
harness). console, and refasten grommets.
Rear Carpet (Four Door Models): 3. Remove the grommets under the rear seat Rear Carpet (Two Door Models):
1. Remove the grommets under the front seat (one left and one right). First the grommet for 1. Remove the rear seats.
(one left and one right). the cargo carpet and then the rear carpet.
2. Remove the side grommets (one left and one
2. Then pull the carpet out, to the rear and open 4. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the right). First the grommet from the side carpet
the carpet split around the front seats carpet split around the rear seats brackets. and then the rear carpet.
brackets.
Under Rear Seat Side Carpet

Pull Toward The Rear Of Vehicle 1 — Carpet Split 1 — Grommet
1 — Carpet Split
5. When reinstalling carpet please perform these 3. Remove the grommets under the front seat 8
steps in reverse order making sure that the (one left and one right).
carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar,
console, and refasten grommets.
4. Then pull the carpet out to the rear and open Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models):
the carpet split around the front seats 1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat
brackets. (one left and one right).
2. Pull the carpet out to the rear and open the
carpet split around the seat belt attachment.
Rear Load Floor

1 — Side Supports
2 — Load Floor
Pull Carpet To The Rear
1 — Carpet Split 4. When reinstalling carpet please perform these
2 — Rear Carpet Under Rear Seat steps in reverse order making sure that the
1 — Carpet Split console, and refasten grommets.
5. When reinstalling carpet please perform these 2 — Rear Carpet
steps in reverse order making sure that the
console, and refasten grommets. 3. Remove the carpet under the load floor and
the side support and then pull the carpet out.
Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models) With Gap Hider: Side Carpet (Four Door Models): Side Carpet (Two Door Models):
1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat 1. Remove the side grommets (one left and one 1. Remove the side grommet and then the lower
(one left and one right). right). one (left and right).
2. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the 2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top flange, 2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top flange,
carpet split around the seat belt attachment then all around the perimeter and open the then all around the perimeter and open the
and under the center seat bracket. carpet split around the seat belt attachment. carpet split around the seat belt attachment.
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform these
steps in reverse order making sure that the
console, and refasten grommets.
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS

Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
WARNING!
Under Rear Seat Inside Sidewall Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
1 — Carpet Split 1 — Top Flange purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and
if used in closed areas they may cause
2 — Grommets 2 — Grommet
respiratory harm. 8
3 — Rear Carpet 3 — Side Carpet
Seat Belt Maintenance

3. When reinstalling carpet please perform these 3. When reinstalling carpet please perform these
steps in reverse order making sure that the steps in reverse order making sure that the Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar, carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B-pillar, solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
console, and refasten grommets. console, and refasten grommets. fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
if the buckles do not work properly. CAUTION! your leather upholstery.
 Damage caused by these type of products NOTE:
WARNING! may not be covered by your New Vehicle If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a Limited Warranty. show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
collision and leave you with no protection. transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recommends
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Mopar® total care leather cleaner applied on a
Lenses
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt The lenses in front of the instruments in this
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning CAUTION!
or if you have questions regarding seat belt or the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
the plastic. Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may
Certified Collision Care Program facility for may be used, but do not use high alcohol content result.
inspection. or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
GLASS SURFACES
PLASTIC AND C OATED PARTS LEATHER SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
for leather upholstery. commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
CAUTION! Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
 Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel- regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the the leather upholstery and should be removed antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be instruments that may scratch the elements.
away immediately. removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
(Continued) Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
417
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the activation of the Brake Warning Light. loose particles.
A-pillar, visible from outside of the vehicle through In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., Spare Tire Torque Specifications
the windshield. repeated brake applications with the engine off)
the brakes will still function. However, the effort Lug Nut/Bolt **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/Bolt
required to brake the vehicle will be much greater Torque Bolt Size Socket Size
than that required with the power system 59 Ft-Lb
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
operating. (80 N·m)
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to Spare tire torque is for the spare tire carrier
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the located on the swing gate.
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
Vehicle Identification Number should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
NOTE: socket.
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS 9
BRAKE SYSTEM Lug Nut/Bolt **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/Bolt
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake Torque Bolt Size Socket Size
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose
130 Ft-Lb
normal capability, the remaining system will still M14 x 1.50 22 mm
(176 N·m) Wheel Mounting Surface
function. However, there will be some loss of
overall braking effectiveness. You may notice **Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
418 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until

each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE 3.6L E NGINE
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt While operating on gasoline with the required This engine is designed to meet all
(do not insert it halfway). octane number, hearing a light knocking sound emissions regulations and provide
from the engine is not a cause for concern. satisfactory fuel economy and
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy performance when using high-quality
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of unleaded regular gasoline having an octane rating
gasoline with an octane number lower than of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use
recommended octane can cause engine failure of higher octane premium gasoline will not provide
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as REFORMULATED G ASOLINE
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of Many areas of the country require the use of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
Torque Patterns 2.0L E NGINE contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt This engine is designed to meet all
quality.
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are emissions requirements, and provide
properly seated against the wheel. satisfactory fuel economy and The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
performance, when using high-quality Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
WARNING! unleaded regular gasoline having an octane rating provide improved performance and durability of
of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The engine and fuel system components.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the use of 91 or higher octane premium gasoline will
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until allow these engines to operate to optimal
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow performance. This increase in performance is most Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
this warning may result in personal injury. noticeable in hot weather or other heavier load octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
conditions, such as while towing. corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 419
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Problems that result from using gasoline CNG AND LP F UEL SYSTEM
contains a higher level of detergents to containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
further aide in minimizing engine and gasoline containing methanol are not the MODIFICATIONS
fuel system deposits. When available, responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or Modifications that allow the engine to run on
the usage of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane
recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list Warranty. (LP) may result in damage to the engine,
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
DO N OT U SE E-85 IN N ON-FLEX F UEL that result from running CNG or LP are not the
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials VEHICLES responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can Warranty.
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials. of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void MMT I N GASOLINE
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
oxygenates such as ethanol. that is blended into some gasoline to increase
symptoms:
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
CAUTION!  Operate in a lean mode performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
 OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol  Poor engine performance
reduces emissions system performance in some
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting  Poor cold start and cold drivability vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The
 Increased risk for fuel system component corro-
system components, cause emissions to exceed
sion MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on 9
the applicable standard, and/or cause the the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
observe pump labels as they should clearly MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
communicate if a fuel contains greater than reformulated gasoline.
15% ethanol (E-15).
FUEL S YSTEM CAUTIONS NOTE:

WARNING!
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
CAUTION! system can result in civil penalties being assessed Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
against you. agent. They can be unstable under certain
Follow these guidelines to maintain your conditions and hazardous or explosive when
vehicle’s performance: FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE mixed with diesel fuel.
 The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To
engine performance and damage the emis- Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low prevent fuel system trouble, drain the
sions control system. Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur accumulated water from the fuel/water separator
 An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions using the fuel/water separator drain provided on
malfunctions can cause the catalytic control system. the fuel filter housing. If you buy good quality fuel
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent and follow the cold weather advice above, fuel
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable
burning odor or some light smoke, your engine conditioners should not be required in your vehicle.
supplier in your vehicle. For most year-round
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may If available in your area, a high cetane “premium”
service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM (formerly
require immediate service. Contact an autho- diesel fuel may offer improved cold-starting and
known as the American Society for Testing and
rized dealer for service assistance. warm-up performance.
Materials) specification D-975 Grade S15 will
 The use of fuel additives, which are now being provide good performance. If the vehicle is
CAUTION!
sold as octane enhancers, is not recom- exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F or -7°C), or
mended. Most of these products contain high is required to operate at colder-than-normal If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
concentrations of methanol. Fuel system conditions for prolonged periods, use climatized DO NOT START engine before you drain the water
damage or vehicle performance problems No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with from the fuel filter(s) to avoid engine damage
resulting from the use of such fuels or addi- 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better Ú page 362.
tives is not the responsibility of the manufac- protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the
turer and may void or not be covered under fuel filters.
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DIESEL F UEL SPECIFICATIONS (B6–B20) is desired, the maintenance schedule is

CAUTION!
subject to shorter intervals.
This diesel engine has been developed to take Use of blends greater than 20% is not approved.
The oil and filter change along with fuel filter
advantage of the high energy content and Use of blends greater than 20% can result in
replacement is subject to shorter intervals when
generally lower cost No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel engine damage. Such damage is not covered by
operating your engine on biodiesel greater than
fuel or No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfur climatized diesel the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5%. Do not use biodiesel greater than 20%.
fuels.
For regular use of biodiesel blends between 6%
NOTE:
and 20% (B6–B20) it is important that you
 If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gasoline CAUTION!
understand and comply with these requirements
on your diesel vehicle, do not start the engine. Ú page 352. In the event that the vehicle is filled with
Damage to the engine and fuel system could biodiesel and not used for more than a month,
occur. Please call an authorized dealer for CAUTION! the fuel should either be used up by driving (up
service. to quarter tank) and filled with standard diesel
Failure to comply with Oil Change requirements
 A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting blends with less than 5% that is normally
for vehicles operating on biodiesel blends
ASTM specification D-975 may be used with available. This will help prevent the fuel filter
between 6% and 20% (B6–B20) will result in
your diesel engine without any adjustments to clogging and potential damage to the fuel
premature engine wear. Such wear is not
regular service schedules. injection system due to degraded biodiesel,
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
 Commercially available fuel additives are not
which is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
necessary for the proper operation of your Warranty.
Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable
diesel engine.
resources typically derived from animal fat,
 No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should only be rapeseed oil (Rapeseed Methyl Ester (RME) base), Biodiesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient
used where extended arctic conditions (-10°F or soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester (SME or SOME) Temperatures
or -23°C) exist. base). Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient
9
BIODIESEL FUEL R EQUIREMENTS Biodiesel fuel has inherent limitations which temperatures, which may pose problems for both
require that you understand and adhere to the storage and operation. Precautions can be
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM following requirements if you use blends of necessary at low ambient temperatures, such as
specification D975 is recommended for use with Biodiesel between 6% and 20% (B6–B20). There storing the fuel in a heated building or a heated
your diesel engine. If frequent operation with are no unique restrictions for the use of B5. storage tank, or using cold temperature additives.
Biodiesel blends that are between 6% and 20%
Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM Fuel Water Separation — Must Use Biodiesel Fuel Filter Change Intervals
Standards Mopar® Approved Fuel Filter Elements The use of biodiesel requires more frequent fuel
The quality of Biodiesel fuel may vary widely. Only Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and filter change intervals. When operating on
fuel produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the water accelerates microbial growth. Your Mopar® biodiesel between 6% and 20%, fuel filter
following specifications may be blended to meet filtration system is designed to provide adequate replacement intervals should be every second oil
Biodiesel blend B6 – B20 fuel meeting ASTM fuel water separation capabilities. change, and must not exceed 16,000 miles
specification D-7467: (25,750 km).
Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To
 Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification NOTE:
Required Oil Change Interval
D-975 and Biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting ASTM Under no circumstances should oil change
specification D-6751 Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been observed intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or
with the use of Biodiesel fuel. Fuel in oil must not 6 months, if regular operation occurs with 6% -
Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel exceed 5%. To ensure this limit is met your oil 20% biodiesel blends. Under no circumstances
Within Six Months Of Manufacture change interval must be maintained with in the should fuel filter replacement intervals exceed
Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which suggested schedule. The regular use of biodiesel every second oil change and must not exceed
can result in long term storage problems. Fuel between 6% and 20% requires intervals shorter 16,000 miles (25,750 km), if regular operation
produced to approved ASTM standards, if stored than the outlined 10,000 miles (16,000 km)and occurs with 6% - 20% biodiesel blends. Failure to
properly, provides for protection against fuel must not exceed the suggested schedule. When comply with these Oil Change and fuel filter
oxidation for up to six months. routinely operating on biodiesel between 6% and requirements for vehicles operating on biodiesel
20%, oil and filter replacement intervals must not blends up to B20 may result in premature engine
exceed 8,000 Miles (12,875 km) or six months, wear. Such wear is not covered by the New Vehicle
which ever comes first. Limited Warranty. The engine may suffer severe
damage if operated with concentrations of
biodiesel higher than 20%.
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Two Door Models 17.5 Gallons 66 Liters
Four Door Models 21.5 Gallons 81 Liters
3.0L Diesel Engine 18.3 Gallons 69 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 5.1 Gallons 19.3 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
2.0L Engine 5 Quarts 4.73 Liters
3.0L Diesel Engine 9 Quarts 8.5 Liters
Cooling System *
2.0L Engine Intercooler 3.7 Quarts 3.5 Liters
3.6L Engine 13.4 Quarts 12.7 Liters
3.6L Motor Generator Unit (MGU) 2.2 Quarts 2.1 Liters
3.6L Power Pack Unit (PPU) Coolant 3.3 Quarts 3.1 Liters 9
3.0L Diesel Engine 14.8 Quarts 14 Liters
* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

GASOLINE ENGINES
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Engine Coolant (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Intercooler (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
We recommend using Mopar® API SP/GF-6A Certified SAE 5W-30 Full
Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic 5W-30 API SP engine
Engine Oil — 2.0L Engine oil can be used but must have the API Donut trademark Ú page 360.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended API SP/GF-6A or equivalent oil can cause
engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil — 3.6L Engine
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the
API Starburst trademark Ú page 360.
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter
Engine Oil Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection — 2.0L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection — 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
 Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
 This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
DIESEL ENGINES
Engine Coolant (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
We recommend using Mopar® API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine
Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
Engine Oil — 3.0L Diesel Engine
MS-12991. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 5W-40 engine oil can be used but
must have the API Donut trademark Ú page 360. 9
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter
Engine Oil Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
We recommend using Mopar® Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating. Using a
Fuel Filters — 3.0L Diesel Engine fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturer filtration and water separating
requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.

Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal
law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway
Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur
Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the
emissions control system. For most year-round service, Number 2 diesel fuel
Fuel Selection — 3.0L Diesel Engine meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance.
We recommend you use a blend of up to 5% biodiesel, meeting ASTM
specification D-975 with your diesel engine.
This vehicle is compatible with biodiesel blends greater than 5% but no
greater than 20% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-7467 provided the
shortened maintenance intervals are followed as directed.
Mopar® Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) (API Certified) or equivalent that has been
Diesel Exhaust Fluid — 3.0L Diesel Engine API Certified to the ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not API Certified to ISO
22241 may result in system damage.
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) or
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle Differential We recommend using Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85) (API GL-5).

We recommend using Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W140)
Rear Axle Differential (M200 Sales Code DRZ)
(API GL-5).
We recommend using Mopar® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85) (API GL-5).
Rear Axle Differential (M220 Sales Codes DRE/DRF) Models equipped with Trac-Lok Limited Slip Differential require a friction
modifier additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1709.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend using Mopar® Electric Steering Pump Fluid.
9
428
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE  Authorized dealer name
 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
FOR YOUR VEHICLE FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
 Vehicle delivery date and mileage
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
PREPARE F OR T HE APPOINTMENT happy with our products and services. FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
All work to be performed may not be covered by the Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the P.O. Box 21–8004
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you Phone: (877) 426-5337
clue to the current problem. get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC's
authorized dealers have the facilities, FCA C ANADA INC. C USTOMER CENTER
PREPARE A L IST factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
P.O. Box 1621
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the correctly and in a timely manner. Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
specific work you want done. If you've had an
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
accident or work done that is not on your
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason (800) 387-9983 French
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
you are still not satisfied, talk to the general
BE R EASONABLE WITH REQUESTS manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They
MEXICO
want to know if you need assistance. If an authorized Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
If you list a number of items and you must have
dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may Sante Fe C.P. 05109
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
contact FCA US LLC's Customer Assistance center.
situation with the service advisor and list the items Mexico, D.F.
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer
center should include the following information: In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to  Owner's name and address
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
make these arrangements when you call for an
 Owner's telephone number (mobile, home and
appointment.
office)
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 429
PUERTO R ICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS SERVICE CONTRACT WARNING!

FCA Caribbean LLC You may have purchased a service contract for a Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
P.O. Box 191857 vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of only), some of its constituents, and certain
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC’s New Vehicle vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
San Juan 00919-1857 Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle known to the State of California to cause cancer
Phone: (877) 426-5337 Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
Fax: (787) 782-3345 protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection certain products of component wear contain, or
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a emit, chemicals known to the State of California
HEARING O R S PEECH I MPAIRED Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in reproductive harm.
(TDD/TTY) the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, date. If you have any questions about the service
FCA US LLC has installed special Telecommu- contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract WARRANTY INFORMATION
nication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / See the Warranty Information for the terms and
its customer center. Any hearing or speech
(800) 387-9983 French). provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a
this vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service om for further information.
States, can communicate with the manufacturer contract you may have purchased from another
by dialing 1-800-380-2479. manufacturer. If you require service after FCA US See the Warranty Information for the terms and
LLC’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
please refer to the contract documents, and applicable to this vehicle and market.
require assistance can use the special needs relay
service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY contact the person listed in those documents. Use this QR code to access your
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, We appreciate that you have made a major digital experience.
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay investment when you purchased the vehicle. An 10
Service operator. authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience.
430 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR® PARTS To contact NHTSA, you may call the PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories To order the following manuals, you may use either
and factory filled fluids are available from an
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: the website or the phone numbers listed below.
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
Service Manuals
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain www.safercar.gov; or write to:
its original condition. Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
information about motor vehicle safety diagrams, and charts.
I N T HE 50 U NITED STATES AND
from http://www.safercar.gov. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
WASHINGTON, D.C.
I N C ANADA Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
If you believe that your vehicle has a diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
defect that could cause a crash or cause If you believe that your vehicle has a manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
injury or death, you should immediately safety defect, you should contact the computer-controlled vehicle systems and features.
inform the National Highway Traffic Customer Service Department They show exactly how to find and correct
immediately. Canadian customers who problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and
addition to notifying FCA US LLC. wish to report a safety defect to the
a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Canadian government should contact
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
may open an investigation, and if it finds Procedure manuals, visit:
Investigations and Recalls at
that a safety defect exists in a group of www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
1-800-333-0510 or go to
vehicles, it may order a recall and
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
PCDB-BDPP.
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer, or FCA US LLC.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 431
Owner's Manuals 1. This device may not cause harmful La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with interference, and siguientes dos condiciones:
the assistance of service and engineering 2. This device must accept any interference 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA received, including interference that may cause interferencia perjudicial y
vehicles. cause undesired operation. 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
To access your Owner's Information online, visit cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
www.mopar.com/om (US) or pueda causar su operación no deseada.
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de NOTE:
Or licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux Changes or modifications not expressly approved
Call Tech Authority toll free at: conditions suivantes: by the party responsible for compliance could void
 1-800-890-4038 (US) 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
et
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
Archway at: brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
le fonctionnement.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following 10
two conditions:
432
INDEX
A Air Conditioning Filter ..............................68, 367 Automatic Headlights .......................................58
About Your Brakes .........................................417 Air Conditioning System ...................................67 Automatic High Beams.....................................58
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................68 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............67
Control) ................................................ 169, 171 Air Filter ........................................................ 360 Automatic Transmission................................ 153
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............372 Air Pressure Adding Fluid .............................................. 377
Adding Fuel .......................................... 186, 187 Tires ......................................................... 398 Fluid And Filter Change............................. 377
Additives, Fuel ...............................................418 Alarm Fluid Change............................................. 377
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................248 Arm The System ..........................................24 Fluid Level Check............................. 376, 377
Air Bag Disarm The System .....................................24 Fluid Type ........................................ 377, 426
Air Bag Operation ......................................304 Security Alarm ....................................24, 131 Gear Ranges ............................................. 153
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 302, 305 Alterations/Modifications Special Additives ...................................... 376
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 313, 346 Vehicle.........................................................11 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode... 156
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................346 Android Auto ........................................ 250, 251 AutoPark ....................................................... 140
Front Air Bag ................................... 303, 305 Android Auto™ S........................................ 250 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........71
If Deployment Occurs ................................312 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 372, 423 Auxiliary Power Outlet ......................................71
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................310 Disposal ................................................... 373 Auxiliary Switches ............................................73
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............313 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 275 Axle Fluid....................................................... 426
Maintenance .............................................313 Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 131 Axle Lock .............................................. 161, 162
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............303 Apple CarPlay ....................................... 250, 253
Transporting Pets ......................................327 Apple CarPlay® S ...................................... 252 B
Air Bag Light ............................... 128, 302, 327 Assist, Hill Start............................................. 280 Battery ................................................. 129, 358
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Audio Settings ............................................... 234 Charging System Light .............................. 129
Filter) .............................................................360 Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 207 Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................17
Air Conditioner Maintenance .........................366 Auto Down Power Windows .............................75 Belts, Seat .................................................... 327
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 366, 367 Automatic Dimming Mirror ...............................51 Blind Spot Monitoring ................................... 284
Air Conditioner System ..................................366 Automatic Door Locks ......................................28
433
Bluetooth Cargo Tie-Downs ........................................... 114 Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 403
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Carpeting ...................................................... 411 Connected Services ...................................... 254
Or Audio Device After Pairing ................243 CD ................................................................. 236 Connected Services FAQ ............................... 267
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................368 Cellular Phone .............................................. 272 Connected Services Features ....................... 257
B-Pillar Location.............................................395 Center High Mounted Stop Light ................... 390 Connected Services, Getting Started ............ 256
Brake Assist System ......................................276 Certification Label......................................... 191 Connected Services, Introduction ................. 254
Brake Control System ....................................276 Chains, Tire ................................................... 405 Connector
Brake Fluid .......................................... 375, 426 Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 392 UCI ...............................................................69
Brake System ...................................... 374, 417 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .............69
Anti-Lock (ABS) ..........................................417 Light)............................................................. 138 Console ............................................................69
Fluid Check ...............................................375 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 327 Floor ............................................................69
Master Cylinder .........................................375 Checks, Safety .............................................. 327 Contract, Service ........................................... 429
Parking ......................................................148 Child Restraint .............................................. 314 Controls ........................................................ 227
Warning Light ............................................128 Child Restraints Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 373
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................153 Booster Seats ........................................... 317 Cooling System ............................................. 371
Bulb Replacement ............................... 387, 389 Child Seat Installation .............................. 324 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 372
Bulbs, Light.......................................... 329, 387 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 322 Coolant Level ............................................ 373
Bumper End Cap Removal .............................201 Infant And Child Restraints....................... 316 Cooling Capacity ....................................... 423
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 320 Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 373
C Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 318 Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 372
Camera, Rear ................................................184 Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 316 Inspection ........................................ 371, 373
Capacities, Fluid ............................................423 Seating Positions ...................................... 317 Points To Remember ................................ 374
Caps, Filler Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 418 Pressure Cap ............................................ 373
Fuel ...........................................................186 Cleaning Radiator Cap............................................. 373
Oil (Engine) ................................................355 Wheels ..................................................... 404 Selection Of Coolant
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................373 Climate Control (Antifreeze) .........................372, 423, 424
Car Washes ...................................................409 Automatic ....................................................62 Corrosion Protection ..................................... 408
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................329 Manual ........................................................65 Cruise Control (Speed Control) ............. 169, 171 11
Cargo Area Cover ...........................................114 Cold Weather Operation ............................... 141 Cruise Light .......................................... 136, 137
Cargo Load Floor ...........................................114
434
Customer Assistance .....................................428 Door Frame ................................................... 106 Emergency, In Case Of

Customer Programmable Features................208 Installation ............................................... 106 Jacking...................................................... 333
Cybersecurity .................................................207 Removal ................................................... 106 Jump Starting ........................................... 338
Door Locks Tow Hooks ................................................ 345
D Automatic ....................................................28 Emission Control System Maintenance......... 138
Daytime Running Lights ................................... 58 Door Off Mirror Kit ...........................................34 Engine ........................................................... 355
Dealer Service ...............................................359 Door Off Mirror Kit — If Equipped S ..............34 Air Cleaner ................................................ 360
Defroster, Windshield ....................................327 Doors ...............................................................25 Block Heater ............................................. 143
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .............................. 60 Removal ............................................... 29, 32 Break-In Recommendations ..................... 147
Deleting A Phone ...........................................243 Removal, Front ............................................29 Checking Oil Level .................................... 358
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................137 Removal, Rear .............................................32 Compartment .........................355, 356, 357
Diesel Drag & Drop .................................................. 225 Compartment Identification ....355, 356, 357
Display Messages ........................... 126, 127 Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter............ 362 Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 424
Diesel Fuel .....................................................420 Driver Memory Presets ................................. 233 Cooling...................................................... 371
Diesel Fuel Requirements .............................420 Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ...............................43, 44 Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 329
Bulk Storage Of .........................................188 Driving .......................................................... 200 Fails To Start............................................. 142
Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming .....................364 Flooded, Starting ...................................... 142
Dimmer Switch E Fuel Requirements .......................... 418, 423
Headlight..................................................... 58 Electric Brake Control System....................... 276 Idling ......................................................... 145
Dipsticks Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 275 Jump Starting ........................................... 338
Oil (Engine) ................................................358 Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 276, 284 Oil ...........................................360, 423, 424
Disable Vehicle Towing ..................................344 Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................53 Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 355
Disc Drive ......................................................236 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........71 Oil Filter .................................................... 360
Disconnecting ................................................243 Electrical Power Outlets ...................................71 Oil Reset ................................................... 121
Disposal Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 277 Oil Selection..................................... 360, 423
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......................373 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light...... 129 Oil Synthetic.............................................. 360
Disturb ...........................................................246 Emergency Overheating .............................................. 341
Door Ajar.............................................. 129, 130 In Case Of ................................................. 330 Starting ..................................................... 139
Door Ajar Light ..................................... 129, 130 SOS Emergency Call ................................. 330 Enhanced Accident Response
Emergency Brake.......................................... 148 Feature ................................................ 313, 346
435
Ethanol ..........................................................419 Fluid Level Checks ........................................ 375 Materials Added ....................................... 418
Exhaust Gas Caution .....................................329 Brake ........................................................ 375 Methanol .................................................. 419
Exhaust Gas Cautions....................................329 Engine Oil ................................................. 358 Octane Rating .................................. 418, 424
Exhaust System ................................... 329, 370 Fluid, Brake .................................................. 426 Requirements .................................. 420, 423
Exterior Lights .........................................57, 329 Fog Lights ..................................................... 389 Specifications .................................. 421, 424
Fog Lights, Service ........................................ 389 Tank Capacity ........................................... 423
F Fold And Tumble Rear Seat .............................45 Fueling ................................................. 186, 187
Fabric Care ....................................................409 Fold-Flat Seats .................................................43 Fuses ............................................................ 377
Fabric Top ......................................................409 Folding Rear Seats...........................................45
Family Alerts ..................................................266 Folding Windshield ....................................... 109 G
Filters Forward Collision Warning ............................ 288 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....................53
Air Cleaner.................................................360 Four Wheel Drive .......................................... 157 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...................... 186, 187
Air Conditioning ..................................68, 367 Operation ................................................. 157 Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................. 418
Engine Fuel ...............................................362 Shifting ..................................................... 157 Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 418
Engine Oil ........................................ 360, 424 System ..................................................... 157 Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 418
Engine Oil Disposal ...................................360 Four Wheel Drive Operation .......................... 159 Gauges
Flashers Four-Way Hazard Flasher .............................. 330 Voltage...................................................... 144
Hazard Warning.........................................330 Freedom Panels ...............................................96 Gear Ranges ........................................ 150, 153
Turn Signal ................................................329 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................................ 343 Glass Cleaning .............................................. 416
Turn Signals ........................... 136, 389, 390 Front Axle (Differential) ................................. 375 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 192
Flash-To-Pass .................................................. 58 Fuel ...................................................... 418, 420 GVWR ............................................................ 191
Flat Tire Changing ................................ 391, 402 Adding ............................................. 186, 187
Flat Tire Stowage ................................. 391, 402 Additives ................................................... 418 H
Flooded Engine Starting ................................142 Clean Air ................................................... 418 Half-Door Installation .......................................36
Fluid Capacities .............................................423 Ethanol ..................................................... 419 Half-Door Installation — If Equipped S ..........36
Fluid Leaks ....................................................329 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................................. 186 Hard Top ..........................................................76
Fluid Level Filter ......................................................... 362 Hard Top Front Panel(s) Removal S ..............93
Manual Transmission ................................376 Gasoline ................................................... 418 Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 330 11
Head Restraints ...............................................48
436
Headlights Instrument Cluster ........................................ 116 Keyless Enter'n Go™ ........................................26

Automatic .................................................... 58 Descriptions ............................................. 136 Passive Entry ...............................................26
Bulb Replacement .....................................389 Display...................................................... 120 Keys .................................................................16
Cleaning ....................................................408 Engine Oil Reset ....................................... 121 Replacement ...............................................18
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .......... 58 Menu Items .............................................. 122
Lights On Reminder..................................... 59 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 416 L
Passing........................................................ 58 Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ................. 378 Lane Change Assist..........................................59
Replacing ..................................................389 Interior And Instrument Lights .........................59 Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 296
Heated Mirrors ................................................ 53 Interior Appearance Care .............................. 411 Latches ......................................................... 329
Heated Seats ................................................... 47 Interior Lights...................................................59 Hood ................................................ 112, 130
Heated Steering Wheel .................................... 42 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................60 Leaks, Fluid ................................................... 329
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Intervention Regeneration Strategy .............. 365 Life Of Tires ................................................... 400
Switch .............................................................. 58 Inverter Light Bulbs ........................................... 329, 387
Hill Descent Control .......................................279 Power ..........................................................72 Lights ............................................................ 329
Hill Descent Control Indicator ........................279 Air Bag ....................................128, 302, 327
Hill Start Assist ..............................................280 J Automatic Headlights ..................................58
Hitches Jack Location ................................................ 334 Brake Assist Warning................................ 279
Trailer Towing ............................................193 Jack Operation .............................................. 335 Brake Warning .......................................... 128
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .................... 53 Jacking Instructions ...................................... 335 Bulb Replacement ........................... 387, 389
Hood Prop ......................................................112 Jump Starting ............................................... 338 Center Mounted Stop ............................... 390
Hood Release ................................................112 Cruise .............................................. 136, 137
K Daytime Running .........................................58
I Key Fob Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...........................58
Ignition ............................................................ 19 Arm The System ..........................................24 Electric Power Steering ............................. 129
Switch ......................................................... 19 Disarm The System .....................................24 Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
In Case Of Emergency ...................................330 Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............18 Indicator ...................................... 130, 131
Inside Rearview Mirror ..................................... 51 Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Exterior .............................................. 57, 329
Entry) ...............................................................17 Fog............................................................ 389
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Fuel Filler Cap ........................................... 132
Entry) ...............................................................18 Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 330
437
Headlights .................................................389 Loading Vehicle ............................................ 191 Mirrors .............................................................51

High Beam .................................................. 58 Tires ......................................................... 395 Automatic Dimming .....................................51
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..................... 58 Locking Electric Powered ..........................................53
Hill Descent Control Indicator....................279 Axle .................................................. 161, 162 Electric Remote ...........................................53
Interior ........................................................ 59 Locks Heated .........................................................53
Lights On Reminder..................................... 59 Automatic Door............................................28 Outside ........................................................52
Low Fuel ....................................................132 Child Protection ...........................................28 Rearview ......................................................51
Low Washer Fluid ......................................132 Power Door ..................................................26 Vanity ...........................................................52
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .......132 Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 290 Mobile App .................................................... 256
Oil Temperature ........................................130 Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider® Modifications/Alterations
Park...........................................................136 Position S .....................................................76 Vehicle .........................................................11
Passing........................................................ 58 Lubrication, Body .......................................... 368 Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 290
Rear Servicing ...........................................390 Lug Nuts/Bolts.............................................. 417 Mopar Parts .................................................. 430
Rear Tail Lamps ........................................390 Luggage Carrier ............................................ 114
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................130 N
Security Alarm ...........................................131 M New Vehicle Break-In Period ......................... 147
Service ............................................ 387, 389 Maintenance ................................................. 102
Side Marker...............................................390 Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 358 O
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...............290 Maintenance Schedule ........................ 347, 351 Occupant Restraints ..................................... 295
Traction Control .........................................279 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel)............. 418, 424
Transmission Temperature .......................131 Engine) ................................................ 132, 138 Off Road Pages ............................................. 272
Turn Signal ................................................329 Manual Accessory Gauges............................ 272, 274
Turn Signals ........................... 136, 389, 390 Park Release ............................................ 341 Drivetrain ......................................... 272, 273
Warning Instrument Cluster Service ..................................................... 430 Pitch And Roll .................................. 272, 274
Descriptions ................................ 130, 136 Manual Transmission .......................... 149, 376 Status Bar........................................ 272, 273
Load Floor, Cargo ..........................................114 Fluid Level Check ..................................... 376 Oil Filter, Change ........................................... 360
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .....................125 Lubricant Selection ......................... 376, 426 Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 360
Load Shed Battery Saver On ..........................125 Shift Speeds ............................................. 150 Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 130 11
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ............125 Media Mode.................................................. 236 Oil Reset ....................................................... 121
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............125 Methanol ...................................................... 419 Oil, Engine ............................................ 360, 424
438
Capacity ....................................................423 Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 395 Rear Axle (Differential) .................................. 375
Checking ...................................................358 Power Rear Camera ................................................. 184
Dipstick .....................................................358 Brakes ...................................................... 417 Rear Cross Path ............................................ 287
Disposal ....................................................360 Door Locks ..................................................26 Rear ParkSense System................................ 180
Filter ................................................ 360, 424 Inverter ........................................................72 Rear Seat Reminder Alert ............................. 282
Filter Disposal ...........................................360 Mirrors .........................................................53 Rear Swing Gate ........................................... 113
Identification Logo.....................................360 Steering .................................................... 164 Rear Wiper/Washer .........................................61
Materials Added To ...................................360 Windows ......................................................75 Recreational Towing...................................... 198
Pressure Warning Light .............................130 Power Sliding Top ......................................... 102 Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..... 199
Recommendation ............................ 360, 423 Operation ................................................. 102 Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Synthetic ...................................................360 Pinch Protect ............................................ 102 Neutral (N)............................................ 200
Viscosity ....................................................423 Quarter Window Removal ......................... 104 Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 418
Onboard Diagnostic System ..........................137 Power Steering Fluid ..................................... 426 Refrigerant .................................................... 367
Operating Precautions ...................................137 Power Top Quarter Windows ......................... 104 Registering SiriusXM Guardian ..................... 255
Operator Manual Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 300 Release, Hood............................................... 112
Owner's Manual ........................................430 Preparation For Jacking ................................ 333 Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 296
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................ 52 Presets ......................................................... 233 Remote Control
Overheating, Engine ......................................341 Pretensioners Starting System ...........................................21
Seat Belts ................................................. 300 Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock ...261, 267
P Remote Features, Horn And Lights ............... 262
Paddle Shifters ..............................................156 R Remote Features, Starting ................... 261, 269
Paint Care ......................................................408 Radial Ply Tires ............................................. 399 Remote Keyless Entry
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ........... 373 Arm The Alarm .............................................24
Phone S......................................................241 Radio Disarm The Alarm ........................................24
Parking Brake ................................................148 Presets ..................................................... 233 Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............18
ParkSense System, Rear ...............................180 Radio Controls .............................................. 227 Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 226
Passive Entry ................................................... 26 Radio Mode .................................................. 227 Remote Start (Diesel) .......................................23
Personalized Main Menu Bar ........................225 Radio Operation ................................... 227, 272 Remote Start (Gas) ..........................................21
Pets ...............................................................327 Radio Remote Controls ................................. 226
Phone Mode ..................................................239 Raising The Soft Top S .................................87
439
Remote Starting Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 329 Seats ................................................................43

Exit Remote Start Mode .............................. 22 Satellite Radio .............................................. 228 Adjustment ..................................................43
Uconnect Customer Programmable Saved Radio Stations ................................... 233 Fold And Tumble Rear .................................45
Features.................................................. 22 Schedule, Maintenance ....................... 347, 351 Heated .........................................................47
Uconnect Settings ....................................... 22 Seat Belt Reminder ....................................... 130 Height Adjustment .......................................43
Remote Starting System ........................... 21, 23 Seat Belts ............................................ 296, 327 Rear Folding ................................................43
Removable Doors ..................................... 29, 32 Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 299 Tilting ...........................................................43
Front............................................................ 29 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 299 Security Alarm ........................................ 24, 131
Rear ............................................................ 32 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Arm The System ...........................................24
Removable Top ..............................................102 Anchorage ............................................ 299 Disarm The System......................................24
Removing The Soft Top S ............................. 90 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 300 Selec - Speed Control .................................... 282
Replacement Bulbs .......................................387 Child Restraints ........................................ 314 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 424
Replacement Keys........................................... 18 Energy Management Feature ................... 300 Send & Go ............................................ 263, 268
Replacement Tires.........................................401 Extender ................................................... 300 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................18
Reporting Safety Defects ...............................430 Front Seat........................................ 296, 298 Sentry Key Replacement ..................................18
Restraints, Child ............................................314 Inspection................................................. 327 Service Assistance ........................................ 428
Restraints, Head .............................................. 48 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 298 Service Contract ............................................ 429
Roadside Assistance ........................... 262, 268 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 299 Service Manuals ........................................... 430
Roll Over Warning ............................................ 10 Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 296 Settings ......................................................... 207
Roof Type Carrier ...........................................114 Operating Instructions .............................. 298 Settings, Audio .............................................. 234
Rotation, Tires ...............................................406 Pregnant Women ...................................... 300 Shifting .......................................................... 151
Pretensioners ........................................... 300 Automatic Transmission .................. 151, 153
S Rear Seat ................................................. 296 Manual Transmission ............................... 149
Safety ............................................................225 Reminder.................................................. 296 Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .........................327 Seat Belt Extender.................................... 300 Case Neutral (N) ................................... 199
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................329 Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 300 Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Safety Defects, Reporting ..............................430 Untwisting Procedure ............................... 299 Case Neutral (N) ................................... 200
Safety Features .............................................225 Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 415 Shoulder Belts .............................................. 296 11
Safety Information, Tire .................................391 Side Step Removal ........................................ 200
Safety Tips .....................................................327
440
Signals, Turn ......................136, 329, 389, 390 Engine Fails To Start................................. 142 T
Sirius Satellite Radio .....................................228 Manual Transmission ............................... 139 Telescoping Steering Column ...........................42
Favorites ...................................................231 Remote ........................................................21 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .............67
Replay .......................................................230 Starting And Operating.................................. 139 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ................................. 114
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Starting Procedures ............................. 139, 142 Tilt Steering Column .........................................42
Browse in SXM ..........................................231 Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines) ........... 142 Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 395
Favorites ...................................................231 Steering ...........................................................42 Tire Markings ................................................ 391
Replay .......................................................230 Power ....................................................... 164 Tire Safety Information.................................. 391
Smart Watch ..................................................267 Tilt Column ..................................................42 Tires .................................. 329, 398, 402, 406
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............................405 Wheel, Heated .............................................42 Aging (Life Of Tires) ................................... 400
Snow Tires .....................................................402 Wheel, Tilt....................................................42 Air Pressure .............................................. 398
Soft Top .................................................... 76, 84 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..................... 226 Chains ...................................................... 405
Soft Top Windows ............................................ 84 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ...... 226 Changing .................................................. 333
SOS Call ............................................... 257, 267 Stolen Vehicle Assistance .................... 264, 269 Compact Spare ......................................... 403
Spare Tires ................................. 335, 402, 403 Stop/Start ............................................ 165, 167 General Information ........................ 398, 402
Specifications Storage ............................................69, 84, 104 High Speed ............................................... 399
Fuel (Gasoline) ..........................................424 Behind the Seat...........................................69 Inflation Pressure ..................................... 398
Oil ..............................................................424 Storage, Vehicle ............................................ 407 Life Of Tires .............................................. 400
Speed Control Store Radio Presets ...................................... 233 Load Capacity ........................................... 395
Accel/Decel ...............................................171 Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 407 Pressure Monitoring System
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) .............................175 Stuck, Freeing ............................................... 343 (TPMS) ......................................... 133, 290
Cancel .......................................................171 Sun Roof ....................................................... 102 Quality Grading ......................................... 406
Resume .....................................................171 Sunrider® For Hard Top...................................99 Radial ....................................................... 399
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......................171 Sway Bar Disconnect Replacement ............................................ 401
Starting ................................................ 139, 142 Electronic ................................................. 162 Rotation .................................................... 406
Automatic Transmission .................. 139, 143 Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 284 Safety .............................................. 391, 398
Button ......................................................... 19 Swing Gate, Rear .......................................... 113 Sizes ......................................................... 392
Cold Weather ............................................141 Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 360 Snow Tires ................................................ 402
Engine Block Heater ..................................143 System, Remote Starting .................................21 Spare Tires .............................335, 402, 403
441
Spinning ....................................................400 Trailer Weight................................................ 194 Call Continuation ...................................... 248

Tread Wear Indicators ...............................400 Transfer Case ............................................... 376 Call Controls ............................................. 245
Wheel Nut Torque .....................................417 Fluid ......................................................... 426 Call Termination ....................................... 247
To Open Hood ................................................112 Four-Wheel-Drive-Operation ............ 157, 159 Cancel Command ..................................... 241
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .......................194 Maintenance ............................................ 376 Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Top Transmission ................................................ 153 Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing..... 243
Dual............................................................. 76 Automatic ........................................ 153, 376 Help Command ......................................... 240
Hard ............................................................ 76 Fluid ......................................................... 426 Join Calls .................................................. 247
Power Sliding ............................................102 Maintenance ............................................ 376 Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Removable .................................................. 76 Manual ..................................................... 149 Favorite ................................................ 243
Soft ............................................................. 76 Shifting ..................................................... 151 Making A Second Call While Current
Tow Hooks Transporting Pets.......................................... 327 Call Is In Progress ................................. 247
Emergency ................................................345 Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 400 Managing Your Favorites .......................... 244
Towing ........................................ 192, 194, 344 Turn Signals ................................136, 389, 390 Natural Speech ......................................... 240
Disabled Vehicle........................................344 Operation .................................................. 240
Recreational ..............................................198 U Overview ................................................... 239
Weight .......................................................194 UCI Connector ..................................................69 Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Towing Behind A Motorhome .........................198 Uconnect Phone ................................................... 241
Trac-Lok Phone Call Features ................................. 244 Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio
Rear Axle ...................................................161 Things You Should Know About Your Device .................................................. 242
Traction Control .............................................284 Uconnect Phone ................................... 248 Phonebook Download ............................... 244
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .............................284 Uconnect Settings .......................................22 Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold............... 247
Trailer Towing ................................................192 Uconnect Phone ......................... 240, 241, 242 Power-Up .................................................. 250
Hitches ......................................................193 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Recent Calls.............................................. 245
Minimum Requirements............................195 Call Currently In Progress ..................... 246 Redial ....................................................... 247
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................194 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — To Remove A Favorite ............................... 244
Wiring ........................................................196 No Call Currently In Progress................ 246 Toggling Between Calls ............................. 247
Trailer Towing Guide ......................................194 Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 250 Touch-Tone Number Entry ........................ 245 11
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone .. 248
Voice Command ....................................... 248
442
Uconnect Settings ............................... 207, 208 V W

Customer Programmable Vanity Mirrors ..................................................52 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Features..................................22, 26, 208 Vehicle Finder ...................................... 263, 268 Descriptions) ................................................. 132
Passive Entry Programming......................... 26 Vehicle Health Alert ...................................... 265 Warnings, Roll Over ..........................................10
Uconnect System ...........................................222 Vehicle Health Report ................................... 265 Warranty Information .................................... 429
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...........................406 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 417 Washers, Windshield .................................... 358
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Vehicle Loading ................................... 191, 395 Washing Vehicle ............................................ 409
Connector ........................................................ 69 Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 359 Water Separator
Universal Garage Door Opener Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................11 Diesel Fuel ................................................ 362
(HomeLink®) — If Equipped S ...................... 53 Vehicle Notifications ..................................... 265 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 404
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................299 Vehicle Settings ............................................ 207 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 404
USB ................................................................. 69 Vehicle Storage ............................................. 407 Wi-Fi .............................................................. 263
USB Port .......................................................... 69 Voice Command............................ 50, 251, 253 Wind Buffeting .................................................76
Climate ........................................................67 Window Fogging ...............................................68
Voice Recognition ............................................50 Window Storage ...............................................84
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................50 Windows ..........................................................75
Power...........................................................75
Windshield
Folding ...................................................... 109
Windshield Defroster .................................... 327
Windshield Washers .............................. 60, 358
Fluid.......................................................... 358
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 368
Windshield Wipers ...........................................60
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 368
Wipers, Rear ....................................................61
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios,
right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
used in substitution therefore. cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. reference source for common questions.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca
Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. (Canada) or your local Jeep® brand dealer.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, or use public transportation.
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area WARNING
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
2 02 2 WRANG LER
your Jeep® brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only). OW NE R’ S M ANUAL
202 2 W R A N G L E R
U. S. Canada
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une Second Edition
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 22_JL_OM_EN_USC

2022 4xe Rubicon Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022 4xe Rubicon Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022 4xe Rubicon Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing

DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 16 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 116 3

4 STARTING AND OPERATING ............................................................................................... 139 4

6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................ 275 6

INTRODUCTION DOORS ....................................................................25 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ........................ 50

STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE MULTIMEDIA

CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS ...........................267 SAFETY IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................ 428 WARRANTY INFORMATION................................429

SYMBOLS KEY ROLLOVER WARNING

Rollover Warning Label

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS Red Warning Lights

Air Bag Warning Light Oil Pressure Warning Light

Brake Warning Light Oil Temperature Warning Light

Battery Charge Warning Light Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Swing Gate Open Warning Light Low Fuel Warning Light

Transmission Temperature Warning Light Low Washer Fluid Warning Light

AdBlue® (UREA) Injection System Failure Warning Light

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light

Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Indicator Lights

Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light

4WD Indicator Light

4WD Low Indicator Light

4WD Part Time Indicator Light

Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light

Green Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights

Cruise Control SET Indicator Light Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light

Front Fog Indicator Light Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light

Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light Cruise Control SET Indicator Light

Stop/Start Active Indicator Light

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

Blue Indicator Lights Gray Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light 1

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

2. Remove the depleted battery by inserting a

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

The system uses a key fob, keyless push button

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

NOTE:  The parking lights will turn on and remain on

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: menu screen within Uconnect Settings

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

NOTE:  Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

 The parking lights will turn on and remain on

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

NOTE: DOORS NOTE:

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

POWER D OOR L OCKS — IF EQUIPPED WARNING!

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE